P44x_ent__e44_web.pdf
Short Description
Download P44x_ent__e44_web.pdf...
Description
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Numerical Distance Protection VC2.x
Technical Guide P44x/EN T/E44
Technical Guide MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN T/E44 Page 1/2
Numerical Distance Protection MiCOM P44x GENERAL CONTENT Safety Section
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11
Addendum
P44x/EN AD/E44
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
Hardware Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
Application Guide
P44x/EN AP/E33
Technical Data
P44x/EN TD/E33
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
Commissioning & Maintenance
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheet
P44x/EN RS/E33
Connection Diagrams
P44x/EN CO/E33
Relay Menu Database
P44x/EN GC/E44
Menu Content Tables
P44x/EN HI/E44
Version Compatibility
P44x/EN VC/E44
P44x/EN T/E44
Technical Guide
Page 2/2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11
SAFETY SECTION
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section
Page 1/10
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT 1.
INTRODUCTION
3
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
3
3.
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
4
3.1
Symbols:
4
3.2
Labels
4
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING
5
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
7
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS
7
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
8
7.1
Protective fuse rating
8
7.2
Protective Class:
8
7.3
Installation Category:
8
7.4
Environment:
8
8.
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES
9
9.
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA
10
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 2/10
Safety Section
BLANK PAGE
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section
1.
Page 3/10
INTRODUCTION This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA T&D is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information which may be present on the equipment is fully understood by the recipient. The technical data in this safety guide is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant product publication(s) for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who •
are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected;
•
are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
•
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;
•
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 4/10
3.
Safety Section
SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
3.1
Symbols:
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.
Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal
Note – This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: 3.2
THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
Labels See “Safety Guide” (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section
4.
Page 5/10
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning or servicing the equipment.
be
consulted
before
installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable); Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 6/10
Safety Section Equipment Use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment. CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section
Page 7/10 External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note – when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.
5.
DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL Decommissioning: The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.
6.
EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS Electrical adjustments It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock. Exposure of live parts Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 8/10
Safety Section
7.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
7.1
Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER -
7.2
CTS MUST NOT BE FUSED SINCE OPEN CIRCUITING THEM MAY PRODUCE LETHAL HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES.
Protective Class: IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001
7.3
Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
Installation Category: IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001
Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits
7.4
Environment: The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree – Pollution Degree 2 Altitude – operation up to 2000 m IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001
Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Safety Section
8.
Page 9/10
COMPLIANCE MARKING FOR APPLICABLE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES The following European directives may be applicable to the equipment, if so it will carry the relevant marking(s) shown below: Compliance with all Community directives:
Marking
relevant
European
Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 60255-5: 2001 Relevant clauses of EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 60664-1: 2003.
Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC.
Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.
The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity: EN 50263 : 2000 Where applicable :
II (2) G
The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, “Ex e”, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.
ATEX Potentially Explosive CAUTION – Equipment with this marking is not itself Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, suitable for operation within a potentially explosive for equipment. atmosphere. Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.
Radio and Telecommunications Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, directive 95/5/EC. down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards.
Pxxxx/EN SS/C11 Page 10/10
9.
Safety Section
RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA CSA - Canadian Standards Association UL
- Underwriters Laboratory of America
If applicable, the following marks will be present on the equipment: – UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements – UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements – UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements
– UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements
– Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
UPDATE DOCUMENTATION VERSION C2.X
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 1/82
P44X UPDATE DOCUMENTATION In the firmware version C2.x of P441, P442 & P444, several changes in hardware & software on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: Release
Version
Documentation
April 2004
P44x/EN T/E33
Technical Manual (Firmware version B1.2)
Document Ref.
Section
Page No.
Description
P44x/EN IT/E33
2.
4/24
Introduction to MiCOM Guide: Ref P440/EN BR/Eb has been removed UCA2 has been added
3.1.1
5/24
New Front Panel: Front panel – new design (hotkeys explanations-LCD contrast)
3.1.2
6/24
Ethernet board + InterMicom/2nd rear port added
3.2
9/24
UCA2 added in the table+DNP3Floc in%
3.6.3
14/24
Hotkeys menu navigation
3.9
23/24
Second rear communication port
3.10
24/24
InterMiCOM teleprotection
3.11
24/24
Ethernet Rear Port: UCA2 Communication
1.1.5
5/44
Inputs & Outputs Boards:
P44x/EN HW/E33
P444 – option with 46 outputs Fast outputs in option Hysteresis remark 1.1.7
5/44
Second rear port & InterMiCOM
1.1.8
5/44
Ethernet board
2.1
8/44
2.2
8/44
Section 2 – Hardware Module TMS 150MHz Coprocessor board – item corrected & section removed
2.4.3
9/44
Duals optos
2.7
11/44
Second rear port
2.8
11/44
Ethernet board
3.3
14/44
Platform Software: DNP3-UCA2
3.3.1
14/44
Record Login: 96 alarms
3.4.1
15/44
P440 Overview : 48 samples / 24 samples
3.4.5
16/44
Disturbance Recorder: Additive commentsr
4
17/44
Distance Algorithms: Priority between the 2 algorithms
4.1
18/44
Distance & Resistance Measurement: 24 Samples & remark Rfault Dfault
4.2
21/44
Delta Algorithms: “computed in parallel”
4.2.1
22/44
Network Status monitoring: 48 samples since C1.x
4.3
28/44
Conventional Algorithms: Comments added
4.3.1
29/44
Convergence Analysis: 15 loops
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 2/82 Document Ref.
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Section
Page No.
Description
4.3.5
32/44
New page make up & I>3 comment & SOTF settings with 13 bits
4.5
33/44
Tripping Logic: Comments about General trip equation & Timers initiated with the start
4.7
36/44
Power Swing Detection: Out Of Step (OOS) comments
4.7.1
36/44
Pswing (PS) updated (Ph/Ph detection)
4.7.2
37/44
Power Swing during Open Pole (Ph/Ph detection)
4.7.4
37/44
Pswing (PS) & OOS updated (Delta Current)
4.9
40&41/44
DEF: comments added Iev corrected in Irev & settings range
1.2.1
8/220
Protection Features: 49:Thermal Overlaod – 68:Out Of Step
1.3
10/220
DDB& model n° 30 comments added
2.1
12/220
Configuration column : new features added Distance characteristic with Tilt fig1 –Fig2
P44x/EN AP/E33
2.5.1
15/220
Z1X opto
2.7.1
18/220
New distance settings
2.7.2.1
20/220
Fig3- remark about symbols in Scheme Logic
2.7.7
27/220
Single ph loop R value – new PS detected on PP loop
2.9.3
47-49/220
Weak Infeed improved – PAP function for RTE
2.12.2
61/220
TOR-SOTF bits ref
2.13.2
69/220
Power Swing – Delta Current
2.13.5
NEW
New Section: Out Of Step Logic
2.17
82/220
IN>3 – IN>4 created
2.18.3
89/220
DEF improved
4.4.5.1
123/220
Bus/line cells for synchrocheck
4.5.1
126/220
5bits added in AR lockout (Zsp / IN>3 / IN>4 / PAP / Thermal)
4.9
166/220
Event Recorder: AREVA name
5.1.1
176/220
Zsp Function: Diagram amended with Ta
6.1
181/220
Reference of Software version
8
189/220
Comments for ref models n° by branch
9
New Additional functions – Version C2x New reference 030G/H/J
9.1
Hardware new features
9.2
Function Improved : Distance
9.3
New Function Description : Out Of Step & Stable Swing
9.4
Function Improved: DEF
9.5
New Function Description: IN>3 – IN>4
9.6
New Function Description: Thermal Overload (as P443)
9.7
New Function Description: PAP – RTE feature
NEW SECTION
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Document Ref.
P44x/EN TD/E33
Section
Page 3/82 Page No.
Description
9.8
New Elements: Miscellaneous
9.8.1
Hot Keys – Control Input
9.8.2
Dual Optos
9.9
New Elements: PSL features
9.9.1
DDB Cells
9.9.2
New Tools in S1 and PSL
9.9.3
MiCOM Px40 GOOSE Editor
9.10
New Function: InterMiCOM Features
3.3
10/30
IN>3 – IN>4
3.3
11/30
Thermal overload
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 4/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44X/ EN IT/ E33 : INTRODUCTION
Page 5/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
2.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 7/82
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES …/… P44x/EN AP
Application Notes Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such as event and disturbance recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This chapter includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
P44x/EN GC
Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0/UCA2 Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description of each. Default Programmable Scheme Logic
…/…
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 8/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
3.
USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE
3.1.1
New Front panel New design of front pane (2 additive Hotkeys) used since version C2.X. Serial No and I*, V Ratings
Top cover
In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz Vx V Vn V
SER No DIAG No
LCD TRIP
Fixed function LEDs
Hotkeys
ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY
User programable function LEDs
= CLEAR = READ = ENTER
Keypad
Bottom cover Battery compartment
Front comms port
Download/monitor port
P0103ENb
RELAY FRONT VIEW •
a 16-character by 3-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
•
a 9-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys !, ", # and $), an enter key (%), a clear key (&), and a read key (').
Hotkey functionality: SCROLL Starts scrolling through the various default displays. STOP Stops scrolling the default display for control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation. 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side. …/… To improve the visibility of the settings via the front panel, the LCD contrast can be adjusted using the “LCD Contrast” setting with the last cell in the CONFIGURATION column.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.1.2
Page 9/82
Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485 communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear communication port (IEC103 or UCA2 by Ethernet) which are both optional.A second rear port(Courier) and an interMiCOM port are also available.
3.2
Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Keypad/ LCD
Courier
Modbus
Display & modification of all settings
•
•
•
Digital I/O signal status
•
•
•
•
•
•
Display/extraction of measurements
•
•
•
•
•
•
Display/extraction of fault records
•
•
•
•
•
• (Floc in %)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extraction of disturbance records Programmable scheme logic settings
IEC8705-103
UCA2 •
•
Reset of fault & alarm records
•
•
•
Clear event & fault records
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time synchronisation Control commands
DNP3.0
•
•
TABLE 1 3.6.3
Hotkey menu navigation The hotkey menu can be browsed using the two keys directly below the LCD. These are known as direct access keys. The direct access keys perform the function that is displayed directly above them on the LCD. Thus, to access the hotkey menu from the default display the direct access key below the “HOTKEY” text must be pressed. Once in the hotkey menu the ⇐ and ⇒ keys can be used to scroll between the available options and the direct access keys can be used to control the function currently displayed. If neither the ⇐ or ⇒ keys are pressed with 20 seconds of entering a hotkey sub menu, the relay will revert to the default display. The clear key C will also act to return to the default menu from any page of the hotkey menu. The layout of a typical page of the hotkey menu is described below. The top line shows the contents of the previous and next cells for easy menu navigation. The centre line shows the function. The bottom line shows the options assigned to the direct access keys. The functions available in the hotkey menu are listed below:
3.6.3.1
Setting group selection The user can either scroll using through the available setting groups or the setting group that is currently displayed. When the SELECT button is pressed a screen confirming the current setting group is displayed for 2 seconds before the user is prompted with the or options again. The user can exit the sub menu by using the left and right arrow keys. For more information on setting group selection refer to “Changing setting group” section in the Application Notes (P440/EN AP).
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 10/82 3.6.3.2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Control inputs – user assignable functions The number of control inputs (user assignable functions – USR ASS) represented in the hotkey menu is user configurable in the “CTRL I/P CONFIG” column. The chosen inputs can be SET/RESET using the hotkey menu. For more information refer to the “Control Inputs” section in the Application Notes (P44x/EN AP).
3.6.3.3
CB control* The CB control functionality varies from one Px40 relay to another. For a detailed description of the CB control via the hotkey menu refer to the “Circuit breaker control” section of the Application Notes (P440/EN AP). Default Display MiCOM P140 HOTKEY
CB CTRL
(See CB Control in Application Notes)
HOT KEY MENU EXIT
SETTING GROUP 1 NXT GRP
SELECT
SETTING GROUP 2
Confirmation screen displayed for 2 seconds
NXT GRP
SELECT
SETTING GROUP 2 SELECTED
CONTROL INPUT 1 EXIT
CONTROL INPUT 1 ON
CONTROL INPUT 2
NOTE: Key returns the user to the Hotkey Menu Screen
EXIT
P1246ENa
HOTKEY MENU NAVIGATION
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Second rear Communication Port K-Bus Application example
modem
Master 2
st
Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier
modem
K-Bus KITZ102
EIA(RS)232
KITZ 201
R.T.U.
1st RP (Courier)
EIA(RS)232 port 1
Master 3
EIA(RS)232
To SCADA CENTRAL PROCESSOR
Master 1
POWER SUPPLY
3.9
Page 11/82
K-Bus port 3
EIA(RS)232 port 0
2nd RP (Courier)
3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC
P2084ENA
SECOND REAR PORT K-BUS APPLICATION “EIA(RS)485 Application” example Master 2
Master 1
Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol,nd2 RP is always Courier
EIA232
modem
modem
EIA232
EIA485
CK222
EIA232
PO WE R SU PPL Y
To SCADA CE NT RAL PR OC ESS OR
R.T.U.
1st RP (Modbus / IEC103) KITZ202/4 CK222 EIA485 Front port EIA232 MiCOMS1
2nd RP (EIA485)
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access
P2085ENA
SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)485 EXAMPLE
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 12/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
“EIA(RS)232 Application” example Master 2
Master 1
modem
modem
EIA232
EIA232 splitter
EIA485
CK222
RP is always Courier
EIA232
To SCADA
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
EIA232
RP could be any chosen protocol,
2nd
POWER SUPPLY
Note:
1st
R.T.U.
1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)
EIA232
m 15 ax m
Front port
EIA232
2nd RP (EIA232)
MiCOMS1
2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access
P2086ENA
SECOND REAR PORT EIA(RS)232 EXAMPLE 3.10
InterMiCOM Teleprotection InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application.
3.10.1
Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin
Acronym
InterMiCOM Usage
1
DCD
“Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4.
2
RxD
“Receive Data”
3
TxD
“Transmit Data”
4
DTR
“Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.
5
GND
“Signal Ground”
6
Not used
-
7
RTS
“Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.
8
Not used
-
9
Not used
-
Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.10.2
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 13/82
Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fibre optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fibre used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.
This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line. 3.10.3
Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.
This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. See P443/EN AP for setting guidelines.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 14/82 3.10.4
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following table shows the relay menu for the communication channel including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu Text
Setting Range
Default Setting
Min
Step Size Max
INTERMICOM COMMS
3.11
IM Output Status
00000000
IM Input Status
00000000
Source Address
1
1
10
1
Receive Address
2
1
10
1
Baud Rate
9600
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200
Remote Device
Px40
Px30 / Px40
Ch Statistics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Reset Statistics
No
No / Yes
Ch Diagnostics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Loopback Mode
Disabled
Disabled / Internal / External
Test pattern
11111111
00000000
11111111
-
Ethernet Rear Port (option) If UCA2.0 is chosen when the relay is ordered, the relay is fitted with an Ethernet interface card. See P44x/EN UC/E44 section 4.4 for more detail of the Ethernet hardware.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 15/82
P44X/ EN HW/ E33 : RELAY DESCRIPTION
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 17/82
1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1.5
Input and output boards P441
P442 (1)
1.1.7
24 x UNI(1)
Opto-inputs
8 x UNI
Relay outputs
6 N/O
9 N/O
24 N/O
8 C/O
12 C/O
8 C/O
Universal voltage range opto inputs
16 x UNI
P444 (1)
N/O – normally open C/O – change over
•
P444 could manage in option : 46 outputs
•
Fast outputs can be ordered following the cortec reference (available in the Technical Data Sheet document)
•
See also the hysteresis values of the optos in the §6.2 from chapter AP
Second rear comms and InterMiCOM board (optional) The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic. It is denoted “SK4”. Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232. The port supports full local or remote protection and control access by MiCOM S1 software. The second rear port is also available with an on board IRIG-B input. The optional board also houses port “SK5”, the InterMiCOM teleprotection port. InterMiCOM permits end-to-end signalling with a remote P440 relay, for example in a distance protection channel aided scheme. Port SK5 has an EIA(RS)232 connection, allowing connection to a MODEM, or compatible multiplexers.
1.1.8
Ethernet board This is a mandatory board for UCA2.0 enabled relays. It provides network connectivity through either copper or fibre media at rates of 10Mb/s or 100Mb/s. This board, the IRIG-B board and second rear comms board are mutually exclusive as they both utilise slot A within the relay case.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 18/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
2.
HARDWARE MODULES
2.1
Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320VC33-150MHz (peak speed) floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 75MHz.,
2.2
Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the distance protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at power-on to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processor’s built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. (section removed) From software version B1.0, coprocessor board works at 150Mhz.
2.4.3
Universal opto isolated logic inputs Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised (available since version C2.0). Duals optos are available since C2.0 (hysteresis value selectable between 2 ranges)
The P440 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. From software version C2.x they can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints. Threshold levels are as follows:
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 19/82
This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. 2.7
Second rear communications board For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port,which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3.
2.8
Ethernet board The ethernet board, presently only available for UCA2 communication variant relays, supports network connections of the following type: −
10BASE-T
−
10BASE-FL
−
100BASE-TX
−
100BASE-FX
For all copper based network connections an RJ45 style connector is supported. 10Mb fibre network connections use an ST style connector while 100Mb connections use the SC style fibre connection.An extra processor, a Motorola PPC, and memory block is fitted to the ethernet card that is responsible for running all the network related functions such as TCP/IP/OSI as supplied by VxWorks and the UCA2/MMS server as supplied by Sisco inc. The extra memory block also holds the UCA2 data model supported by the relay.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 20/82 3.3
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Platform software To provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103; DNP3 ,UCA2).
3.3.1
Record logging …/… The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 96 alarms (with 64 application alarms: 32 alarms in alarm status 1 and another group of 32 alarms in alarm staus 2 and 32 alarms platform (see GC annex for mapping), 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records
3.4.1
Overview - protection and control scheduling …/… For the P441-442-444 feeder protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 24 samples for the sample rate of 48 samples per power cycle used by the relay…/…
3.4.5
Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed (with Kbus or ModBus only – IEC is not compressed) disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data. Since C1.x the disturbance files are no more compressed. This version manage the disturbance task with 24 samples by cycle (since B1x & C1x). Maximum storage capacity is equivalent to 28 events of 3sec which gives 84sec of duration max.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
4.
Page 21/82
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. Since version C1.x no priority is managed any more. The fastest algorithm will give the immediate directional decision.
4.1
Distance and Resistance Measurement Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (24 samples per cycle). NOTA:
4.2
See also in §4.3.1 of that chapter the Rn and Dn (Xn) conditions of convergence.
"Deltas" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions which are computed in parallel.
4.2.1
Network Status Monitoring …/… •
4.3
Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (48 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz).
"Conventional" Algorithms NOTA:
4.3.1
The distance measurement of the fault is taken on the loop selected by the "Deltas" or "conventional" phase selection algorithms. This measurement uses the fault values which are computed by Gauss Seidel method.
Convergence Analysis This analysis is based on the measurements of distance and resistance of the fault. These measurements are taken on each single-phase and two-phase loops (15 loops in total).
4.3.5
Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose) …/… If a stored voltage does not exist (SOTF) when one or more loops are convergent within the start-up characteristic, the directional is forced forward and the trip is instantaneous (if “SOTF All Zones “ is set or according to the zone location if SOTF Zone 2, etc. is set). If the settable switch on to fault current threshold I>3 is exceeded on reclosure, the relay instantaneously trips three-phase (No timer I>3 is applied – see also the chapter AP in §2.12). …/… Other modes can be selected to trip selectively by SOFT or TOR according to the fault location (SOTF Zone 1, SOTF Zone 2, etc., TOR Zone 1, TOR Zone 2, etc. depending from the software version - from A3.1 available).There are 13 bits of settings in TOR/SOTF logic.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 22/82 4.5
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Tripping Logic …/… There are five time delays associated with the six zones present. Zone 1 and extended zone 1 have the same time delay.
4.7
NB:
See general trip equation in §2.5 from AP chapter
NB:
All the timers are initiated when the general start of the relay picks up (Z3Z4 convergence)
Power swing detection …/… The power swing detection element may be used to selectively prevent when the measured impedance point moves into the start-up characteristic from a power swing and still allows tripping for a fault (fault evolving during a power swing). The power swing detection element may also be used to selectively trip once an out-of-step condition has been declared. For such feature a dedicated PSL must be designed in the internal logic of the relay by using the graphic tool available in S1.(See AP chapter section 2.13). When the locus of the 3 phase-phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 phase-phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. Figure 14 illustrates the characteristics of power swing:
4.7.1
–
Stable swing – same resistance sign
–
Unstable swing (Out Of Step) – opposite resistance sign
Power swing detection …/... The protection P44x differentiates since version C1.0 a stable power swing from a loss of synchronism (out of step) condition. A power swing is detected and declared if: •
At least one phase-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5 ms.
•
The three impedance points have been in the power swing band for more than 5 ms.
•
At least two poles of the breaker are closed (impedance measurement possible on two phases). Remark :
During Power swing the residual compensation factor Ko are not applied in the detection of the characteristic.(the extended limit in R gives: R1=R2=R3=RpFwd)
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 4.7.2
Page 23/82
Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip) In this case, the power swing only occurs on two phases. A power swing is detected if: •
At least one phase-phase impedance is within the start-up zone after having crossed the power swing band in more than 5ms. NOTA:
4.7.4
During an open-pole condition, the P44x monitors the power swing on the healthy phase-phase loop. No external information is needed if the voltage transformers are on the line side. If the voltage transformers are on the bus side, the «pole discrepancy» signal should be used. The «pole discrepancy» input represents a «onecircuit-breaker-pole-open» condition.
Tripping logic Depending on the blocking or unblocking selected, the P44x will trip or block as the swing (stable or unstable) passes through the zones. NOTA:
If selected, tripping will occur if the impedance stays in any zone longer than its time delay.(See Chapter AP – section 2.13)
There is a master unblocking timer that is used to override any blocked zone (unblocking time delay). This is used to separate the sources (open the breaker, 3-phase trip) in the event that a block was taking place, and the impedance remained in the blocked zone for a relatively long time. This would be indicative of a serious overcurrent condition as a result of too great a power transfer after a disturbance (a power swing that does not pass through or recover). If the impedance point moves out of the start-up characteristic again before the time delay expires, a trip is not issued and the adjustable time delay is reset. Unblocking the Zones Blocked due to Faults In order to protect the network against a fault that may occur during power swing, blocking signals can be stopped when current thresholds are exceeded. For detecting any type of fault during a power swing, the P44x uses the adjustable unblocking current thresholds : A residual current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (kr x Imax(t)). A negative-sequence current threshold equal to 0.1 In + (ki x Imax(t)). A phase current threshold: IMAX. A Delta phase current criteria can be enabled in S1 (since version C1.0) – to detect the 3phase fault (with faulty current lower than Swing current) during Power swing
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 24/82 4.9
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults …/…. •
In backup-operating mode SBEF (Stand-By Earth Fault), an inverse/definite time ground overcurrent element with 4 stages is selectable. A communication channel is not used-OR- azero sequence power (since version B1.x) with IDMT Time Delay (see section 5 in chapter P44x/EN AP)
…/… When used on the same signalling channel (shared scheme selected by MiCOM S1) as the distance protection, if the distance protection picks up, it has priority (the output from the DEF element is blocked from asserting the Carrier Send common output). …/… Legend For Tripping Logic Diagrams (DEF) Abbreviation
Definition
Vr>
Threshold of residual or zero sequence voltage (3Vo)
IRev
Threshold of residual current (settable in S1 – default:0,6IN)
Forward
Forward directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation
Reverse
Reverse directional with zero/negative sequence polarisation
DEF blocking
Blocking of DEF element
Carrier Receive DEF
Carrier received for the principal line protected (same channel as distance protection)
Iev
Threshold of residual current (0.6 x Ied)
Tripping mode
Single or three-phase tripping (selectable)
Z< starting
Convergence at least 1 of 6 loops within the tripping characteristic (internal starting of the distance element)
t_cycle
Additional time delay (150ms) of 1 pole AR cycle
t_delay
Tripping time delay
t_trans
Carrier Send delay settable
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 25/82
APPLICATION GUIDE (P44X/EN AP/E33)
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.2.1
Protection Features
1.3
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 27/82
•
27: Undervoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only.
•
49: Thermal overload Protection – as P540 with dual time constant. This element can provide an alarm and a trip delayed
•
59: Overvoltage Protection - Two stage, configurable as either phase to phase or phase to neutral measuring. Stage 1 may be selected as either IDMT or DT and stage 2 is DT only.
•
…/…
•
78 – 68 :Power swing blocking & Out Of Step detection - Selective blocking of distance protection zones ensures stability during the power swings experienced on sub-transmission and transmission systems (stable swing or Out of Step conditions = loss of synchronism).
Remark: •
It is recommended to check in the DDB table, the reference number of each cell, included in the chapter P44x/EN GC/E33 (“Relay menu Data base”)
•
Version C2.x uses the model 030 G / 030 H / 030 J
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 28/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
2.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
2.1
Configuration column The following table shows the Configuration column:Menu text
Default setting
Available settings
Restore Defaults
No Operation
No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4
Setting Group
Select via Menu
Select via Menu Select via Optos
Active Settings
Group 1
Group1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Save Changes
No Operation
No Operation Save Abort
Copy From
Group 1
Group1,2,3 or 4
Copy To
No Operation
No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4
Setting Group 1
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 2
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 3
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Setting Group 4
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Distance
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Power Swing
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Back-up I>
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Neg Sequence O/C
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Broken Conductor
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Earth Fault O/C
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Zero Sequence Power (*) (ZSP)
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Aided DEF
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Volt Protection
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
CB Fail & I<
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Supervision
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
System Checks
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Thermal Overload (***)
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Internal A/R
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Input Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Output Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible
CT & VT Ratios
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Record Control
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
Disturb Recorder
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
CONFIGURATION
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 29/82
Menu text
Default setting
Available settings
Measure’t Setup
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
Comms Settings
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Commission Tests
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Setting Values
Primary
Primary or Secondary
Control Inputs (***)
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Ctrl I/P Config (***)
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Ctrl I/P Labels (***)
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Direct Access (***)
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Inter MiCOM (**)
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
(*) Since B1.0 (**) Since C1.0 (***) Since C2.0 2.2
Phase fault distance protection Figure 1: Completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1p manages the tilt characteristic for phase fault)
2.3
Earth fault distance protection Figure 2: Completed by optional TILT characteristic (Z1m manages the tilt characteristic for earth fault)
2.5.1
General distance trip logic – Equation: •
Remark: The inputs Z1X must be polarised for activating Z1X the logic
•
Remark: For the 1P – 3P trip logic check in section 2.8.2.5 Tripping logic
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 30/82 2.7.1
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Settings table:
•
2.7.2.1
Update Documentation
Remark: New settings from C1.x dealing with the tilt and the evolving forward zone detection to zone1 (to avoid a Z1 detection in case of impedance locus getting out from the quad (due to remote CB operating) but crossing the Z1 before being out from the quad (with enough points that a Z1 decision can be confirmed if that timer has been set to 0ms)
Zone Logic : Remark Fig 3: Explanation about the symbols used in the logical schemas.
Represent an internal logic status from the logic of the protection (« the line is dead » or « the pole is dead »)
Represent a setting adjusted or selected by MiCOM S1
Represent a command / a logical external status linked to an opto input from the protection 2.7.7
Resistive Reach Calculation – Earth fault element : …/… However, where Power Swing is used, a larger impedance surrounds zone 3 and zone 4 , a,d it is essential also, that load does not encroach upon the characteristic.(With previous version) Since version C1.x there is an earth detection criteria (10% IN + 5% IphaseMax) which blocks the start of the relay if not enough residual current has been detected (it secures the start in case of load encroachment for Deltas algorithms). Another improvement since C1.x in the Power Swing detection is made by using Phase-Phase detector. In that case phase ground start can be bigger from the previous version, because the band ∆R is applied only to the phase phase loop.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 2.9.3
Weak Infeed Features :
2.9.3.3
PAP – Weak infeed for RTE application (PAP= Protection Antenne Passive)
Page 31/82
That specific request from RTE is an exclusive choice with the export Weak infeed logic:
If the PAP has been selected then the following settings are activated with MiCOM S1: For internal logic description , check the RTE manual ref P440 user guide EF GS
2.12.2
TOR-SOTF Trip Logic During the TOR/SOTF 500ms window (or close pulse time/reclaim time), individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the TOR-SOTF Mode function links (TOR logic bit0 to bit3 & SOTF logic bit7 to bit 0B)
2.13.2
Unblocking of the relay for faults during Power swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: •
A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN
•
>
0.1 In + ((IN> / 100) . (I maximum)).
A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phase-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I2> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I2
>
0.1 In + ((I2> / 100) . (I maximum)).
A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A). A Criteria in Delta Current can be activated in MiCOM S1 since version C1.0:
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 32/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
That flat delta criteria (Enabled by S1) will improve the detection of a 3 Phase fault during a power swing (in case of faulty current lower than the Imax line threshold settable in S1) – 100ms are requested for unblocking the logic. With the exaggerated delta current (activated all the time in the internal logic) the phase selection has been improved in case of unblocking logic applied with a fault detected during a power swing. Regarding the presence of negative current or zero sequence current , the exaggerated deltas current detection are calculated on the phase-phase loop or ground phase loop. 2.13.5
Out Of Step (OOS) - (New section) A new feature has been integrated since C1.0, which can detect the out of step (OOS) conditions. •
How MiCOM Detect the out of step ? :
When the criteria for power swing detection are met, and when out of step tripping is selected, then the distance protection with all of its stages is blocked – in order to prevent tripping by the distance protection (The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing as there are different criteria which can be used by monitoring current & delta current). When the locus of the 3 single phase loops leave the power swing polygon, the sign of R is checked. If the R component still has the same sign as at the point of entry, then the power swing is detected and managed in the internal logic as a stable swing. Otherwise the locus of the 3 single phase loops have passed through the polygon (indicating loss of synchronism) and the sign of R is different from the point of entry ; then an out of step is detected. In the both cases the MiCOM P440 will provide a monitoring of the number of cycles and control if the setting from S1 has been reached. In that case a trip order is performed by the relay.
X ∆X
Zone C
X lim
Z3
Zone B
-R Out Of Step
∆R +R
Zone A
+R -R lim Z4
R lim
Stable swing R
-X lim +R
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 •
Page 33/82
What are the settings and logic used in MiCOM S1 ? :
The settings are located with the Power-Swing function :
And a dedicated PSL must be created by the user if such logic must be activated in the relay. Outputs for Out of Step:
DDB N°350 : The first out of step cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the opposite R sign)& the « Out Of Step start » picks-up DDBN°352 : The number of cycles settable by S1 has been reached & Out Of Step is now confirmed
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 34/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Outputs for stable swing :
DDB N°351 : The first stable swing cycle has been detected (Zlocus in/out with the same R sign) & the « Stable Swing start » picks-up DDBN°353 : The number of cycles settable by S1 has been reached & Stable Swing is now confirmed DDBN°269 : Power Swing is detected (3 single phase loop inside the quad & crossing the ∆R band in more than 5ms in a 50hz network) Remark:
2.17
Out-of-step tripping systems should be applied at proper network locations to detect Out of step conditions and separate the network at pre-selected locations only in order to create system islands with balanced generation and load demand that will remain in synchronism.
Directional and non-directional earth fault protection Three elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: •
IN> element
-
Channel aided directional earth fault protection;
•
IN>1 element
-
Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed.
•
IN>2 element
-
Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
•
IN>3 element
-
Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
•
IN>4 element
-
Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
The IN>1,IN>2 ,IN>3 and IN>4 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). These current thresholds are activated as an exclusive choice with Zero sequence Power Protection.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 35/82
The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
IN>1 Directional
Directional Fwd
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>1 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>1 Current Set
0.2 x In
0.08 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
IN>1 Time Delay
1s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>1 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>1 TMS
1
0.025
1.2
0.025
IN>1 Time Dial
7
0.5
15
0.1
IN>1 Reset Char
DT
DT or Inverse
IN>1 tRESET
0
0
100s
0.01s
IN>2 Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
IN>2 Directional
Non Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>2 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>2 Current Set
0.3 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01 x In
IN>2 Time Delay
2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>2 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>3 Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
IN>3 Directional
Non Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>3 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>3 Current Set
0.3 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01 x In
IN>3 Time Delay
2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>3 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>4 Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
IN>4 Directional
Non Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>4 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>4 Current Set
0.3 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01 x In
IN>4 Time Delay
2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>4 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN> Char Angle
–45°
–95°
95°
1°
Polarisation
Zero Sequence
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
IN> DIRECTIONAL
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 36/82 2.18.3
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Aided DEF protection schemes The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. Since C1.0 a better sensitivity has been created by using a settable threshold for the residual current in case of reverse fault for creating quicker blocking scheme logic. The IN Rev factor can be adjusted from 10% to 100% of IN As well in case of independent channel logic with a blocking scheme an independent transmission timer Tp has been created with a short step at : 2ms
When a separate channel for DEF is used, the above DEF schemes are independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must Share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
Polarisation
Zero Sequence
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
V> Voltage Set
1V
0.5V
20V
0.01V
IN Forward
0.1 x In
0.05 x In
4 x In
0.01 x In
Time Delay
0
0
10s
0.1s
Scheme Logic
Shared
Shared, Blocking or Permissive
Tripping
Three Phase
Three Phase or Single Phase
Tp (if blocking scheme not shared)
2ms
0 ms
1000ms
2ms
IN Rev Factor
0,6
0
10s
0.1s
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
4.
APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
4.4.5.1
These following DDB cells
Page 37/82
MCB/VTS Bus MCB/VTS Line Are managed dynamically since version C1.1 (regarding where the main VT are located :bus side or line side – then the Csync ref is assigned to the other VT which is managed as the Csync ref) 4.5.1
Autorecloser Functional Description The new features have created some additive bits in the AR lock out logic.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 38/82 Menu text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size
Max
GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE AUTORECLOSE MODE AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT Bit 0: Block at tZ2 Bit 1: Block at tZ3, Bit 2: Block at tZp
Block A/R
1111 1111 1111 1111 111
Bit 3: Block for LoL Trip, Bit 4: Block for I2> Trip, Bit 5: Block for I>1 Trip, Bit 6: Block for I>2 Trip, Bit 7: Block for V2 Trip, Bit 0B: Block for IN>1 Trip, Bit 0C: Block for IN>2 Trip, Bit 0D: Block for Aided DEF Trip. Bit 0E: Block ZSP Trip Bit 0F: Block IN>3 Trip Bit 10: Block IN>4 Trip Bit11: Block PAP Trip Bit12: Block Therm Overload Trip
4.9
Event recorder Report Type
Report Data
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence. They form a specific error code which should be quoted in any related correspondence to AREVA T&D P&C Ltd.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 39/82
5.
NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION B1.X
5.1.1
ZSP Function Description: Logical scheme corrected with Ta as RTE request:
Zsp Timer Block
Déclenchement Triphasé
Ir(t)
Ir(t) > Ir
Vr(t)
Sr(t) = Vr(t)*Ir(t)*cos(phi-phi0)
&
Sr(t) > Sr
Zsp Trip
Tb
Ta
1
Zsp Start
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 40/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
6.
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC DEFAULT SETTINGS
6.1
HOW TO USE PSL Editor? : Software Version
Model N°
A2.11
04A
A3.3
06A – 06B
A4.8
07A – 07B
B1.6
09C
C1.1
020G – 020H
C2.6
030G – 030H – 030J
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
8.
Page 41/82
DDB DESCRIPTION FOR ALL TYPES P441/P442 & P444 RELAYS Using model 07 in version A4.8 Using model 09 in version B1.2 Using model 20 in version C1.1 Using model 30 in version C2.6
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 42/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
9.
NEW ADDITIONNAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION C2.X (MODEL 030G/H/J)
9.1
Hardware new features: −
Integration of the new CPU board at 150 MHz
−
Optional fast static outputs (selected by Cortec code)
−
Optional 46 outputs in P444-model 20H/ 30H
−
Integration of Dual optos with/without filter
−
Integration of InterMiCOM
−
Integration of Ethernet board with UCA2 protocol (61850 -8-1 available soon)
NEW FEATURES HARD & SOFT SINCE VERSION C2.X 9.2
Function Improved : Distance −
Addition of a settable time delay to prevent maloperation due to zone evolution from zone n to zone n-1 by CB operation
−
Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 1 (independent setting for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase). Settable between ± 45°
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
9.3
Page 43/82
−
Addition of a tilt characteristic for zone 2 and zone P (common setting for phase-toground and phase-to-phase/Z2 and Zp). Settable between ± 45°
−
New DDB:
New Function Description: OUT OF STEP & STABLE SWING improved An out of step function has been integrated in the firmware.That logic manage the start of the OOS by the monitoring of the sign of the biphase loops:
X ∆X
Zone C
X lim
Z3
Zone B
-R Out Of Step
∆R +R
Zone A
+R -R lim Z4
R lim
Stable swing R
-X lim +R
For additive details check the section 4.7 of HW Chapter and 2.13.5 of that AP chapter. New settings (Delta I) have been created also in Power swing (stable swing) with Delta I as a criteria for unblocking the Pswing logic in case of 3 phase fault (see 2.13.2 in the AP chapter). Phase selection has been improved with exaggerated Deltas current (See 2.13.2 of AP Chapter).
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 44/82
− 9.4
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
New DDB :
Function Improved: DEF Some improvements have been integrated in DEF function (see HW section 4.9 and AP section 2.18.3)
New settings are: 9.5
New Function Description: SBEF with IN>3 &IN>4 Two new thresholds of IN have been added (see AP section 2.17)
New DDB cells:
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.6
Page 45/82
New Function Description: THERMAL OVERLOAD A NEW THERMAL OVERLOAD (with 2 time constant) function has been created as in the other transmission protection of the MiCOM Range, which offer alarm & trip (see section 1.2.1)
New DDB cells:
Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss (Ι2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model. Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc. Over temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of temperature occurs during cooling.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 46/82 9.6.1
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is the recommended typical setting for line and cable protection. The thermal time characteristic is given by: exp(-t/τ)
=
(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)
Where: t τ Ι ΙFLC k ΙP
= = = = = =
Time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι; Heating and cooling time constant of the protected plant; Largest phase current; Full load current rating (relay setting ‘Thermal Trip’); 1.05 constant, allows continuous operation up to < 1.05 ΙFLC. Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload.
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from «hot» or «cold». 9.6.2
Dual time constant characteristic (Typically not applied for MiCOMho P443) This characteristic is used to protect oil-filled transformers with natural air cooling (e.g. type ONAN). The thermal model is similar to that with the single time constant, except that two time constants must be set. The thermal curve is defined as: 0.4 exp(-t/τ1) + 0.6 exp(-t/τ2)
=
(Ι2 - (k.ΙFLC)2) / (Ι2 - ΙP2)
Where: τ1 τ2
= =
Heating and cooling time constant of the transformer windings; Heating and cooling time constant for the insulating oil.
For marginal overloading, heat will flow from the windings into the bulk of the insulating oil. Thus, at low current, the replica curve is dominated by the long time constant for the oil. This provides protection against a general rise in oil temperature. For severe overloading, heat accumulates in the transformer windings, with little opportunity for dissipation into the surrounding insulating oil. Thus, at high current, the replica curve is dominated by the short time constant for the windings. This provides protection against hot spots developing within the transformer windings. Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimise gas production by overheated oil. Note, however, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient temperature change. The following table shows the menu settings for the thermal protection element: THERMAL
Default
Min
Max
Thermal Char
Single
Disabled, Single, Dual
Thermal Trip
1Ιn
0.08Ιn
3.2Ιn
0.01Ιn
Thermal Alarm
70%
50%
100%
1%
Time Constant 1
10 minutes
1 minutes
200 minutes
1 minutes
Time Constant 2
5 minutes
1 minutes
200 minutes
1 minutes
THERMAL PROTECTION MENU SETTINGS
Step
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 47/82
The thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the measurement column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an opto input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the relay menu, for example to reset after injection testing. The reset function in the menu is found in the measurement column with the thermal state. 9.6.3
Setting guidelines
9.6.3.1
Single time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio. Typical time constant values are given in the following table. The relay setting, ‘Time Constant 1’, is in minutes. Time constant τ (minutes)
Limits
Air-core reactors
40
Capacitor banks
10
Overhead lines
10
Cross section ≥ 100 mm2 Cu or 150mm2 Al
Cables
60 - 90
Typical, at 66kV and above
Busbars
60 TYPICAL PROTECTED PLANT THERMAL TIME CONSTANTS
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Trip’ = 70% of thermal capacity. 9.6.3.2
Dual time constant characteristic The current setting is calculated as: Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the transformer / CT ratio. Typical time constants:
Oil-filled transformer
τ1 (minutes)
τ2 (minutes)
Limits
5
120
Rating 400 - 1600 kVA
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be ‘Thermal Alarm’ = 70% of thermal capacity. Note that the thermal time constants given in the above tables are typical only. Reference should always be made to the plant manufacturer for accurate information.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 48/82 9.7
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
New Function Description: PAP (RTE feature) That new function is based on a RTE specification with a dedicated application equivalent to a customised weak infeed. The settings are above:
New Outputs DDB cells:
New Inputs DDB cells:
For further details check datas in the RTE manual P440 EF GS. 9.8
New Elements : Miscellaneous features
9.8.1
HOTKEYS / Control input
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 49/82
The 2 Hotkeys in the front panel (see also IT Chapter 3.1.1 & 3.6.3.3) can perform a direct command if a dedicated PSL has been previously created using “CONTROL INPUT” cell. In total the MiCOM P440 offers 32 control inputs which can be activated by the Hotkey manually or by the IEC 103 remote communication (if that option has been flashed with the firmware of the relay (see also cortec code)):
The control input can be linked to any DDB cell as: led, relay , internal logic cell (that can be useful during test & commissioning) – see also the section 9.9 in chapter AP - Different condition can be managed for the command as:
And also the text for passing the command can be selected between:
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 50/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
The labels of the control inputs can be fulfilled by the user (text label customised)
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 51/82
The digits in this table allow to provide filtering on selected DDB cells (changed from 1 to 0), to avoid the transfer of these special cells to a remote station connected to the relay with IEC 103 protocol. It gives the opportunity to filter the not pertinent data.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 52/82 9.8.2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Optos : Dual hysteresis and filter removed or not The MiCOM P44x is fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They can also be programmed as Standard 60% - 80% or 50% - 70% to satisfy different operating constraints (Dual Opto). Threshold levels are as follows:
Nominal Battery Voltage (Vdc)
Standard 60% - 80%
50% - 70%
24 / 27
19.2
16.8
30 / 34
24.0
21.0
48 / 54
38.4
33.6
110 / 125
88.0
77.0
220 / 250
176.0
154
No Operation (logic 0) Operation (logic 1) Vdc No Operation (logic 0) Operation (logic 1) Vdc Vdc Vdc
TABLE 1 This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.9
New Elements : PSL features
9.9.1
DDB Cells:
Page 53/82
New DDB cells have been added – See the GC chapter INPUTS DDB:
OUTPUTS DDB:
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 54/82 9.9.2
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
New Tools in S1 & PSL: Toolbar and Commands Standard tools
Blank Scheme Create a blank scheme based on a relay model. Default Configuration Create a default scheme based on a relay model. Open Open an existing diagram. Save Save the active diagram. Print Display the Windows Print dialog, enabling you to print the current diagram. Undo Undo the last action. Redo Redo the previously undone action. Redraw Redraw the diagram. Number of DDBs Display the DDB numbers of the links. Calculate CRC Calculate unique number based on both the function and layout of the logic. Compare Files Compare current file with another stored on disk. Select Enable the select function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow. This is the default mouse pointer. It is sometimes referred to as the selection pointer. Point to a component and click the left mouse button to select it. Several components may be selected by clicking the left mouse button on the diagram and dragging the pointer to create a rectangular selection area.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 55/82
Zoom and pan tools
Zoom In Increases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Out Decreases the Zoom magnification by 25%. Zoom Enable the zoom function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying glass. Right-clicking will zoom out and left-clicking will zoom in. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Click and drag to zoom in to an area. Zoom to Fit Display at the highest magnification that will show all the diagram’s components. Zoom to Selection Display at the highest magnification that will show the selected component(s). Pan Enable the pan function. While this button is active, the mouse pointer is displayed as a hand. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the diagram to pan. Press the ESC key to return to the selection pointer. Logic symbols
This toolbar provides icons to place each type of logic element into the scheme diagram. Not all elements are available in all devices. Icons will only be displayed for those elements available in the selected device. Link Create a Link between two logic symbols. Opto Signal Create an Opto Signal. Input Signal Create an Input Signal. Output Signal Create an Output Signal. GOOSE in Create an input signal to logic to receive a UCA 2.0 GOOSE message transmitted from another IED. GOOSE out Create an output signal from logic to transmit a UCA 2.0 GOOSE message to another IED.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 56/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Integral Tripping in Create an input signal to logic that receives an InterMiCOM message transmitted from another IED. Integral Tripping out Create an output signal from logic that transmits an InterMiCOM message to another IED. Control in Create an input signal to logic that can be operated from an external command. Function Key Create a Function Key input signal. Trigger Signal Create a Fault Record Trigger. LED Signal
or
Create an LED Signal. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. mono-colour or tri-colour. Contact Signal Create a Contact Signal. LED Conditioner
or
Create an LED Conditioner. Icon shown is dependent upon capability of LED’s i.e. monocolour or tri-colour. Contact Conditioner Create a Contact Conditioner. Timer Create a Timer. AND Gate Create an AND Gate. OR Gate Create an OR Gate. Programmable Gate Create a Programmable Gate.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 57/82
Alignment tools
Align Top Align all selected components so the top of each is level with the others. Align Middle Align all selected components so the middle of each is level with the others. Align Bottom Align all selected components so the bottom of each is level with the others. Align Left Align all selected components so the leftmost point of each is level with the others. Align Centre Align all selected components so the centre of each is level with the others. Align Right Align all selected components so the rightmost point of each is level with the others. Drawing tools
Rectangle When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move it to where you want the diagonally opposite corner to be. Release the button. To draw a square hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Ellipse When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want one of the corners to be, hold down the left mouse button and move until the ellipse is the size you want it to be. Release the button. To draw a circle hold down the SHIFT key to ensure height and width remain the same. Line When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the line to start, hold down left mouse, move to the position of the end of the line and release button. To draw horizontal or vertical lines only hold down the SHIFT key. Polyline When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polyline to start and click the left mouse button. Now move to the next point on the line and click the left button. Double click to indicate the final point in the polyline. Curve When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the polycurve to start and click the left mouse button. Each time you click the button after this a line will be drawn, each line bisects its associated curve. Double click to end. The straight lines will disappear leaving the polycurve. Note: whilst drawing the lines associated with the polycurve, a curve will not be displayed until either three lines in succession have been drawn or the polycurve line is complete.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 58/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Text When selected, move the mouse pointer to where you want the text to begin and click the left mouse button. To change the font, size or colour, or text attributes select Properties from the right mouse button menu. Image When selected, the Open dialog is displayed, enabling you to select a bitmap or icon file. Click Open, position the mouse pointer where you want the image to be and click the left mouse button. Nudge tools
The nudge tool buttons enable you to shift a selected component a single unit in the selected direction, or five pixels if the SHIFT key is held down. As well as using the tool buttons, single unit nudge actions on the selected components can be achieved using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Nudge Up Shift the selected component(s) upwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units upwards. Nudge Down Shift the selected component(s) downwards by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units downwards. Nudge Left Shift the selected component(s) to the left by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the left. Nudge Right Shift the selected component(s) to the right by one unit. Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on this button will shift the component five units to the right. Rotation tools
Free Rotate Enable the rotation function. While rotation is active components may be rotated as required. Press the ESC key or click on the diagram to disable the function. Rotate Left Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the left. Rotate Right Rotate the selected component 90 degrees to the right. Flip Horizontal Flip the component horizontally. Flip Vertical Flip the component vertically.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 59/82
Structure tools
The structure toolbar enables you to change the stacking order of components. Bring to Front Bring the selected components in front of all other components. Send to Back Bring the selected components behind all other components. Bring Forward Bring the selected component forward one layer. Send Backward Send the selected component backwards one layer. 9.9.3
MiCOM Px40 GOOSE editor
To access to Px40 GOOSE Editor menu click on The implementation of UCA2.0 Generic Object Orientated Substation Events (GOOSE) sets the way for cheaper and faster inter-relay communications. UCA2.0 GOOSE is based upon the principle of reporting the state of a selection of binary (i.e. ON or OFF) signals to other devices. In the case of Px40 relays, these binary signals are derived from the Programmable Scheme Logic Digital Data Bus signals. UCA2.0 GOOSE messages are event-driven. When a monitored point changes state, e.g. from logic 0 to logic 1, a new message is sent. GOOSE Editor enables you to connect to any UCA 2.0 MiCOM Px40 device via the Courier front port, retrieve and edit its GOOSE settings and send the modified file back to a MiCOM Px40 device.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 60/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Menu and Toolbar The menu functions The main functions available within the Px40 GOOSE Editor menu are: •
File
•
Edit
•
View
•
Device
File menu
Open… Displays the Open file dialogue box, enabling you to locate and open an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the current file. Save As… Save the current file with a new name or in a new location. Print… Print the current GOOSE configuration file. Print Preview Preview the hardcopy output with the current print setup. Print Setup… Display the Windows Print Setup dialogue box allowing modification of the printer settings. Exit Quit the application.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 61/82
Edit menu
Rename… Rename the selected IED. New Enrolled IED… Add a new IED to the GOOSE configuration. New Virtual Input… Add a new Virtual Input to the GOOSE In mapping configuration. New Mapping… Add a new bit-pair to the Virtual Input logic. Delete Enrolled IED Remove an existing IED from the GOOSE configuration. Delete Virtual Input Delete the selected Virtual Input from the GOOSE In mapping configuration. Delete Mapping Remove a mapped bit-pair from the Virtual Input logic. Reset Bitpair Remove current configuration from selected bit-pair. Delete All Delete all mappings, enrolled IED’s and Virtual Inputs from the current GOOSE configuration file.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 62/82
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
View menu
Toolbar Show/hide the toolbar. Status Bar Show/hide the status bar. Properties… Show associated properties for the selected item. Device menu
Open Connection Display the Establish Connection dialog, enabling you to send and receive data from the connected relay. Close Connection Closes active connection to a relay.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 63/82
Send to Relay Send the open GOOSE configuration file to the connected relay. Receive from Relay Extract the current GOOSE configuration from the connected relay. Communications Setup Displays the Local Communication Settings dialogue box, enabling you to select or configure the communication settings. The toolbar Open Opens an existing GOOSE configuration file. Save Save the active document. Print Display the Print Options dialog, enabling you to print the current configuration. View Properties Show associated properties for the selected item. How to Use the GOOSE Editor The main functions available within the GOOSE Editor module are: •
Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED
•
Configure GOOSE settings
•
Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED
•
Save IED GOOSE setting files
•
Print IED GOOSE setting files
Retrieve GOOSE configuration settings from an IED Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings. Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box. Enter the relay password. Extract the current GOOSE configuration settings from the device by selecting Receive from Relay from the Device menu.
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 64/82 9.9.3.1
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Configure GOOSE settings The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor is used to enrol devices and also to provide support for mapping the Digital Data Bus signals (from the Programmable Scheme Logic) onto the UCA2.0 GOOSE bit-pairs. If the relay is interested in data from other UCA2.0 GOOSE devices, their "Sending IED" names are added as ’enrolled’ devices within the GOOSE Scheme Logic. The GOOSE Scheme Logic editor then allows the mapping of incoming UCA2.0 GOOSE message bitpairs onto Digital Data Bus signals for use within the Programmable Scheme Logic. UCA2.0 GOOSE is normally disabled in the MiCOM Px40 products and is enabled by downloading a GOOSE Scheme Logic file that is customised.
9.9.3.2
Device naming Each UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled device on the network transmits messages using a unique "Sending IED" name. Select Rename from the Edit menu to assign the "Sending IED" name to the device.
9.9.3.3
Enrolling IED’s Enrolling a UCA2.0 GOOSE device is done through the Px40s GOOSE Scheme Logic. If a relay is interested in receiving data from a device, the "Sending IED" name is simply added to the relays list of ’interested devices’. Select New Enrolled IED from the Edit menu and enter the GOOSE IED name (or "Sending IED" name) of the new device. Enrolled IED’s have GOOSE In settings containing DNA (Dynamic Network Announcement) and User Status bit-pairs. These input signals can be configured to be passed directly through to the Virtual Input gates or be set to a forced or default state before processing by the Virtual Input logic.
The signals in the GOOSE In settings of enrolled IED’s are mapped to Virtual Inputs by selecting New Mapping from the Edit menu. Refer to section below for use of these signals in logic. 9.9.3.4
GOOSE In settings Virtual inputs The GOOSE Scheme Logic interfaces with the Programmable Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual Inputs. The Virtual Inputs are then used in much the same way as the Opto Input signals. The logic that drives each of the Virtual Inputs is contained within the relay’s GOOSE Scheme Logic file. It is possible to map any number of bit-pairs, from any enrolled device, using logic gates onto a Virtual Input.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 65/82
The following gate types are supported within the GOOSE Scheme Logic: Gate Type
Operation
AND
The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when all bitpairs match the desired state.
OR
The GOOSE Virtual Input will be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when any bit-pair matches its desired state.
PROGRAMMABLE
The GOOSE Virtual Input will only be logic 1 (i.e. ON) when the majority of the bit-pairs match their desired state.
To add a Virtual Input to the GOOSE logic configuration, select New Virtual Input from the Edit menu and configure the input number. If required, the gate type can be changed once input mapping to the Virtual Input has been made. Mapping GOOSE In signals from enrolled IED’s are mapped to logic gates by selection of the required bit-pair from either the DNA or User Status section of the inputs.
The value required for a logic 1 or ON state is specified in the State box. The input can be inverted by checking Input Inversion (equivalent to a NOT input to the logic gate). GOOSE Out settings The structure of information transmitted via UCA2.0 GOOSE is defined by the ’Protection Action’ (PACT) common class template, defined by GOMFSE (Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment). A UCA2.0 GOOSE message transmitted by a Px40 relay can carry up to 96 Digital Data Bus signals, where the monitored signals are characterised by a two-bit status value, or "bit-pair". The value transmitted in the bit-pair is customisable although GOMFSE recommends the following assignments:
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 66/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Bit-Pair Value
Represents
00
A transitional or unknown state
01
A logical 0 or OFF state
10
A logical 1 or ON state
11
An invalid state
The PACT common class splits the contents of a UCA2.0 GOOSE message into two main parts; 32 DNA bit-pairs and 64 User Status bit-pairs. The DNA bit-pairs are intended to carry GOMSFE defined protection scheme information, where supported by the device. MiCOM Px40 implementation provides full end-user flexibility, as it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to any of the 32 DNA bitpairs. The User Status bit pairs are intended to carry all ‘user-defined’ state and control information. As with the DNA, it is possible to assign any Digital Data Bus signal to these bitpairs.
To ensure full compatibility with third party UCA2.0 GOOSE enabled products, it is recommended that the DNA bit-pair assignments are as per the definition given in GOMFSE. Send GOOSE configuration settings to an IED 1.
Open a connection to the required device by selecting Open Connection from the Device menu. Refer to Section 2.1.1.6 & 2.1.1.7 for details on configuring the IED communication settings.
2.
Enter the device address in the Establish Connection dialogue box.
3.
Enter the relay password.
4.
Send the current GOOSE configuration settings to the device by selecting Send to Relay from the Device menu.
Update Documentation MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
P44x/EN AD/E44 Page 67/82
Save IED GOOSE setting files 1.
Select Save or Save As from the File menu.
Print IED GOOSE setting files 1.
Select Print from the File menu.
2.
The Print Options dialogue is displayed allowing formatting of the printed file to be configured.
3.
Click OK after making required selections.
9.10
New Function : Inter MiCOM features
9.10.1
InterMiCOM Teleprotection InterMiCOM is a protection signalling system that is an optional feature of MiCOM Px40 relays and provides a cost-effective alternative to discrete carrier equipment. InterMiCOM sends eight signals between the two relays in the scheme, with each signal having a selectable operation mode to provide an optimal combination of speed, security and dependability in accordance with the application. Once the information is received, it may be assigned in the Programmable Scheme Logic to any function as specified by the user’s application.
9.10.2
Protection Signalling In order to achieve fast fault clearance and correct discrimination for faults anywhere within a high voltage power network, it is necessary to signal between the points at which protection relays are connected. Two distinct types of protection signalling can be identified:
9.10.2.1
Unit protection Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey analog data concerning the power system between relays, typically current magnitude and/or phase. These unit protection schemes are not covered by InterMiCOM, with the MiCOM P54x range of current differential and phase comparison relays available.
9.10.2.2
Teleprotection – Channel Aided Schemes In these schemes the signalling channel is used to convey simple ON/OFF data (from a local protection device) thereby providing some additional information to a remote device which can be used to accelerate in-zone fault clearance and/or prevent out-of-zone tripping. This kind of protection signalling has been discussed earlier in this chapter, and InterMiCOM provides the ideal means to configure the schemes in the P443 relay.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 68/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
In each mode, the decision to send a command is made by a local protective relay operation, and three generic types of InterMiCOM signal are available: Intertripping
In intertripping (direct or transfer tripping applications), the command is not supervised at the receiving end by any protection relay and simply causes CB operation. Since no checking of the received signal by another protection device is performed, it is absolutely essential that any noise on the signalling channel isn’t seen as being a valid signal. In other words, an intertripping channel must be very secure.
Permissive
In permissive applications, tripping is only permitted when the command coincides with a protection operation at the receiving end. Since this applies a second, independent check before tripping, the signalling channel for permissive schemes do not have to be as secure as for intertripping channels.
Blocking
In blocking applications, tripping is only permitted when no signal is received but a protection operation has occurred. In other words, when a command is transmitted, the receiving end device is blocked from operating even if a protection operation occurs. Since the signal is used to prevent tripping, it is imperative that a signal is received whenever possible and as quickly as possible. In other words, a blocking channel must be fast and dependable.
The requirements for the three channel types are represented pictorially in figure 19.
Speed
Permissive
faster
Blocking slower
low high
Security
Direct Intertrip
Dependability P1342ENa
PICTORIAL COMPARISON OF OPERATING MODES This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.2.3
Page 69/82
Communications Media InterMiCOM is capable of transferring up to 8 commands over one communication channel. Due to recent expansions in communication networks, most signalling channels are now digital schemes utilising multiplexed fibre optics and for this reason, InterMiCOM provides a standard EIA(RS)232 output using digital signalling techniques. This digital signal can then be converted using suitable devices to any communications media as required. The EIA(RS)232 output may alternatively be connected to a MODEM link. Regardless of whether analogue or digital systems are being used, all the requirements of teleprotection commands are governed by an international standard IEC60834-1:1999 and InterMiCOM is compliant with the essential requirements of this standard. This standard governs the speed requirements of the commands as well as the probability of unwanted commands being received (security) and the probability of missing commands (dependability).
9.10.2.4
General Features & Implementation InterMiCOM provides 8 commands over a single communications link, with the mode of operation of each command being individually selectable within the “IM# Cmd Type” cell. “Blocking” mode provides the fastest signalling speed (available on commands 1 – 4), “Direct Intertrip” mode provides the most secure signalling (available on commands 1 – 8) and “Permissive” mode provides the most dependable signalling (available on commands 5 – 8). Each command can also be disabled so that it has no effect in the logic of the relay. Since many applications will involve the commands being sent over a multiplexed communications channel, it is necessary to ensure that only data from the correct relay is used. Both relays in the scheme must be programmed with a unique pair of addresses that correspond with each other in the “Source Address” and “Receive Address” cells. For example, at the local end relay if we set the “Source Address” to 1, the “Receive Address” at the remote end relay must also be set to 1. Similarly, if the remote end relay has a “Source Address” set to 2, the “Receive Address” at the local end must also be set to 2. All four addresses must not be set identical in any given relay scheme if the possibility of incorrect signalling is to be avoided. It must be ensured that the presence of noise in the communications channel isn’t interpreted as valid messages by the relay. For this reason, InterMiCOM uses a combination of unique pair addressing described above, basic signal format checking and for “Direct Intertrip” commands an 8-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is also performed. This CRC calculation is performed at both the sending and receiving end relay for each message and then compared in order to maximise the security of the “Direct Intertrip” commands. Most of the time the communications will perform adequately and the presence of the various checking algorithms in the message structure will ensure that InterMiCOM signals are processed correctly. However, careful consideration is also required for the periods of extreme noise pollution or the unlikely situation of total communications failure and how the relay should react. During periods of extreme noise, it is possible that the synchronization of the message structure will be lost and it may become impossible to decode the full message accurately. During this noisy period, the last good command can be maintained until a new valid message is received by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Latched”. Alternatively, if the synchronisation is lost for a period of time, a known fallback state can be assigned to the command by setting the “IM# FallBackMode” cell to “Default”. In this latter case, the time period will need to be set in the “IM# FrameSynTim” cell and the default value will need to be set in “IM# DefaultValue” cell. As soon as a full valid message is seen by the relay all the timer periods are reset and the new valid command states are used. An alarm is provided if the noise on the channel becomes excessive. When there is a total communications failure, the relay will use the fallback (failsafe) strategy as described above. Total failure of the channel is considered when no message data is received for four power system cycles or if there is a loss of the DCD line (see section 9.10.2.5).
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 70/82 9.10.2.5
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Physical Connections InterMiCOM on the Px40 relays is implemented using a 9-pin ‘D’ type female connector (labelled SK5) located at the bottom of the 2nd Rear communication board. This connector on the Px40 relay is wired in DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) mode, as indicated below: Pin
Acronym
InterMiCOM Usage
1
DCD
“Data Carrier Detect” is only used when connecting to modems otherwise this should be tied high by connecting to terminal 4.
2
RxD
“Receive Data”
3
TxD
“Transmit Data”
4
DTR
“Data Terminal Ready” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.
5
GND
“Signal Ground”
6
Not used
-
7
RTS
“Ready To Send” is permanently tied high by the hardware since InterMiCOM requires a permanently open communication channel.
8
Not used
-
9
Not used
-
TABLE 2 : INTERMiCOM D9 PORT PIN-OUT CONNECTIONS Depending upon whether a direct or modem connection between the two relays in the scheme is being used, the required pin connections are described below. 9.10.2.6
Direct Connection The EIA(RS)232 protocol only allows for short transmission distances due to the signalling levels used and therefore the connection shown below is limited to less than 15m. However, this may be extended by introducing suitable EIA(RS)232 to fiber optic convertors, such as the AREVA T&D CILI203. Depending upon the type of convertor and fiber used, direct communication over a few kilometres can easily be achieved.
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -
RTS
P1150ENa
DIRECT CONNECTION WITHIN THE LOCAL SUBSTATION This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have no ability to control the DCD line.
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.2.7
Page 71/82
Modem Connection For long distance communication, modems may be used in which the case the following connections should be made.
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS
-
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND
Communication Network
DCD RxD TxD GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- DCD - RxD - TxD - DTR - GND -
RTS
P1341ENa
INTERMiCOM TELEPROTECTION VIA A MODEM LINK This type of connection should also be used when connecting to multiplexers which have the ability to control the DCD line. With this type of connection it should be noted that the maximum distance between the Px40 relay and the modem should be 15m, and that a baud rate suitable for the communications path used should be selected. 9.10.3
Functional Assignment Even though settings are made on the relay to control the mode of the intertrip signals, it is necessary to assign interMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) if InterMiCOM is to be successfully implemented. Two icons are provided on the PSL editor of MiCOM S1 for “Integral tripping In” and “Integral tripping out” which can be used to assign the 8 intertripping commands. The example shown below in figure 2 shows a “Control Input_1” connected to the “Intertrip O/P1” signal which would then be transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, the “Intertrip I/P1” signal could then be assigned within the PSL. In this example, we can see that when intertrip signal 1 is received from the remote relay, the local end relay would operate an output contact, R1.
EXAMPLE ASSIGNMENT OF SIGNALS WITHIN THE PSL It should be noted that when an InterMiCOM signal is sent from the local relay, only the remote end relay will react to this command. The local end relay will only react to InterMiCOM commands initiated at the remote end.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 72/82 9.10.4
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
InterMiCOM Settings The settings necessary for the implementation of InterMiCOM are contained within two columns of the relay menu structure. The first column entitled “INTERMICOM COMMS” contains all the information to configure the communication channel and also contains the channel statistics and diagnostic facilities. The second column entitled “INTERMICOM CONF” selects the format of each signal and its fallback operation mode. The following tables show the relay menus including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Step Size
Min
Max
INTERMICOM COMMS Source Address
1
1
10
1
Receive Address
2
1
10
1
Baud Rate
9600
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200
Ch Statistics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Ch Diagnostics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Loopback Mode
Disabled
Disabled / Internal / External
Test pattern
11111111
00000000
11111111
TABLE 3 : INTERMiCOM GENERIC COMMUNICATIONS SET-UP
-
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Menu Text
Default Setting
Page 73/82 Setting Range
Step Size
Min
Max
100%
INTERMICOM CONF IM Msg Alarm Lvl
25%
0%
1%
IM1 Cmd Type
Blocking
Disabled/ Blocking/ Direct
IM1 Fallback Mode
Default
Default/ Latched
IM1 DefaultValue
1
0
1
1
IM1 FrameSyncTim
20ms
10ms
1500ms
10ms
IM2 to IM4
(Cells as for IM1 above)
IM5 Cmd Type
Direct
Disabled/ Permissive/ Direct
IM5 Fallback Mode
Default
Default/ Latched
IM5 DefaultValue
0
0
1
1
IM5 FrameSyncTim
10ms
10ms
1500ms
10ms
IM6 to IM8
(Cells as for IM5 above)
TABLE 4 : PROGRAMMING THE RESPONSE FOR EACH OF THE 8 INTERMiCOM SIGNALS
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 74/82 9.10.4.1
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Setting Guidelines The settings required for the InterMiCOM signalling are largely dependant upon whether a direct or indirect (modem/multiplexed) connection between the scheme ends is used. Direct connections will either be short metallic or dedicated fiber optic based and hence can be set to have the highest signalling speed of 19200b/s. Due to this high signalling rate, the difference in operating speed between the direct, permissive and blocking type signals is so small that the most secure signalling (direct intertrip) can be selected without any significant loss of speed. In turn, since the direct intertrip signalling requires the full checking of the message frame structure and CRC checks, it would seem prudent that the “IM# Fallback Mode” be set to “Default” with a minimal intentional delay by setting “IM# FrameSyncTim” to 10msecs. In other words, whenever two consecutive messages have an invalid structure, the relay will immediately revert to the default value until a new valid message is received. For indirect connections, the settings that should be applied will become more application and communication media dependent. As for the direct connections, it may be appealing to consider only the fastest baud rate but this will usually increase the cost of the necessary modem/multiplexer. In addition, devices operating at these high baud rates may suffer from “data jams” during periods of interference and in the event of communication interruptions, may require longer re-synchronization periods. Both of these factors will reduce the effective communication speed thereby leading to a recommended baud rate setting of 9600b/s. It should be noted that as the baud rate decreases, the communications become more robust with fewer interruptions, but that overall signalling times will increase. Since it is likely that slower baud rates will be selected, the choice of signalling mode becomes significant. However, once the signalling mode has been chosen it is necessary to consider what should happen during periods of noise when message structure and content can be lost. If “Blocking” mode is selected, only a small amount of the total message is actually used to provide the signal, which means that in a noisy environment there is still a good likelihood of receiving a valid message. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a reasonably long “IM# FrameSyncTim”. If “Direct Intertrip” mode is selected, the whole message structure must be valid and checked to provide the signal, which means that in a very noisy environment the chances of receiving a valid message are quite small. In this case, it is recommended that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Default” with a minimum “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting i.e. whenever a nonvalid message is received, InterMiCOM will use the set default value. If “Permissive” mode is selected, the chances of receiving a valid message is between that of the “Blocking” and “Direct Intertrip” modes. In this case, it is possible that the “IM# Fallback Mode” is set to “Latched”. The table below highlights the recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” settings for the different signalling modes and baud rates: Minimum Recommended “IM# FrameSyncTim” Setting
Baud Rate
Minimum Setting
Maximum Setting
Direct Intertrip Mode
Blocking Mode
600
100
250
100
1500
1200
50
130
50
1500
2400
30
70
30
1500
4800
20
40
20
1500
9600
10
20
10
1500
19200
10
10
10
1500
TABLE 5 : RECOMMENDED FRAME SYNCHRONISM TIME SETTINGS
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 NOTA:
9.10.4.2
Page 75/82
No recommended setting is given for the Permissive mode since it is anticipated that “Latched” operation will be selected. However, if “Default mode” is selected, the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting should be set greater than the minimum settings listed above. If the “IM# FrameSyncTim” setting is set lower than the minimum setting listed above, there is a danger that the relay will monitor a correct change in message as a corrupted message. A setting of 25% is recommended for the communications failure alarm.
InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.
9.10.5
TESTING InterMiCOM Teleprotection
9.10.5.1
InterMiCOM Loopback Testing & Diagnostics A number of features are included within the InterMiCOM function to assist a user in commissioning and diagnosing any problems that may exist in the communications link. “Loopback” test facilities, located within the INTERMICOM COMMS column of the relay menu, provide a user with the ability to check the software and hardware of the InterMiCOM signalling. By selecting “Loopback Mode” to “Internal”, only the internal software of the relay is checked whereas “External” will check both the software and hardware used by InterMiCOM. In the latter case, it is necessary to connect the transmit and receive pins together (pins 2 and 3) and ensure that the DCD signal is held high (connect pin 1 and pin 4 together). When the relay is switched into “Loopback Mode” the relay will automatically use generic addresses and will inhibit the InterMiCOM messages to the PSL by setting all eight InterMiCOM message states to zero. The loopback mode will be indicated on the relay frontplate by the amber Alarm LED being illuminated and a LCD alarm message, “IM Loopback”.
Px40 Relay with InterMiCOM DCD RxD TxD DTR GND RTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
P1343ENa
Connections for External Loopback mode Once the relay is switched into either of the Loopback modes, a test pattern can be entered in the “Test Pattern” cell which is then transmitted through the software and/or hardware. Providing all connections are correct and the software is working correctly, the “Loopback Status” cell will display “OK”. An unsuccessful test would be indicated by “FAIL”, whereas a hardware error will be indicated by “UNAVAILABLE”. Whilst the relay is in loopback test mode, the “IM Output Status” cell will only show the “Test Pattern” settings, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will indicate that all inputs to the PSL have been forced to zero. Care should be taken to ensure that once the loopback testing is complete, the “Loopback Mode” is set to “Disabled” thereby switching the InterMiCOM channel back in to service. With the loopback mode disabled, the “IM Output Status” cell will show the InterMiCOM messages being sent from the local relay, whilst the “IM Input Status” cell will show the received InterMiCOM messages (received from the remote end relay) being used by the PSL.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 76/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column – see section 10.2. It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell. Another indication of the amount of noise on the channel is provided by the communications failure alarm. Within a fixed 1.6 second time period the relay calculates the percentage of invalid messages received compared to the total number of messages that should have been received based upon the “Baud Rate” setting. If this percentage falls below the threshold set in the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” cell, a “Message Fail” alarm will be raised. Settings The settings available in the INTERMiCOM COMMS menu column are as follows: Menu Text
Default Setting
Setting Range
Step Size
Min
Max
INTERMICOM COMMS IM Output Status
00000000
IM Input Status
00000000
Source Address
1
1
10
1
Receive Address
2
1
10
1
Baud Rate
9600
600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200
Ch Statistics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Reset Statistics
No
No / Yes
Ch Diagnostics
Invisible
Invisible / Visible
Loopback Mode
Disabled
Disabled / Internal / External
Test pattern
11111111
00000000 TABLE 6
11111111
-
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 9.10.5.2
Page 77/82
InterMiCOM Statistics & Diagnostics Once the relay operation has been confirmed using the loopback test facilities, it will be necessary to ensure that the communications between the two relays in the scheme are reliable. To facilitate this, a list of channel statistics and diagnostics are available in the InterMiCOM COMMS column and are explained below: Ch Statistics Rx Direct Count
No. of Direct Tripping messages received with the correct message structure and valid CRC check.
Rx Perm Count
No. of Permissive Tripping messages received with the correct message structure.
Rx Block Count
No. of Blocking messages received with the correct message structure.
Rx NewDataCount No. of different messages received. Rx ErroredCount
No. of incomplete or incorrectly formatted messages received.
Lost Messages
No. of messages lost within the previous time period set in “Alarm Window” cell.
Elapsed Time
Time in seconds since the InterMiCOM channel statistics were reset.
Ch Diagnostics Data CD Status
Indicates when the DCD OK = DCD is energised line (pin 1) is energised. FAIL = DCD is de-energised Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present
FrameSync Status
Indicates when the OK = valid message structure and message structure and synchronisation synchronisation is valid. FAIL = synchronisation has been lost Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present
Message Status
Channel Status
Indicates when the percentage of received valid messages has fallen below the “IM Msg Alarm Lvl” setting within the alarm time period.
OK = acceptable ratio of lost messages FAIL = unacceptable ratio of lost messages Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present
Indicates the state of the OK = channel healthy InterMiCOM FAIL = channel failure communication channel. Absent = InterMiCOM board is not fitted Unavailable = hardware error present
IM H/W Status
Indicates the state of the OK = InterMiCOM hardware healthy InterMiCOM hardware. Read Error = InterMiCOM hardware failure Write Error =
InterMiCOM hardware failure
Absent = InterMiCOM board is either not fitted or failed to initialise TABLE 7 It is possible to hide the channel diagnostics and statistics from view by setting the “Ch Statistics” and/or “Ch Diagnostics” cells to “Invisible”. All channel statistics are reset when the relay is powered up, or by user selection using the “Reset Statistics” cell.
P44x/EN AD/E44
Update Documentation
Page 78/82
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
TECHNICAL DATA (P44X/EN TD/E33)
Page 79/82
Update Documentation
P44x/EN AD/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 3.3
Page 81/82
Protection accuracy Earth Fault Measuring Element (IN>1 IN>2 IN>3 IN>4) Thermal Overload Accuracy Pick-up
Thermal alarm
Calculated trip time ±10%*
Thermal overload
Calculated trip time ±10%*
Cooling time accuracy
±15% of theoretical
Repeatability
1 function
Data 1.2 Password
Data 2.2 Time and date
Other setting cells in column 1
Other setting cells in column 2
C Note:
Data 1.n Password level 2
Data 2.n C - A voltage
The C key will return to column header from any menu cell
Data n.2 I>1 directional
Other setting cells in column n Data n.n I> char angle P0105ENa
FIGURE 4 - FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE
P44x/EN IT/E33
Introduction
Page 14/24 3.6.1
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Default display and menu time-out The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed will be lost and the original setting values maintained. The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options: 3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’ column. Also, from the default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the ! and " keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.
3.6.2
Menu navigation and setting browsing The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the # key will display the first column heading. To select the required column heading use the ( and " keys. The setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the $ and # keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the [up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key !. It is only possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the default display press the # key or the clear key ! from any of the column headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the # key, as the auto-repeat will stop at the column heading. To move to the default display, the # key must be released and pressed again.
3.6.3
Password entry When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear: Enter password **** Level 1 NOTE:
The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed. Press the # and $ keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move between the character fields of the password, use the ( and " keys. The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key %. The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key !. Alternatively, the password can be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column. For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the ‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key ! instead of entering a password.
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.6.4
Page 15/24
Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the read key &. When all alarms have been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of this use the & key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the following prompt will appear: Press clear to reset alarms To clear all alarm messages press !; to return to the alarms/faults present display and leave the alarms uncleared, press &. Depending on the password configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following a trip. Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has been entered using the & key, the ! key can be pressed, this will move the display straight to the fault record. Pressing ! again will move straight to the alarm reset prompt where pressing ! once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5
Setting changes To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell. To change the cell value press the enter key % which will bring up a flashing cursor on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or " keys. If the setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to be changed must first be selected using the ' and " keys. When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing %. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button ! is pressed or if the menu time-out occurs. For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to returning to the default display the following prompt will be given: Update settings? Enter or clear Pressing % will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing ! will cause the relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.
P44x/EN IT/E33
Introduction
Page 16/24 3.7
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Front communication port user interface The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Protection & Control to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based software package. MiCOM relay
Laptop
SK 2
25 pin download/monitor port
Battery
9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)
Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2) P0107ENa
FIGURE 5 - FRONT PORT CONNECTION The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2
Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3
Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5
0V Zero volts common
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 17/24
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way
9 Way
Pin no.
3
2 Rx Receive data
Pin no.
2
3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no.
7
5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay. PC
MiCOM relay
Serial data connector
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
DTE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port
P0108ENa
FIGURE 6 - PC – RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Protocol
Courier
Baud rate
19,200 bits/s
Courier address
1
Message format
11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit
The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has been enabled will be revoked.
P44x/EN IT/E33 Page 18/24 3.8
Introduction MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Rear communication port user interface The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. See Appendix B for details of the connection terminals. The rear port provides KBus/EIA(RS)485 serial data communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection, and the other is for the earth shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity. The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the ‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication protocol being used by the rear port.
3.8.1
Courier communication Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information to allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit. The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows NT4.0/95 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting changes with the relay. To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from AREVA T&D Energy Automation & Information. A typical connection arrangement is shown in figure 7. For more detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length and have up to 32 relays connected to it.
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 19/24
Twisted pair 'K-Bus' RS485 communications link
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
MiCOM relay
RS232
K-Bus
PC
PC serial port
KITZ protocol converter
Modem
Public switched telephone network
Courier master station eg. substation control room
PC
Modem
Remote Courier master station eg. area control center
P0109ENa
FIGURE 7 - REMOTE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION ARRANGEMENTS Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Only two settings apply to the rear port using Courier, the relay’s address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
P44x/EN IT/E33
Introduction
Page 20/24
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Courier The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay: Remote address 1 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this action for the setting changes to take effect. 3.8.2
Modbus communication Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbus communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with Modbus communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using Modbus which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol Modbus The next cell down controls the Modbus address of the relay: Modbus address 23 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one Modbus spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Modbus uses an integer number between 1 and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same Modbus address. The Modbus address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 21/24
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer: Inactivity timer 10.00 mins The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s Modbus communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the Modbus master station. 3.8.3
IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol. To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communication protocol: Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay: Remote address 162 Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
P44x/EN IT/E33
Introduction
Page 22/24
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station. The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements: Measure’t period 30.00 s The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be set between 1 and 60 seconds. The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the communication: Physical link EIA(RS)485 The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre optic’. The next cell down can be used to define the primary function type for this interface, where this is not explicitly defined for the application by the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol*. Function type 226 3.8.4
DNP 3.0 Communication The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group. Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications can be found on their website: www.dnp.org The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices. To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relay’s communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms setting’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications protocol: Protocol DNP 3.0 The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay: DNP 3.0 address 232 Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1 and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
Introduction
P44x/EN IT/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 23/24
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used: Baud rate 9600 bits/s DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay ‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and ‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames: Parity None The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station. The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master by the relay: Time Synch Enabled The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP 3.0 master to synchronise the time. 3.9
Second rear Communication Port For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications port, (P442 and P444 only) which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232. The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as described in previous sections of this chapter. Move down the settings unit the following sub heading is displayed. REAR PORT2 (RP2) The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2. RP2 Protocol Courier The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g. RP2 Card Status EIA232 OK The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration. RP2 Port Config EIA232 The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication mode. RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2
P44x/EN IT/E33
Introduction
Page 24/24
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or 10-bit no parity. The next cell down controls the comms port address. RP2 Address 255 Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in figure 7, it is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses a integer number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is then use by the master station to communicate with the relay. The next cell down controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any massages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and 30 minutes. In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate. For KBus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ interface at the end of the relay spur. RP2 Baud Rate 19200 Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
RELAY DESCRIPTION
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 1/44
CONTENT 1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5
1.1
Hardware overview
5
1.1.1
Power supply module
5
1.1.2
Main processor board
5
1.1.3
Co-processor board
5
1.1.4
Input module
5
1.1.5
Input and output boards
5
1.1.6
IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only)
5
1.2
Software overview
7
1.2.1
Real-time operating system
7
1.2.2
System services software
7
1.2.3
Platform software
7
1.2.4
Protection & control software
7
1.2.5
Disturbance Recorder
7
2.
HARDWARE MODULES
8
2.1
Processor board
8
2.2
Co-processor board
8
2.3
Internal communication buses
8
2.4
Input module
9
2.4.1
Transformer board
9
2.4.2
Input board
9
2.4.3
Universal opto isolated logic inputs
9
2.5
Power supply module (including output relays)
10
2.5.1
Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface)
11
2.5.2
Output relay board
11
2.6
IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only)
11
2.7
2nd rear communication and InterMiCOM teleprotection board (optional)
11
2.8
Mechanical layout
12
3.
RELAY SOFTWARE
13
3.1
Real-time operating system
13
3.2
System services software
13
3.3
Platform software
14
3.3.1
Record logging
14
3.3.2
Settings database
14
3.3.3
Database interface
14
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 2/44
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
3.4
Protection and control software
14
3.4.1
Overview - protection and control scheduling
15
3.4.2
Signal processing
15
3.4.3
Programmable scheme logic
16
3.4.4
Event and Fault Recording
16
3.4.5
Disturbance recorder
16
3.4.6
Fault locator
16
4.
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS
17
4.1
Distance and Resistance Measurement
17
4.1.1
Phase-to-earth loop impedance
19
4.1.2
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage).20
4.1.3
Phase-to-phase loop impedance
20
4.2
"Deltas" Algorithms
21
4.2.1
Fault Modelling
21
4.2.2
Detecting a Transition
23
4.2.3
Confirmation
26
4.2.4
Directional Decision
26
4.2.5
Phase Selection
27
4.2.6
Summary
27
4.3
"Conventional" Algorithms
28
4.3.1
Convergence Analysis
29
4.3.2
Start-Up
29
4.3.3
Phase Selection
30
4.3.4
Directional Decision
31
4.3.5
Directional Decision during SOTF/TOR (Switch On To Fault/Trip On Reclose)
31
4.4
Faulted Zone Decision
32
4.5
Tripping Logic
33
4.6
Fault Locator
34
4.6.1
Selecting the fault location data
35
4.6.2
Processing algorithms
35
4.7
Power swing detection
36
4.7.1
Power swing detection
36
4.7.2
Line in one pole open condition (during single-pole trip)
37
4.7.3
Conditions for isolating lines
37
4.7.4
Tripping logic
37
4.7.5
Fault Detection after Single-phase Tripping (one-pole-open condition)
38
4.8
Double Circuit Lines
38
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 3/44
4.9
DEF Protection Against High Resistance Ground Faults
40
4.9.1
High Resistance Ground Fault Detection
40
4.9.2
Directional determination
40
4.9.3
Phase selection
40
4.9.4
Tripping Logic
41
4.9.5
SBEF – Stand-By earth fault (not communication-aided)
42
5.
SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS
43
5.1
Start-up self-testing
43
5.1.1
System boot
43
5.1.2
Initialisation software
43
5.1.3
Platform software initialisation & monitoring
44
5.2
Continuous self-testing
44
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 4/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 5/44
1.
RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s requirements. The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1
Power supply module The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the RS485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second board the power supply module contains relays which provide the output contacts.
1.1.2
Main processor board The processor board performs most of the calculations for the relay (fixed and programmable scheme logic, protection functions other than distance protection) and controls the operation of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).
1.1.3
Co-processor board The co-processor board manages the acquisition of analogue quantities, filters them and calculates the thresholds used by the protection functions. It also processes the distance algorithms.
1.1.4
Input module The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a format suitable for the co-processor board. The standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.5
Input and output boards P441
P442
P444
Opto-inputs
8 x UNI(1)
16 x UNI(1)
24 x UNI(1)
Relay outputs
6 N/O
9 N/O
24 N/O
8 C/O
12 C/O
8 C/O
Universal voltage range opto inputs
N/O – normally open C/O – change over
1.1.6
IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870 communication only. All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the input module to the processor. figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the flow of information between them.
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 6/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Present values of all settings
Alarm, event, fault, disturbance & maintenance record
Battery backed-up SRAM
Front LCD panel
CPU code & data, setting database data
Flash EPROM
SRAM
E²PROM
RS232 Front comms port CPU
Parallel test port LEDs
Default settings & parameters, language text, software code
Main processor board
Timing data IRIG-B signal IRIG-B board optional
Comms between main & coprocessor boards
CPU code & data
Fibre optic rear comms port optional FPGA
SRAM
Serial data bus (sample data)
CPU
Parallel data bus
Input board
Power supply (3 voltages), rear comms data
Analogue input signals
Power supply board
Power supply
Digital inputs (x8 or x16 or x24)
ADC
Relay board
Opto-isolated inputs
Digital input values
Output relays
Output relay contacts (x14 or x21 or x32)
Power supply, rear comms data, output relay status
Coprocessor board
Watchdog contacts
Field voltage
Transformer board
Rear RS485 communication port
Current & voltage inputs (6 to 8)
P3026ENb
FIGURE 1 - RELAY MODULES AND INFORMATION FLOW
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.2
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 7/44
Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
1.2.1
Real-time operating system The real time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts of the relay’s software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information between tasks, in the form of messages.
1.2.2
System services software The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For example, the system services software controls the boot of the relay’s software from the nonvolatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports. The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the relay’s hardware and the rest of the relay software.
1.2.3
Platform software The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus and IEC60870-5-103) the platform software converts the information from the database into the format required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all setting changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.
1.2.4
Protection & control software The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and digital optoisolated inputs.
1.2.5
Disturbance Recorder The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 8/44
2.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1
Processor board The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad and LEDs. The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC). The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories, volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data and 32kB of E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values.
2.2
Co-processor board A second processor board is used in the relay for the processing of the current differential protection algorithms. The processor used on the second board is the same as that used on the main processor board. The second processor board has provision for fast access (zero wait state) SRAM for use with both program and data memory storage. This memory can be accessed by the main processor board via the parallel bus, and this route is used at poweron to download the software for the second processor from the flash memory on the main processor board. Further communication between the two processor boards is achieved via interrupts and the shared SRAM. The serial bus carrying the sample data is also connected to the co-processor board, using the processor’s built-in serial port, as on the main processor board. The co-processor board also handles all communication with the remote differential relay(s). This is achieved via optical fibre communications and hence the co-processor board holds the optical modules to transmit and receive data over the fibre links. From software version B1.0, coprocessor board woks at 150Mhz.
2.3
Internal communication buses The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves. The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.4
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 9/44
Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consist of two PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board. The P441, P442 and P444 relays provide three voltage inputs and four current inputs. They also provide an additional voltage input for the check sync function.
2.4.1
Transformer board The transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up to five current transformers (CTs). The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options) and the nominal voltage input is 110V. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.
2.4.2
Input board The main input board is shown as a block diagram in figure 2. It provides the circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A – D converter provides 16-bit resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's internal circuitry.
2.4.3
Universal opto isolated logic inputs The P441, P442 and P444 relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part. i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling, tripping. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages ≥80% of the set voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages ≤60% of the set voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for intertripping. This can be improved by switching off the ½ cycle filter in which case one of the following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the input circuit. (See also section 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP for the hysteresis values of universal optos).
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 10/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
3/4 voltage inputs
Up to 5 current inputs
VT
4
VT
CT
Up to 5
CT
Transformer board Anti-alias filters
Diffn to single Low pass filter
4
Low pass filter
4
Diffn to single
Low pass filter
Up to 5
Low pass filter
Diffn to single
Up to 5
Diffn to single
Input board
16:1 Multiplexer Optical isolator
Noise filter
Optical isolator
8 digital inputs
Noise filter
Buffer 16-bit ADC Serial Interface
Sample control
Calibration E²PROM
Buffer
Serial sample data bus
Trigger from processor board
Parallel bus
Parallel bus
P3027ENa
FIGURE 2 - MAIN INPUT BOARD The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals. The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relay’s electronics from the power system environment. A 48V ‘field voltage’ supply is provided at the back of the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for analogue signals which are provided on the main input board. 2.5
Power supply module (including output relays) The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.5.1
Page 11/44
Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in table 1 below. Nominal dc range
Nominal ac range
24 – 48V
dc only
48 – 110V
30 – 100V rms
110 – 250V
100 – 240V rms TABLE 1 - POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS
The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, •16V for the analogue electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital inputs. The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485 communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485 interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide communication using one of either Courier, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus. The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one normally closed which are driven by the processor board. These are provided to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state. 2.5.2
Output relay board The output relay board holds seven relays, three with normally open contacts and four with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays’ state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model seven additional output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay boards.
2.6
IRIG-B board (P442 and P444 only) The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay. The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s internal real-time clock to an accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event, fault maintenance and disturbance records. The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which can be used for the rear communication port instead of the RS485 electrical connection (IEC60870 only).
2.7
2nd rear communication and InterMiCOM teleprotection board (optional) On ordring this board within a relay, both 2nd rear communications K-Bus and InterMiCOM (available in next version C1.0) will become connection and settings options. The user may then either one, or both, as demanded by the installation. SK4 : The second rear communications port runs the courier language. This can be used over one of three physical links : twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pai EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 12/44
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
SK4 : The InterMiCOM board (available with next version C1.0) is used to connect to an EIA(RS)232 link, allowing up to eight programmable signalling bits to be transferred from/to the remote line end relay. A suitable EIA(RS)232 link must exist between the two line ends, for example a MODEM, or via a compatible multiplexer (check compatibility before ordering the relay). The second rear comms/InterMiCOM board, and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms board are available ; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. (See also the Cortec code in P44x/EN BR). 2.8
Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring clips are used to ground the module metalwork. Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data communication. Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the board is removed. The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and 12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
3.
Page 13/44
RELAY SOFTWARE The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections: •
the real-time operating system
•
the system services software
•
the platform software
•
the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of the relay. figure 3 shows the structure of the relay software. Protection & Control Software
Measurements and event, fault & disturbance records
Disturbance recorder task Protection task
Programables & fixed scheme logic
Fourier signal processing
Platform Software
Protection algorithms
Protection & control settings
Event, fault, disturbance, maintenance record logging
Remote communications interface CEI 60870-5-103
Settings database
Remote communications interface - Modbus
Front panel interface - LCD & keypad
Local & Remote communications interface - Courier
Supervisor task
Sampling function copies samples into 2 cycle buffer
Control of output contacts and programmable LEDs
Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD, LEDs, front & rear comms ports. Self-checking maintenance records
Sample data & digital logic input
System services software
Relay hardware P0128ENa
FIGURE 3 - RELAY SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 3.1
Real-time operating system The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of operating system messages.
3.2
System services software As shown in figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the relay’s hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 14/44 3.3
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Platform software The platform software has three main functions:
3.3.1
•
to control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records.
•
to store and maintain a database of all of the relay’s settings in non-volatile memory.
•
to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103).
Record logging The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5 maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software function. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this chapter.
3.3.2
Settings database The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform software’s management of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the platform software operates a ‘scratchpad’ in SRAM memory. This allows a number of setting changes to be applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM. (See also chapter 1 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3
Database interface The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay’s internal interface between the database and each of the relay’s user interfaces. The database of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relay’s user interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
3.4
Protection and control software The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and the platform software.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 3.4.1
Page 15/44
Overview - protection and control scheduling After initialisation at start-up, the protection and control task is suspended until there are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system services software and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-cycle buffer. The protection and control software resumes execution when the number of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P140 feeder protection relay, the protection task is executed twice per cycle, i.e. after every 12 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by the relay. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software tasks to take place.
3.4.2
Signal processing The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it is registered with the protection and control software. 12 Samples per Cycle
I
Transformation & Low Pass Filter
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
A-D DFT
LOW PASS FILTER
Converter 24 Samples per Cycle V
Transformation & Low Pass Filter
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
LOW PASS FILTER
If
ONE-SAMPLE DELAY
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
FIR DERIVATOR
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
I'f
ONE-SAMPLE DELAY
SUB-SAMPLE 1/2
V
FIR = Impulse Finite Response Filter P3029ENa
FIGURE 4 - SIGNAL ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value of the frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection and control task. When the protection and control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering purposes.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 16/44 3.4.3
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g. protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection schemes. The PSL itself consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs. The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear. The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection and control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL input signals every time it runs. This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design. However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system, and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support MiCOM S1.
3.4.4
Event and Fault Recording A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an event record to be created. When this happens, the protection and control task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is slower than the supervisor’s buffer. This means that the protection software is not delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM. If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.
3.4.5
Disturbance recorder The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of 10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
3.4.6
Fault locator The fault locator task is also separate from the protection and control task. The fault locator is invoked by the protection and control task when a fault is detected. The fault locator uses a 12-cycle buffer of the analogue input signals and returns the calculated location of the fault to the protection and control task wich includes it in the fault record for the fault. When the fault record is complete (i.e. includes the fault location), the protection and control task can send a message to the supervisor task to log the fault record.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
4.
Page 17/44
DISTANCE ALGORITHMS The operation is based on the combined use of two types of algorithms: •
"Deltas" algorithms using the superimposed current and voltage values that are characteristic of a fault. These are used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms ” using Gauss-Seidel.
•
"Conventional" algorithms using the impedance values measured while the fault occurs. These are also used for phase selection and directional determination. The fault distance calculation is performed by the "impedance measurement algorithms." Using Gauss-Seidel.
The "Deltas" algorithms have priority over the "Conventional" algorithms if they have been started first. The latter are actuated only if "Deltas" algorithms have not been able to clear the fault within two cycles of its detection. 4.1
Distance and Resistance Measurement MiCOM P44x distance protection is a full scheme distance relay. To measure the distance and apparent resistance of a fault, the following equation is solved on the loop with a fault: I
IL
Z SL
Local Source
R
(1-n).ZL
(n).ZL
Z SR
Relay
Relay
VL
VR RF
I F = I + I'
V L = (ZL x I x D)+ RF x IF = ((r +jx) x I x D) +RF x IF
Remote Source
where
V L = local terminal relay voltage r = line resistance (ohm/mile) x = line reactance (ohm/mile) IF = current flowing in the fault (I + I') I = current measured by the relay on the faulty phase = current flowing into the fault from local terminal I' = current flowing into the fault from remote terminal D = fault location (permile or km from relay to the fault) R = fault resistance R F = apparent fault resistance at relay; R x (1 + I'/I) Assumed Fault Currents: For Phase to Ground Faults (ex., A-N), IF = 3 I0 for 40ms, then IA after 40 ms For Phase to Phase Faults (ex., A-B), IF =IAB
P3030ENa
FIGURE 5 - DISTANCE AND FAULT RESISTANCE ESTIMATION The impedance measurements are used by High Speed and Conventional Algorithms.
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 18/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The following describes how to solve the above equation (determination of D fault distance and R fault resistance). The line model used will be the 3×3 matrix of the line impedance (resistive and inductive) of the three phases, and mutual values between phases.
Raa + jω Laa
Rab + jω Lab
Rac + jω Lac
Rab + jω Lab
Rbb + jω Lbb
Rbc + jω Lbc
Rac + jω Lac
Rbc + jω Lbc
Rcc + jω Lcc
Where: Raa=Rbb=Rcc and Rab=Rbc=Rac
2. X 1 + X 0 3 and
ωLaa = ωLbb = ωLcc =
ωLab = ωLbc = ωLac =
X 0 − X1 3
and X1 : positive sequence reactance X0 : zero-sequence reactance The line model is obtained from the positive and zero-sequence impedance. The use of four different residual compensation factor settings is permitted on the relay, as follows: kZ1: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 1 and 1X. kZ2: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone 2. kZp: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zone p. kZ3/4: residual compensation factor used to calculate faults in zones 3 and 4. The solutions "Dfault " and "Rfault " are obtained by solving the system of equations (one equation per step of the calculation) using the Gauss Seidel method. n
n
∑ (VL.Ifault ) − Dfault.( n − 1).∑ (Z 1.IL.IFault ) n0
n0
n
∑ (I
fault
)²
n0
R fault (n) = n
∑ (V
L.
n0
n
Z 1. IL ) − Rfault.( n − 1).∑ ( Z 1. IL.IFault ) n0
n
∑ (Z .I )² 1 L
Dfault (n) =
n0
Rfault and Dfault are computed for every sample (12 samples per cycle). With IL equal to Iα+k0.3 x I0 for phase-to-earth loop or IL equal to Iαβ for phase-to-phase loop.
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1
Page 19/44
Phase-to-earth loop impedance
VCN
VBN
VAN
Zs i C
Z1
Zs iB
Z1
Zs iA
Z1
kS ZS VA VB VC k0 Z1
X / Phase
R Fault / (1+k 0)
Z1 Z Fault
RFault
R / Phase
Location of Distance Relay P3031ENa
FIGURE 6 - PHASE-TO-EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-earth loop is : VαN = Z1 x Dfault x (Iα + kO x 3 I0) + Rfault x Ifault with α = phase A, B or C The model for the current IF circulating in the fault is (3 x I0) during the first 40 ms and then Iα. The (3 x I0) current is used for the first 40 milliseconds to model the fault current, thus eliminating the load current before the circuit breakers are operated during the 40ms (one pole tripping). After the 40ms, the phase current is used. VAN = Z1.Dfault.(IA+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault VBN = Z1.Dfault.(IB+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault VCN = Z1.Dfault.(IC+k0.3xI0)+Rfault.Ifault x 4 kO residual compensation factors = 12 phase-to-earth loops are continuously monitored and computed for each samples.
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 20/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
VαN = Z1.Dfault.(Iα + k0.3I0) + Rfault.Ifault VαN = Z1.Dfault.(Iα +
Z0–Z1 .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3
VαN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.(Iα + VαN = (R1+j.X1).Dfault.Iα +
R0–R1 + j.(X0–X1) .3I0) + Rfault.Ifault 3.(R1-jX1)
R0–R1 + j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3
VαN = R1.Dfault.Iα +
R0–R1 j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.Iα + .Dfault.3I0 + Rfault.Ifault 3 3
VαN = R1.Dfault.Iα +
R0–R1 j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + j.X1. Dfault.Iα + .Dfault.(IA+IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3
VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +
R0–R1 j.(X0+2.X1) j.(X0–X1) .Dfault.3I0 + .Dfault.IA + .Dfault.(IB+IC) + Rfault.Ifault 3 3 3
VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +
R0–R1 (X +2.X1) dI (X –X ) dI (X –X ) dI .Dfault.3I0 + 0 .Dfault. A + 0 1 .Dfault. B + 0 1 .Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt 3 3 3
VAN = R1.Dfault.IA +
R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAA.Dfault. A + LAB.Dfault. B + LAC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt
VBN = R1.Dfault.IB +
R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAB.Dfault. A + LBB.Dfault. B + LBC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt
VCN = R1.Dfault.IC +
R0–R1 dI dI dI .Dfault.3I0 + LAC.Dfault. A + LBC.Dfault. B + LCC.Dfault. C + Rfault.Ifault 3 dt dt dt
4.1.2
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter.
4.1.3
Phase-to-phase loop impedance
VCN
VBN
Zs i C
Z1
Zs
iB
Z1
Zs iA
Z1
VAN
X / Phase Z1
RFault
VC Location of Distance Relay
FIGURE 7 - PHASE-TO-PHASE LOOP IMPEDANCE The impedance model for the phase-to-phase loop is : Vαβ = ZL x Dfault x Iαβ + Rfault /2 x Ifault with αβ = phase AB, BC or CA
R Fault/ 2
Z Fault
R / Phase
P3032ENa
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 21/44
The model for the current Ifault circulating in the fault Iαβ. VAB = 2Z1.Dfault.IAB + Rfault.Ifault VBC = 2Z1.Dfault.IBC + Rfault.Ifault VCA = 2Z1.Dfault.ICA + Rfault.Ifault = 3 phase-to-phase loops are continuously monitored and computed for each sample. Vαβ = 2Z1.Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2(R1 + j. X1).Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2R1.Dfault.Iαβ + 2j. X1.Dfault.Iαβ + Rfault.Ifault Vαβ = 2R1.Dfault.Iαβ + 2X1.Dfault.
dIαβ + Rfault.Ifault dt
VAB = R1.Dfault.(IA – IB) + (LAA–LAB).Dfault.
dIA dI dI R + (LAB–LBB).Dfault. B + (LAC–LBC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2
VBC = R1.Dfault.(IB – IC) + (LAB–LAC).Dfault.
dIA dI dI R + (LBB–LBC).Dfault. B + (LBC–LCC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2
VCA = R1.Dfault.(IC – IA) + (LAC–LAA).Dfault.
dIA dI dI R + (LBC–LAB).Dfault. B + (LCC–LAC).Dfault. C + fault.Ifault dt dt dt 2
Impedance measurement algorithms work with instantaneous values (current and voltage). Derivative current value (dI/dt) is obtained by using FIR filter. 4.2
"Deltas" Algorithms The patented high-speed algorithm has been proven with 10 years of service at all voltage levels from MV to EHV networks. The P440 relay has ultimate reliability of phase selection and directional decision far superior to standard distance techniques using superimposed algorithms. These algorithms or delta algorithms are based on transient components and they are used for the following functions: Detection of the fault By comparing the superimposed values to a threshold which is low enough to be crossed when a fault occurs and high enough not to be crossed during normal switching outside of the protected zones. Establishing the fault direction Only a fault can generate superimposed values; therefore, it is possible to determine direction by measuring the transit direction of the superimposed energy. Phase selection As the superimposed values no longer include the load currents, it is possible to make highspeed phase selection.
4.2.1
Fault Modelling Consider a stable network status-the steady-state load flow prior to any start. When a fault occurs, a new network is established. If there is no other modification, the differences between the two networks (before and after the fault) are caused by the fault. The network after the fault is equivalent to the sum of the values of the status before the fault and the values characteristic of the fault. The fault acts as a source for the latter, and the sources act as passive impedance in this case.
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 22/44
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 VR R
IR
VR
IR
R
F
ZL
ZS
F
ZL
ZR
Relay
Relay
V F (prefault voltage) V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location
Unfaulted Network (steady state prefault conditions) VR' R
I R'
VR'
F
ZS
I R'
R
ZL
F
ZL
ZR
Relay
Relay
V R ' = Voltage at Relay Location
RF
I R ' = Current at Relay Location
Faulted Network (steady state) VR R
IR
VR
F
ZS
R
ZL
ZL
Relay
IR F
ZR Relay
-V F V R= Voltage at Relay Location I R= Current at Relay Location
RF
Fault Inception P3033ENa
FIGURE 8 - PRE, FAULT AND FAULT INCEPTION VALUE Network Status Monitoring The network status is monitored continuously to determine whether the "Deltas" algorithms may be used. To do so, the network must be "healthy," which is characterised by the following: •
The circuit breaker(s) should be closed just prior to fault inception (2 cycles of healthy pre-fault data should be stored) – the line is energised from one or both ends,
•
The source characteristics should not change noticeably (there is no power swing or out-of-step detected).
•
Power System Frequency is being measured and tracked (24 samples per cycle at 50 or 60Hz).
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 23/44
No fault is detected : •
all nominal phase voltages are between 70% and 130% of the nominal value.
•
the residual voltage (3.V0) is less than 10% of the nominal value
•
the residual current (3.I0) is less than 10% of the nominal value + 3.3% of the maximum load current flowing on the line
The measured loop impedance are outside the characteristic, when these requirements are fulfilled, the superimposed values are used to determine the fault inception (start), faulty phase selection and fault direction. The network is then said to be "healthy" before the fault occurrence. Detecting a Transition In order to detect a transition, the MiCOM P441, P442 and P444 compares sampled current and voltage values at the instant "t" with the values predicted from those stored in the memory one period and two periods earlier. 2T
G
G = Current or Voltage
4.2.2
T
G(t)
G(t-T)
G(t-2T)
Gp(t)
Time t-2T
t-T
t
P3034ENa
FIGURE 9 - TRANSITION DETECTION Gp(t) = 2G(t-T) - G(t-2T) where Gp(t) are the predicted values of either the sampled current or voltage A transition is detected on one of the current or voltage input values if the absolute value of (G(t) - Gp(t)) exceeds a threshold of 0.2 x IN (nominal current) or 0.1 x UN / √3 = 0.1x VN (nominal voltage) With:
U = line-to-line voltage V = line-to-ground voltage = U / √3
G(t) = G(t) - Gp(t) is the transition value of the reading G. The high-speed algorithms will be started if ∆U OR ∆I is detected on one sample.
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 24/44 Example: isolated AC fault
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Relay Description MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN HW/E33 Page 25/44
P44x/EN HW/E33
Relay Description
Page 26/44 4.2.3
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Confirmation In order to eliminate the transitions generated by possible operations or by high frequencies, the transition detected over a succession of three sampled values is confirmed by checking for at least one loop for which the two following conditions are met: •
∆ V > threshold V, where threshold V = 0.1 Un /√3 = 0.1 Vn
and •
∆ I > threshold l, where threshold I= 0.2 In.
The start-up of the high-speed algorithms will be confirmed if ∆U AND ∆I are detected on three consecutive samples. 4.2.4
Directional Decision The "Delta" detection of the fault direction is determined from the sign of the energy per Phase for the transition values characterising the fault. VR IR F
ZS
ZL
ZL
ZR
Relay
-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location RF
I R = Current at Relay Location
Forward Fault VR IR R
ZS
ZL
ZL
ZR Relay
-V F V R = Voltage at Relay Location I R = Current at Relay Location
RF
Reverse Fault
P3035ENa
FIGURE 10 - DIRECTIONAL DETERMINATION USING SUPERIMPOSED VALUES To do this, the following sum per phase is calculated: SA =
ni ≥ n 0 + 5
∑
(∆VANi . ∆IA i )
SB =
n0
ni ≥ n 0 + 5
∑
(∆VBNi . ∆IB i )
n0
SC =
ni ≥ n 0 + 5
∑ (∆V
CNi
. ∆ICi )
n0
Where no is the instant at which the fault is detected, ni is the instant of the calculation and S is the calculated transition energy. If the fault is in the forward direction, then S i 0. The directional criterion is valid if S >5 x (10% x Vn x 20% x In x cos (85° ) This sum is calculated on five successive samples. RCA angle of the delta algorithms is equal to 60° (-30°) if the protected line is not serie compensated (else RCA is equal to 0°).
Relay Description
P44x/EN HW/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.5
Page 27/44
Phase Selection Phase selection is made on the basis of a comparison between the transition values for the derivatives of currents IA, IB and IC:
∆I'A, ∆I'B, ∆I'C, ∆I'AB, ∆I'BC, ∆I'CA NOTE:
The derivatives of the currents are used to eliminate the effects of the DC current component.
Hence:
SAN =
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
∑ (∆I ' A i )²
SAB =
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
∑ (∆I '
n0
SBN =
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
∑ (∆I ' Bi )²
SBC =
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
∑ (∆I ' C i )²
)²
BC i
)²
CAi
)²
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
∑ (∆I '
n0
SCN =
ABi
n0
n0
SCA =
ni ≥ n 0 + 4
n0
∑ (∆I ' n0
The phase selection is valid if the sum (SAB+SBC+SCA) is higher than a threshold. This sum is not valid if the positive sequence impedance on the source side is far higher than the zero sequence impedance. In this case, the conventional algorithms are used to select the faulted phase(s). Sums on one-phase and two-phase loops are performed. The relative magnitudes of these sums determine the faulted phase(s). For examples, assume : If SAB
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Neg Sequence O/C
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Broken Conductor
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Earth Fault O/C
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Aided DEF
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Zero Seq. power (*)
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Volt Protection
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
CB Fail & I<
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
Supervision
Enabled
Enabled or Disabled
System Checks
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
CONFIGURATION
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 12/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Menu text
Default setting
Available settings
Internal A/R
Disabled
Enabled or Disabled
Input Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Output Labels
Visible
Invisible or Visible
CT & VT Ratios
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Event Recorder
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
Disturb Recorder
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
Measure’t Setup
Invisible
Invisible or Visible
Comms Settings
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Commission Tests
Visible
Invisible or Visible
Setting Values
Primary
Primary or Secondary
(*) from B1.0 The aim of the Configuration column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column do not then appear within the main relay menu. 2.2
Phase fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 5 zones of phase fault protection, as shown in the impedance plot Figure 1 below. X(
/phase)
ZONE 3
ZONE P
ZONE 2 ZONE 1X ZONE 1 R1Ph/2
R2Ph/2 RpPh/2 R3Ph/2 = R4Ph/2 R (
/phase)
ZONE 4
P0470ENa
FIGURE 1 – PHASE/PHASE FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS ( /PHASE SCHEME) Remarks:
1. R limit value in MiCOM S1, are in ohms loop. 2. In a Ω/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 2 (for phase/phase diagram). 3. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the positive impedance of the line (value adjusted in the settings)
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 13/220
All phase fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalied as follows: •
Zones 1, 2 and 3 - Directional forward zones, as used in conventional three zone distance schemes. Note that Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes (see page 17 §2.5.2).
•
Zone P - Programmable. Selectable in MiCOM S1 (Distance scheme\Fault type) as a directional forward or reverse zone.
•
Zone 4 - Directional reverse zone. Note that zone 3 and zone 4 can be set with same Rloop value to provide a general start of the relay. Remark:
2.3
If any zone i presents a Rloop i bigger than R3=R4, the limit of the start is always given by R3. See also the "Commissioning Test" chapter.
Earth fault distance protection The P441, P442 and P444 relays have 5 zones of earth (ground) fault protection, as shown in the earth loop impedance plot Figure 2 below. Type of fault can be selected in MiCOM S1 (only Phase/Phase or P/P & P/Ground) X(
/phase)
ZONE 3
ZONE P (Programmable)
ZONE 2 ZONE 1X
ZONE 1 R1G 1+KZ 1
R2G 1+KZ 2
RpG R3G = R4G 1+KZ 1+KZ 1+KZ p 3/4 3/4
R(
/phase)
ZONE P Reverse ZONE 4
P0471ENa
FIGURE 2 – PHASE/GROUND FAULT QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTICS ( /PHASE SCHEME) Remarks:
1. In a Ω/phase scheme the R value must be divided by 1+KZ (for phase/ground diagram) 2. The angle of the start element (Quad) is the angle of the 2Z1+Z0 (Z1: positive sequence Z, Z0: zero sequence Z) 3. See calculation of KZ in section 2.6.5.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 14/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
All earth fault protection elements are quadrilateral shaped, and are directionalised as per the phase fault elements. The reaches of the earth fault elements use residual compensation of the corresponding phase fault reach. The residual compensation factors are as follows:
2.4
•
kZ1 - For zone 1 (and zone 1X);
•
kZ2 - For zone 2;
•
kZ3/4 - Shared by zones 3 and 4;
•
kZp - For zone P.
Consistency between zones In order to understand how the different distance zones interact the parameters below should be considered: •
•
If Zp is a forward zone −
Z1 ! Z2 < Zp < Z3
−
tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3
−
R1G < R2G < RpG < R3G = R4G
−
R1Ph < R1extPh < R2Ph < RpPh < R3Ph
If Zp is a reverse zone −
Z1 < Z2 < Z3
−
Zp > Z4
−
tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3
−
tZp < tZ4
−
R1G < R2G < R3G
−
RpG < R3G = R4G
−
R1Ph < R2Ph < R3Ph
−
RpPh < R3Ph = R4Ph
−
R3G < UN / (1.2 X √3 IN)
−
R3Ph < UN / (1.2 X √3 IN) Remarks:
1. If Z3 is disabled, the forward limit element becomes the smaller zone Z2- (or Zp if selected forward) 2. If Z4 is disabled, the directional limit for the forward zone is: 30° (since version A4.0) 3. For older version than A4.0, the directional limit is: 0° (when Z4 is selected: disable).
Conventional rules are used as follows: −
Distance Timers are initiated as soon as the relay has picked up – CVMR pickup distance (CVMR = Start & Convergence)
−
The minimum tripping time even with Carrier received is T1
−
Zone 4 is always Reverse
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.5
General Distance Trip logic
2.5.1
Equation
Page 15/220
Z1'.T1. BZ1 . PZ1 + Z1x'.(None + Z1xSiAnomTac.UNB_Alarm).[ T1. INP_Z1EXT] + UNB_CR.T1.[ PZ1.Z1'+PZ2.Z2'+PFwd.Aval’] + UNB_CR .T1.(Tp +INP_COS(*)).[ Z1'.BZ1 + (Z2'.BZ2. INP_COS
(*)])
+ T2 [ Z2' + PZ1.Z1' + BZ1.Z1'] + Z3'.T3 + Zp' .Tzp + Z4'.T4 [(*) from version A2.10 & A3.1] (See Figure 3 in section 2.7.2.1- Z’ logic description) Remarks:
4. In case of COS (carrier out of service), the logic swap back to a basic scheme. 5. In the column Data Type:"Configuration" means MiCOM S1 Setting (the parameter is present in the settings).
With the inputs/outputs described above: 2.5.2
Inputs Data Type
Description
T1 to T4
Internal logic
Elapse of Distance Timer 1 to 4 (T1/T2/T3/TZp/T4)
Tp
Internal logic
Elapse of transmission time in blocking scheme
Z1' to Z4' (*)
Internal logic
Detection of fault in zones 1 to 4 (lock out by PSWing or Rev Guard) – See figure 3 section 2.7.21
Forward’
Internal logic
Fwd Fault Detection l (lockout by reversal guard)
UNB_CR
Internal logic
Carrier Received
INP_COS
TS Opto
Carrier Out of Service
CSZ1
Configuration
Carrier send in case of zone 1 decision
CSZ2
Configuration
Carrier send in case of zone 2 decision
CSZ4
Configuration
Carrier send in case of zone 4 decision (Reverse)
None
Configuration
Scheme without carrier
PZ1
Configuration
Permissive scheme Z1
PZ2
Configuration
Permissive scheme Z2
PFwd
Configuration
Permissive Scheme with directional Fwd
BZ1
Configuration
Blocking scheme Z1
BZ2
Configuration
Blocking scheme Z2
INP_Z1EXT
Internal logic
Zone extension (digital input assigned to an opto by dedicated PSL)
Z1xChannel Fail Configuration
Z1x logic enabled if channel fail detected (Carrier out of service = COS)
UNBAlarm
Carrier Out Of Service
Internal logic
(*) the use of an apostrophe in the above logic (Z'1) is explained in section 2.7.2.1 Figure 3
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 16/220 2.5.3
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Outputs Data Type
Description
Internal logic
Distance protection Trip
Single Pole Z1
Single pole Z2
T1
T2
Tzp
T3
T4
0
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
0
1
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
3
3
3
PDist_Dec 2.6
Type of trip
1 : Trip 1P if selected in MiCOM S1 otherwise trip 3P 3 : Trip 3P 2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
Inputs Data Type
Description
INP_Dist_Timer_Block
TS opto
Input for blocking the distance function
Single Pole T1
Configuration
Trip 1pole at T1 – 3P in other cases
Single Pole T1 & T2
Configuration
Trip 1pole at T1 /T2 – 3P in other cases
PDist_Trip
Internal Logic
Trip by Distance protection
T1 to T4
Internal Logic
End of distance timer by Zone
Fault A
Internal Logic
Phase A selection
Fault B
Internal Logic
Phase B selection
Fault C
Internal Logic
Phase C selection
Data Type
Description
PDist_Trip A
Internal Logic
Trip Order phase A
PDist_Trip B
Internal Logic
Trip Order phase B
PDist_Trip C
Internal Logic
Trip Order phase C
Outputs
Distance zone settings NOTE:
Individual distance protection zones can be enabled or disabled by means of the Zone Status function links. Setting the relevant bit to 1 will enable that zone, setting bits to 0 will disable that distance zones. Note that zone 1 is always enabled, and that zones 2 and 4 will need to be enabled if required for use in channel aided schemes.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Remarks:
2.7.1
Page 17/220
1. .Z3 disable means Fwd start becomes Zp .Z3 & Zp Fwd disable means Fwd start becomes Z2 .Z3 & Zp Fwd & Z2 disable means Fwd start becomes Z1 2. Z4 disable (see remark 1/2/3 in section 2.4)
Settings table Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS LINE SETTING Line Length
1000 km (625 miles)
0.3 km (0.2 mile)
1000 km (625 miles)
0.010 km (0.005 mile)
Line Impedance
12/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
Line Angle
70°
–90°
+90°
0.1°
Zone Status
00011111
Bit 0: Z1X Enable, Bit 1: Z2 Enable, Bit 2: Zone P Enable, Bit 3: Z3 Enable, Bit 4: Z4 Enable.
KZ1 Res Comp
1
0
7
0.001
KZ1 Angle
0°
0°
360°
0.1°
Z1
10/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
Z1X
15/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
R1G
10/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
R1Ph
10/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
tZ1
0
0
10s
0.002s
KZ2 Res Comp
1
0
7
0.001
KZ2 Angle
0°
0°
360°
0.1°
Z2
20/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
R2G
20/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
R2Ph
20/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
tZ2
0.2s
0
10s
0.01s
KZ3/4 Res Comp
1
0
7
0.01
Zone Setting
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 18/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
KZ3/4 Angle
0°
0°
360°
0.1°
Z3
30/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
R3G - R4G
30/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
R3Ph - R4Ph
30/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
tZ3
0.6s
0
10s
0.01s
Z4
40/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
tZ4
1s
0
10s
0.01s
Zone P - Direct.
Directional Fwd
Directional Fwd or Directional Rev
KZp Res Comp
1
0
7
0.001
KZp Angle
0°
0°
360°
0.1°
Zp
25/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
500/In Ω
0.001/In Ω
RpG
25/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
RpPh
25/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
tZp
0.4s
0
10s
0.01s
Serial Cmp.line (*)
Disable
Enable
Disable
Overlap Z Mode (*)
Disable
Enable
Disable
KZm Mutual Comp
0
0
7
0.001
KZm Angle
0°
0°
360°
0.1°
Fault Locator
(*) Serial Cmp. Line (*) Overlap Z Mode
Enabled Enabled
(*) These parameters are available from version A4.0 onwards •
Serial Compensated Line : If enabled, the Directional used in the Deltas Algorithms is set at 90° (Fwd = Quad1&4 / Rev = Quad 2&3) X
REV
FWD
R REV
FWD
P0472ENa
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 •
Page 19/220
If disable, the Directional of the Deltas algorithms is set at -30° like conventional algorithms X
FWD
FWD
R REV
FWD REV
-30˚
P0473ENa
• 2.7.2
Overlap Z Mode: If enable, for a fault in Zp (fwd), then Z1 & Z2 will be displayed in LCD/Events/Drec – The internal logic is not modified
Zone Logic Applied Normally the zone logic used by the distance algorithm is as below:
Z1' Z2' Z4' P0462XXa
(with overlap logic the Z2 will cover also the Z1) 2.7.2.1
Zone Logic The relay internal logic will modify the zones & directionality under the following conditions: •
Power swing detection
•
Settings about blocking logic during Power swing
•
Reversal Guard Timer
•
Type of Logical transmission scheme
For Power swing, two signals are considered: •
Presence of Power swing
•
Unblocking during power swing
During Power swing the zones are blocked; but can be unblocked with: •
Start of unblocking logic
•
Unblocking logic enable in MiCOM S1 on the concerned zone or all zones
During the Reversal guard logic (in case of parallel lines), the reverse directional decision is latched (until that timer is issued) from the switch from Reverse to Forward (for distance scheme with Z1>ZL).
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 20/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Z1x
unblock PS in Z1
&
Z1x'
&
Z1'
&
Z2'
&
Forward'
≥1
Z1 ZL
BOP Z1
BOR2 BLOCK2 (LFZR)
Z4
Z2. CR .T1.Tp + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 + Z3.T3...
Z1 = 80% ZL
BOP Z2
448.15.11
PUP or PUTT
Z1
Fwd.CR.T1 + Z1.T1 + Z2.T2 +...
Z1 = 80% ZL
PUP Fwd
448.15.16
POR1 or POP or POTT
Z1
Z1.CR.T1 + Z1.T2 Z2.T2 + Z3.T3...
Z1 > ZL
POP Z1
448.15.14
2.8.2.5
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Tripping modes The tripping mode is settable (Distance scheme\Trip mode): −
Force 3P : Trip 3P in all cases
−
1PZ1 & CR : Trip 1Pole in T1 for fault in Z1 and also in case of Carrier Received (aided Trip)
−
1PZ1, Z2 & CR : Trip 1Pole for T1 & T2 in T1 for fault in Z1 and CR (aided Trip) and also in Z2 with CR
Several defined aided trip logic can be selected or an open logic can be designed by user (see also section 4.5 from chapter P44x/EN HW).
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 33/220
Unblocking
Basic + Aided Schemes + Weak-Infeed
PSB + RVG
Trip Distance Protection
TOR SOTF
LOL
PSB: Power swing blocking RVG: Reversal guard LOL: Loss of load
P0477ENa
FIGURE 7 - MIMIC DIAGRAM The zones unblocking/blocking logic with Power swing or Reversal guard is managed as explained in the scheme: Figure 3 (section 2.7)
2.8.3
•
The unblocking function if enabled, carries out a function similar to Carrier receive logic. (see explanations in section 2.9.4)
•
Weak infeed allows for the case where there may be no zone pick up from local end.
•
TOR & SOTF applies specific logic in case of manual closing or AR closing logic.
•
Trip Distance Protection manages the Trip order regarding the distance algorithm outputs, the type of trip1P or 3P, the distance timers, and the logic datas such as power swing blocking.
•
Loss of Load manages a specific logic for tripping 3P in Z2 accelerated without carrier.
The Basic Scheme The Basic distance scheme is suitable for applications where no signalling channel is available. Zones 1, 2 and 3 are set as described in Sections 2.7.3 to 2.7.10. In general zones 1 and 2 provide main protection for the line or cable as shown in Figure 9 below, with zone 3 reaching further to provide back up protection for faults on adjacent circuits.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 34/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
FIGURE 8 - SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1(GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\STANDARD MODE) – 6 DIFFERENTS SETTABLE SCHEMES – Z2A ZL A
B
Z1A Z1B
Z2B P3050XXa
FIGURE 9 - MAIN PROTECTION IN THE BASIC SCHEME (NO REQUIREMENT FOR SIGNALLING CHANNEL) Key: A, B
=
Relay locations;
ZL
=
Impedance of the protected line.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 35/220
Protection A
Protection B
Z1' T1 tZ1
Z1' &
&
Z2' T2 tZ2
Z2' &
& Trip
Z3' T3 tZ3
&
≥1
≥1
Z3' &
T3 tZ3 Zp'
&
&
Z4' T4 tZ4
T2 tZ2
Trip
Zp' Tzp tZp
T1 tZ1
Tzp tZp Z4'
&
&
T4 tZ4 P0543ENa
FIGURE 10 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE BASIC SCHEME Figure 10 shows the tripping logic for the Basic scheme. Note that for the P441, P442 and P444 relays, zone timers tZ1 to tZ4 are started at the instant of fault detection, which is why they are shown as a parallel process to the distance zones. The use of an apostrophe in the logic (eg. the ‘ in Z1’) indicates that protection zones are stabilised to avoid maloperation for transformer magnetising inrush current. The method used to achieve stability is based on second harmonic current detection. The Basic scheme incorporates the following features : Instantaneous zone 1 tripping. Alternatively, zone 1 can have an optional time delay of 0 to 10s. Time delayed tripping by zones 2, 3, 4 and P. Each with a time delay set between 0 and 10s. The Basic scheme is suitable for single or double circuit lines fed from one or both ends. The limitation of the Basic scheme is that faults in the end 20% sections of the line will be cleared after the zone 2 time delay. Where no signalling channel is available, then improved fault clearance times can be achieved through the use of a zone 1 extension scheme or by using loss of load logic, as described below. Under certain conditions however, these two schemes will still result in time delayed tripping. Where high speed protection is required over the entire line, then a channel aided scheme will have to be employed.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 36/220 2.8.4
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Zone 1 Extension Scheme Auto-reclosure is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish supply following a transient fault. A Zone 1 extension scheme may therefore be applied to a radial overhead feeder to provide high speed protection for transient faults along the whole of the protected line. Figure 11 shows the alternative reach selections for zone 1: Z1 or the extended reach Z1X. Z1 Extension (A) ZL A
B
Z1A
Z1B
Z1 Extension (B)
P3052ENa
FIGURE 11 - ZONE 1 EXTENSION SCHEME DEFINIED AS DESCRIBED ABOVE: Z1 < Z1X < Z2
or
Z1 < Z2 < Z1X
(with Z1 < ZL < Z1X) In this scheme, zone 1X is enabled and set to overreach the protected line. A fault on the line, including one in the end 20% not covered by zone 1, will now result in instantaneous tripping followed by autoreclosure. Zone 1X has resistive reaches and residual compensation similar to zone 1. The autorecloser in the relay is used to inhibit tripping from zone 1X such that upon reclosure the relay will operate with Basic scheme logic only, to coordinate with downstream protection for permanent faults. Thus, transient faults on the line will be cleared instantaneously, which will reduce the probability of a transient fault becoming permanent. The scheme can, however, operate for some faults on an adjacent line, although this will be followed by autoreclosure with correct protection discrimination. Increased circuit breaker operations would occur, together with transient loss of supply to a substation. The time delays associated with extended zone Z1X are shown in Table 2 below: Scenario
Z1X Time Delay
First fault trip
= tZ1
Fault trip for persistent fault on autoreclose
= tZ2
TABLE 2 - TRIP TIME DELAYS ASSOCIATED WITH ZONE 1X The Zone 1 Extension scheme is selected by setting the Z1X Enable bit in the Zone Status function links to 1.
FIGURE 12 – SETTINGS IN MiCOM S1 (GROUP1\DISTANCE SCHEME\ZONE STATUS)
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Remark:
Page 37/220
To enable the Z1X logic, the DDB "Z1X extension" cell must be linked in the PSL (opto/reclaim time…)
FIGURE 13 - DISTANCE SCHEME WITHOUT CARRIER & Z1 EXTENDED
Z1' T1
&
INP_Z1EXT
None
&
&
>1
Z1x' Z1X channel fail
&
T2 Z2'
&
PDist_Trip
≥1
UNB_Alarm Z3' T3
&
Zp' Tzp
&
Z4' T4
& P0478ENa
FIGURE 14 – Z1X TRIP LOGIC (Z1X can be used as well as the default scheme logic in case of UNB _Alarm-carrier out of service (See unblocking logic – section 2.9.4)) 2.8.4.1
Inputs Data Type
Description
None
Configuration
No distance scheme (basic scheme)
INP_Z1EXT
Digital input
Input for Z1 extended
Z1x channel fail
Configuration
Z1X extension enabled on channel fail (UNB-CR. see Mode loss of guard or Loss of carrier)
UNB_Alarm
Internal logic
(See Unblocking logic)
Z1x’
Internal logic
Z1X Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
Z1’
Internal logic
Z1 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
Z2’
Internal logic
Z2 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
Z3’
Internal logic
Z3 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 38/220
2.8.4.2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Data Type
Description
Zp’
Internal logic
Zp Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
Z4’
Internal logic
Z4 Decision (lock out by Power Swing)
T1
Internal logic
Elapse of distance timer 1
T2
Internal logic
Elapse of distance timer 2
T3
Internal logic
Elapse of distance timer 3
Tzp
Internal logic
Elapse of distance timer p
T4
Internal logic
Elapse of distance timer 4
Data Type
Description
Internal logic
Trip order by Distance Protection
Outputs
PDist_Dec 2.8.5
Loss of Load Accelerated Tripping (LoL) The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in Figure 15. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase. The scheme has the advantage of not requiring a signalling channel. Alternatively, the logic can be chosen to be enabled when the channel associated with an aided scheme has failed. This failure is detected by permissive scheme unblocking logic, or a Channel Out of Service (COS) opto input. Any fault located within the reach of Zone 1 will result in fast tripping of the local circuit breaker. For an end zone fault with remote infeed, the remote breaker will be tripped in Zone 1 by the remote relay and the local relay can recognise this by detecting the loss of load current in the healthy phases. This, coupled with operation of a Zone 2 comparator causes tripping of the local circuit breaker. Before an accelerated trip can occur, load current must have been detected prior to the fault. The loss of load current opens a window during which time a trip will occur if a Zone 2 comparator operates. A typical setting for this window is 40ms as shown in Figure 15, although this can be altered in the menu LoL: Window cell. The accelerated trip is delayed by 18ms to prevent initiation of a loss of load trip due to circuit breaker pole discrepancy occurring for clearance of an external fault. The local fault clearance time can be deduced as follows : t
=
Z1d + 2CB + LDr + 18ms
Z1d
=
maximum downstream zone 1 trip time
CB
=
Breaker operating time
LDr
=
Upstream level detector (LoL: I 5% In during 20 ms (to avoid any maloperation due to unstable contact during reclosing order), an instantaneous trip order is issued.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 64/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The logic diagram for this, and other modes of TOR/SOTF protection is shown in Figure 37:
Va >
&
T
Ia <
0
&
0
&
0
&
TOC A
20 ms
Vb >
&
T
Ib <
TOC B
20 ms
Vc >
&
Ic <
T TOC C
20 ms
SOTF LD Enable
LD Enable
SOTF All Zones Enable
&
All Zones SOTF Z1 Enable
&
≥1
Z1
& &
SOTF Z1 + rev Enable
Zp &
Z4
1
Zp Reverse
&
&
SOTF Z2 + rev Enable
Z1+Z2 SOTF Z2 Enable SOTF Z3 Enable
& ≥1
SOTF/TOR trip
&
Z1+Z2+Z3 PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3
SOTF Enable TOR Z1 Enable
&
Z1 TOR Z2 Enable
&
Z1+Z2 TOR Z3 Enable
& Z1+Z2+Z3 TOR All Zones Enable
≥1
& &
All Zones Dist. Scheme Enable
&
Dist Trip
TOR Enable P0486ENa
FIGURE 37 - SWITCH ON TO FAULT AND TRIP ON RECLOSE LOGIC DIAGRAM
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.12.5
2.12.5.1
2.12.5.2
Page 65/220
Setting Guidelines •
When the overcurrent option is enabled, the I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. Setting guidelines for the I>3 element are shown in more detail in Table below.
•
When a Zone 1 Extension scheme is used along with autoreclosure, it must be ensured that only Zone 1 distance protection can trip instantaneously for TOR. Typically, TOR-SOTF Mode bit 0 only would be set to “1”. Also the I>3 element must be disabled to avoid overreaching trips by level detectors.
Inputs Data Type
Description
Ia, Vc>
Internal Logic
Live Voltage detected ( V Live Line threshold, fixed at 70% Vn)
Valid_stx_PHOC
Configuration
Threshold I>3 must be activated
PHOC_Start_3Ph_I>3
Internal Logic
Detection by I>3 overcurrents (not filtered by INRUSH.)
Z1, Z2, Z3, all zones
Internal Logic
Zones Detected
Data Type
Description
TOC_A
Internal Logic
Trip phase A by TOR /SOTF
TOC_B
Internal Logic
Trip phase B by TOR /SOTF
TOC_C
Internal Logic
Trip phase C by TOR /SOTF
SOTF/TOR trip
Internal Logic
Trip by SOTF (manual close) or TOR (AR close) logic
Outputs
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 66/220 2.12.6
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Inputs /Outputs in SOTF-TOR DDB Logic See also, DDB description in appendix of the same section.
2.12.6.1
Inputs
Man Close CB Digital input (opto) 6 is assigned by default PSL to "Man Close CB" The DDB Man Close CB if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will initiate the internal SOTF logic enable (see Figure 35) without CB control. If CB control is activated managed by CB control)
SOTF will be enable by internal detection (CB closing order
AR Reclaim The DDB AR Reclaim if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will start the internal logic TOR enable (see Figure 35).- (External AR logic applied).
CB aux A CB aux B CB aux C The DDB CB Aux if assigned to an opto input in PSL and when energized, will be used for Any pole dead & All pole dead internal detection 2.12.6.2
Outputs
SOTF Enable The DDB SOTF Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that SOTF logic is enabled in the relay – see logic description in Figure 37
TOR Enable The DDB TOR Enable if assigned in PSL, indicates that TOR logic is activated in the relay see logic description in Figure 37
TOC Start A The DDB TOC Start A if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase A issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
TOC Start B The DDB TOC Start B if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase B issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
TOC Start C The DDB TOC Start C if assigned in PSL, indicates a Tripping order on phase C issued by the SOTF levels detectors - see Figure 37
Any Pole Dead The DDB Any Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates that at least one pole is opened
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 67/220
All Pole Dead The DDB All Pole Dead if assigned in PSL, indicates all pole are dead (All 3 poles are opened)
SOTF/TOR Trip The DDB SOTF/TOR Trip if assigned in PSL, indicates a 3poles trip by TOR or SOTF logic see Figure 37 2.13
Power swing blocking (PSB) Power swings are oscillations in power flow which can follow a power system disturbance. They can be caused by sudden removal of faults, loss of synchronism across a power system or changes in direction of power flow as a result of switching. Such disturbances can cause generators on the system to accelerate or decelerate to adapt to new power flow conditions, which in turn leads to power swinging. A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics. In the case of a stable power swing it is important that the relay should not trip. The relay should also not trip during loss of stability since there may be a utility strategy for controlled system break up during such an event. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
GROUP 1 POWER SWING Delta R
0.5/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
Delta X
0.5/In Ω
0
400/In Ω
0.01/In Ω
IN > Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
IN > (% Imax)
40%
10%
I2 > Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
I2 > (% Imax)
30%
10%
Imax line > Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
Imax line >
3 x In
1 x In
20 x In
0.01 x In
Unblocking Time delay
30s
0
30s
0.1s
Blocking Zones
00000000
Bit 0: Z1/Z1X Block, Bit 1: Z2 Block, Bit 2: Z3 Block, Bit 3: Zp Block.
100%
100%
1%
1%
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 68/220 2.13.1
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The Power Swing Blocking Element PSB can be disabled on distribution systems, where power swings would not normally be experienced. Operation of the PSB element is menu selectable to block the operation of any or all of the distance zones (including aided trip logic) or to provide indication of the swing only. The Blocked Zones function links are set to 1 to block zone tripping, or set to 0 to allow tripping as normal. Power swing detection uses a ∆R (resistive) and ∆X (reactive) impedance band which surrounds the entire phase fault trip characteristic. This band is shown in Figure 38 below:
∆X Zone 3
∆R
∆R
Power swing bundary
Zone 4 ∆X P3068ENa
FIGURE 38 - POWER SWING DETECTION CHARACTERISTICS
FIGURE 39 - POWER SWING SETTINGS (SET HIGHZONE IS LOCKED OUT)
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 69/220
A fault on the system results in the measured impedance rapidly crossing the ∆R band, en route to a tripping zone. Power swings follow a much slower impedance locus. A power swing is detected where all three phase-phase measured impedances have remained within the ∆R band for at least 5ms, and have taken longer than 5ms to reach the trip characteristic (the trip characteristic boundary is defined by zones 3 and 4). PSB is indicated on reaching zone 3 or zone 4. Typically, the ∆R and ∆X band settings are both set with: 0.032 x ∆f x Rmin load. NOTE: 2.13.2
∆f = Power swing frequency
Unblocking of the Relay for Faults During Power Swings The relay can operate normally for any fault occurring during a power swing, as there are three selectable conditions which can unblock the relay: A biased residual current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for earth faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: Ir> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the residual current threshold is: IN
>
0.1 In + ( (IN> / 100) . (I maximum) ).
A biased negative sequence current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for phasephase faults occurring during a power swing. The bias is set as: I2> (as a percentage of the highest measured current on any phase), with the threshold always subject to a minimum of 0.1 x In. Thus the negative sequence current threshold is: I2
>
0.1 In + ( (I2> / 100) . (I maximum) ).
A phase current threshold is exceeded - this allows tripping for three-phase faults occurring during a power swing. The threshold is set as: Imax line> (in A).
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 70/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
AnyPoleDead
≥1
Loop AN detected in PS bundary
S
≥1
∆t
Q R
&
≥2
S Q
PS loop AN
R
Loop BN detected in PS bundary
≥1
S
≥1
≥1
&
Tunb
∆t
Q R
S Q
PS loop BN
R
Tunb
≥1
Loop CN detected in PS bundary
S
≥1
∆t
Q R
&
≥1
S
S Q
PS loop CN
Q
R
R
Power Swing Detection
Tunb
Inrush AN Inrush BN Inrush CN
≥1
Fault clear Healthy Network All Pole Dead & /Fuse Failure confirmed PS disabled
Iphase>(Imax line>)
S Q
Unblocking Imax disabled
IN> threshold
R
∆ Tunblk
S Q
Unblocking IN disabled
I2> threshold
S
≥1
R
Q
≥1
∆Tunblk
Power Swing unblocking
R
S Q
Unblocking I2> disabled
R P0488ENa
FIGURE 40 – POWER SWING DETECTION & UNBLOCKING LOGIC
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 71/220 Z1x
&
Z1x'
Unblock Z1
≥1 &
Z1 Power Swing Detection Unblocking Power Swing
Unblock Z2
≥1
≥1 &
Z1'
Z2'
Z2 Unblock Z3
≥1 &
Z3'
Z3
Zp_Fwd
≥1 &
&
Zp'
Unblock Zp Zp P0489ENa
FIGURE 41 - DISTANCE PROTECTION BLOCK/UNBLOCKING LOGIC Data Type
Description
∆R
Configuration
0.1/In to 250/In by step 0.01/In
∆X
Configuration
0.1/In to 250/In by step de 0.01/In
∆Tunbk
Configuration
0 to 60 s by step de 1 s.
Imax>
Configuration
1 to 20 In by step de 0.01
IN>
Configuration
0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax>
I2>
Configuration
0.1In + 10 to 100 % of Imax>
Unblock Z1
Configuration
0 => Z1 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z1 unblocked during PSwing
Unblock Z2
Configuration
0 => Z2 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z2 unblocked during PSwing
Unblock Z3
Configuration
0 => Z3 blocked during PSwing 1 => Z3 unblocked during PSwing
Unblock Zp
Configuration
0 => Zp blocked during PSwing 1 => Zp unblocked during PSwing
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 72/220 2.13.3
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Typical Current Settings The three current thresholds must be set above the maximum expected residual current unbalance, the maximum negative sequence unbalance, and the maximum expected power swing current. Generally, the power swing current will not exceed 2.In. Typical setting limits are given in Table 7 and Table 8 below: Parameter
Minimum Setting (to avoid maloperation for asymmetry in power swing currents)
Maximum Setting (to ensure unblocking for line faults)
Typical Setting
IN>
> 30%
< 100%
40%
I2>
> 10%
< 50%
30%
TABLE 7 - BIAS THRESHOLDS TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS Parameter
Minimum Setting
Maximum Setting
Imax line>
1.2 x (maximum power swing current)
0.8 x (minimum phase fault current level)
TABLE 8 - PHASE CURRENT THRESHOLD TO UNBLOCK PSB FOR LINE FAULTS 2.13.4
Removal of PSB to Allow Tripping for Prolonged Power Swings It is possible to limit the time for which blocking of any distance protection zones is applied. Thus, certain locations on the power system can be designated as split points, where circuit breakers will trip three pole should a power swing fail to stabilise. Power swing blocking is automatically removed after the Unblocking Delay with typical settings:
2.14
−
30s if a near permanent block is required;
−
2s if unblocking is required to split the system.
Directional and non-directional overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection included in the P441, P442 and P444 relays provides two stage non-directional / directional three phase overcurrent protection and two non directional stages (I>3 and I>4), with independent time delay characteristics. One or more stages may be enabled, in order to complement the relay distance protection. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the four stages. The first two stages of overcurrent protection, I>1 and I>2 have time delayed characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), or definite time (DT). The third and fourth overcurrent stages can be set as follows: I>3 - The third element is fixed as non-directional, for instantaneous or definite time delayed tripping. This element can be permanently enabled, or enabled only for Switch on to Fault (SOTF) or Trip on Reclose (TOR). It is also used to detect close-up faults (in SOTF/TOR tripping logic no timer is applied). I>4 - The fourth element is only used for stub bus protection, where it is fixed as nondirectional, and only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. All the stages trip three-phase only. (Could be used for back up protection during a VTS logic) The following Table shows the relay menu for overcurrent protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Note that all tripping via overcurrent protection is three pole.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Menu text
Page 73/220 Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
I>1 Direction
Directional Fwd
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
I>1 VTS Block
Non-Directional
Block, Non-Directional
I>1 Current Set
1.5 x In
0.08 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
I>1 Time Delay
1s
0
100s
0.01s
I>1 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
100s
0.01s
I>1 TMS
1
0.025
1.2
0.025
I>1 Time Dial
7
0.5
15
0.1
I>1 Reset Char
DT
DT or Inverse
I>1 tRESET
0
0
100s
0.01s
I>2 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
I>2 Direction
Non Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
I>2 VTS Block
Non-Directional
Block, Non-Directional
I>2 Current Set
2 x In
0.08 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
I>2 Time Delay
2s
0
100s
0.01s
I>2 Time Delay VTS
2s
0
100s
0.01s
I>2 TMS
1
0.025
1.2
0.025
I>2 Time Dial
7
0.5
15
0.1
I>2 Reset Char
DT
DT or Inverse
I>2 tRESET
0
0
100s
0.01s
I>3 Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
I>3 Current Set
3 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01xIn
I>3 Time Delay
3s
0s
100s
0.01s
I>4 Status
Disabled
Disabled or Enabled
I>4 Current Set
4 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01xIn
I>4 Time Delay
4s
0s
100s
0.01s
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 74/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The inverse time delayed characteristics listed above, comply with the following formula: K t=T× + L α (I/Is) –1 Where: t
=
operation time
K
=
constant
I
=
measured current
Is
=
current threshold setting
α
=
constant
L
=
ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)
T
=
Time multiplier Setting
Curve description
Standard
K constant
α constant
L constant
Standard Inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
0
Very Inverse
IEC
13.5
1
0
Extremely Inverse
IEC
80
2
0
Long Time Inverse
UK
120
1
0
Moderately Inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.0114
Very Inverse
IEEE
19.61
2
0.491
Extremely Inverse
IEEE
28.2
2
0.1217
Inverse
US
5.95
2
0.18
Short Time Inverse
US
0.02394
0.02
0.1694
Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves. Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but the scaling of the time dial is 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the I> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.14.1
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 75/220
Application of Timer Hold Facility The first two stages of overcurrent protection in the P441, P442 and P444 relays are provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite time value. (Note that if an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either definite or inverse time in cell I>1 Reset Char; otherwise this setting cell is not visible in the menu). Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when grading with upstream electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time delays. Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is possible that the fault energy melts and reseals the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault. This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent. When the reset time of the overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay may not trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time. Note that the timer hold facility should not be used where high speed autoreclose with short dead times are set. The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as settings I>1 tRESET and I>2 tRESET. Note that this cell is not visible if an inverse time reset characteristic has been selected, as the reset time is then determined by the programmed time dial setting.
2.14.2
Directional Overcurrent Protection If fault current can flow in both directions through a relay location, it is necessary to add directional control to the overcurrent relays in order to obtain correct discrimination. Typical systems which require such protection are parallel feeders and ring main systems. Where I>1 or I>2 stages are directionalised, no characteristic angle needs to be set as the relay uses the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones (fixed superimposed power technique).
2.14.3
Time Delay VTS Should the Voltage Transformer Supervision function detect an ac voltage input failure to the relay, such as due to a VT fuse blow, this will affect operation of voltage dependent protection elements. Distance protection will not be able to make a forward or reverse decision, and so will be blocked. As the I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements in the relay use the same directionalising technique as for the distance zones, any directional zones would be unable to trip. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an I> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the I>1 and I>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay.
2.14.4
Setting Guidelines I>1 and I>2 Overcurrent Protection When applying the overcurrent or directional overcurrent protection provided in the P441, P442 and P444 relays, standard principles should be applied in calculating the necessary current and time settings for co-ordination. For more detailed information regarding overcurrent relay co-ordination, reference should be made to AREVA’s ‘Protective relay Application Guide’ - Chapter 9. In general, where overcurrent elements are set, these should also be set to time discriminate with downstream and reverse distance protection. The I>1 and I>2 elements are continuously active. However tripping is blocked if the distance protection function starts. An example is shown in Figure 42.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 76/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Time I>1
I>2
Z3,tZ3
Z4, tZ4
Zp,tZp Z2,tZ2
Reverse
Forward
Z1,tZ1
P3069ENa
FIGURE 42 - TIME GRADING OVERCURRENT PROTECTION WITH DISTANCE PROTECTION (DT EXAMPLE) I>1 and I>2 Time Delay VTS The I>1 and I>2 overcurrent elements should be set to mimic operation of distance protection during VTS pickup. This requires I>1 and I>2 current settings to be calculated to approximate to distance zone reaches, although operating non-directional. If fast protection is the main priority then a time delay of zero or equal to tZ2 could be used. If parallel current-based main protection is used alongside the relay, and protection discrimination remains the priority, then a DT setting greater than that for the distance zones should be used. An example is shown in Figure 43.
I phase
I 1> Trip I 2> No trip t tI1>
tI2>
P0483ENa
FIGURE 43 - TRIPPING LOGIC FOR PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I>3 Highset Overcurrent and Switch on to Fault Protection The I>3 overcurrent element of the P441, P442 and P444 relays can be Enabled as an instantaneous highset just during the TOR/SOTF period. After this period has ended, the element remains in service with a trip time delay setting I>3 Time Delay. This element would trip for close-up high current faults, such as those where maintenance earth clamps are inadvertently left in position on line energisation. The I>3 current setting applied should be above load current, and > 35% of peak magnetising inrush current for any connected transformers as this element has no second harmonic blocking. If a high current setting is chosen, such that the I>3 element will not overreach the protected line, then the I>3 Time Delay can be set to zero. It should also be verified that the remote source is not sufficiently strong to cause element pickup for a closeup reverse fault.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 77/220
If a low current setting is chosen, I>3 will need to discriminate with local and remote distance protection. This principle is shown in Table 9. I>3 Current Setting
Instantaneous Function After TOR/SOTF Function TOR/SOTF Period
Above load and inrush current but LOW
Yes - sensitive.
Yes - may detect HIGH, ≥ 120% of max. fault current for a fault at high current closethe remote line terminal up faults. and max. reverse fault current
Time Delay Required
Time delayed backup Longer than tZ3 to protection. grade with distance protection. Instantaneous highset to detect close-up faults.
I>3 Time Delay = 0. (Note #.)
TABLE 9 - CURRENT AND TIME DELAY SETTINGS FOR THE I>3 ELEMENT Key: As the instantaneous highset trips three pole it is recommended that the I>3 Time Delay is set ≥ tZ2 in single pole tripping schemes, to allow operation of the correct single pole autoreclose cycle. I>4 Stub Bus Protection When the protected line is switched from a breaker and a half arrangement it is possible to use the I>4 overcurrent element to provide stub bus protection. When stub bus protection is selected in the relay menu, the element is only enabled when the opto-input Stub Bus Isolator Open (Stub Bus Enable) is energised. Thus, a set of 52b auxiliary contacts (closed when the isolator is open) are required.
I>4 Element: Stub Bus Protection Busbar 1 VT
V=0 Protection's blocking using VTs I>0
Open isolator
Stub Bus Protection : I >4
Busbar 2 P0536ENa
Although this element would not need to discriminate with load current, it is still common practice to apply a high current setting. This avoids maloperation for heavy through fault currents, where mismatched CT saturation could present a spill current to the relay. The I>4 element would normally be set instantaneous, t>4 = 0s.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 78/220 2.15
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) When applying traditional phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set higher than maximum load current, thereby limiting the element’s sensitivity. Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current of some magnitude. Thus, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can operate for both phase-to-phase and phase to earth faults. The following section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to alleviate some less common application difficulties. •
Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements give greater sensitivity to resistive phase-to-phase faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
•
In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault relay due to the system configuration. For example, an earth fault relay applied on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the transformer configuration. Therefore, an negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be employed to provide timedelayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults downstream.
•
Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, loss of a fuse produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating effects of negative phase sequence current and hence an upstream negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be applied to provide back-up protection for dedicated motor protection relays.
•
It may be required to simply alarm for the presence of negative phase sequence currents on the system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the unbalance.
The negative phase sequence overcurrent element has a current pick up setting ‘I2> Current Set’, and is time delayed in operation by the adjustable timer ‘I2> Time Delay’. The user may choose to directionalise operation of the element, for either forward or reverse fault protection for which a suitable relay characteristic angle may be set. Alternatively, the element may be set as non-directional. 2.15.1
Setting Guidelines The relay menu for the negative sequence overcurrent element is shown below: NEG SEQ O/C
Default
Min
Max
Step
I2> Status
Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
I2> Directional
Non-Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
I2> VTS
Non-Directionel
Block, Non-Directional
I2> Current Set
0.2In
0.08In
4In
0.01In
I2> Time Delay
10s
0s
100s
0.01s
I2> Char Angle
–45°
–95°
+95°
1°
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 2.15.2
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 79/220
Negative phase sequence current threshold, ‘I2> Current Set’ The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and setting at least 20% above this figure. Where the negative phase sequence element is required to operate for specific uncleared asymmetric faults, a precise threshold setting would have to be based upon an individual fault analysis for that particular system due to the complexities involved. However, to ensure operation of the protection, the current pick-up setting must be set approximately 20% below the lowest calculated negative phase sequence fault current contribution to a specific remote fault condition. Note that in practice, if the required fault study information is unavailable, the setting must adhere to the minimum threshold previously outlined, employing a suitable time delay for coordination with downstream devices. This is vital to prevent unnecessary interruption of the supply resulting from inadvertent operation of this element.
2.15.3
Time Delay for the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element, ‘I2> Time Delay’ As stated above, correct setting of the time delay for this function is vital. It should also be noted that this element is applied primarily to provide back-up protection to other protective devices or to provide an alarm. Hence, in practice, it would be associated with a long time delay. It must be ensured that the time delay is set greater than the operating time of any other protective device (at minimum fault level) on the system which may respond to unbalanced faults, such as:
2.15.4
•
Phase overcurrent elements
•
Earth fault elements
•
Broken conductor elements
•
Negative phase sequence influenced thermal elements
Directionalising the Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Element Where negative phase sequence current may flow in either direction through a relay location, such as parallel lines or ring main systems, directional control of the element should be employed. Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction. A suitable relay characteristic angle setting (I2> Char Angle) is chosen to provide optimum performance. This setting should be set equal to the phase angle of the negative sequence current with respect to the inverted negative sequence voltage (- V2), in order to be at the centre of the directional characteristic. The angle that occurs between V2 and I2 under fault conditions is directly dependent upon the negative sequence source impedance of the system. However, typical settings for the element are as follows: •
For a transmission system the RCA should be set equal to -60°
•
For a distribution system the RCA should be set equal to -45°
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 80/220 2.16
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Broken conductor detection The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers. Alternatively, they may arise from other causes such as birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage to cables etc. Such faults result in an appreciable increase in current and hence in the majority of applications are easily detectable. Another type of unbalanced fault which can occur on the system is the series or open circuit fault. These can arise from broken conductors, maloperation of single phase switchgear, or the operation of fuses. Series faults will not cause an increase in phase current on the system and hence are not readily detectable by standard overcurrent relays. However, they will produce an unbalance and a resultant level of negative phase sequence current, which can be detected. It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent relay to detect the above condition. However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state unbalance arising from CT errors, load unbalance etc. A negative sequence element therefore would not operate at low load levels. The relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be achieved.
2.16.1
Setting Guidelines The sequence network connection diagram for an open circuit fault is detailed in Figure 1. From this, it can be seen that when a conductor open circuit occurs, current from the positive sequence network will be series injected into the negative and zero sequence networks across the break. In the case of a single point earthed power system, there will be little zero sequence current flow and the ratio of I2/I1 that flows in the protected circuit will approach 100%. In the case of a multiple earthed power system (assuming equal impedances in each sequence network), the ratio I2/I1 will be 50%. It is possible to calculate the ratio of I2/I1 that will occur for varying system impedances, by referring to the following equations:E (Z + Z )
I1F = Z Z +g Z 2Z + 0Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 –E Z
I2F = Z Z + Z Zg 0+ Z Z 1 2 1 0 2 0 Where: Eg
=
System Voltage
Z0
=
Zero sequence impedance
Z1
=
Positive sequence impedance
Z2
=
Negative sequence impedance
Therefore:
I2F Z0 = I1F Z0 + Z2
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 81/220
It follows that, for an open circuit in a particular part of the system, I2/I1 can be determined from the ratio of zero sequence to negative sequence impedance. It must be noted however, that this ratio may vary depending upon the fault location. It is desirable therefore to apply as sensitive a setting as possible. In practice, this minimum setting is governed by the levels of standing negative phase sequence current present on the system. This can be determined from a system study, or by making use of the relay measurement facilities at the commissioning stage. If the latter method is adopted, it is important to take the measurements during maximum system load conditions, to ensure that all single phase loads are accounted for. Note that a minimum value of 8% negative phase sequence current is required for successful relay operation. Since sensitive settings have been employed, it can be expected that the element will operate for any unbalance condition occurring on the system (for example, during a single pole autoreclose cycle). Hence, a long time delay is necessary to ensure co-ordination with other protective devices. A 60 second time delay setting may be typical. The following table shows the relay menu for the Broken Conductor protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor
Enabled
Enabled/Disabled
N/A
I2/I1
0.2
0.2
1
0.01
I2/I1 Time Delay
60
0s
100s
1s
I2/I1 Trip
Disabled*
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
* If disabled, only a Broken Conductor Alarm is possible. 2.16.2
Example Setting The following information was recorded by the relay during commissioning; Ifull load = 1000A I2 = 100A therefore the quiescent I2/I1 ratio is given by; I2/I1 = 100/1000 = 0.05 To allow for tolerances and load variations a setting of 200% of this value may be typical: Therefore set I2/I1 = 0.2 Set I2/I1 Time Delay = 60s to allow adequate time for short circuit fault clearance by time delayed protections.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 82/220 2.17
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Directional and non-directional earth fault protection Three elements of earth fault protection are available, as follows: •
IN> element
-
Channel aided directional earth fault protection;
•
IN>1 element
-
Directional or non-directional protection, definite time (DT) or IDMT time-delayed.
•
IN>2 element
-
Directional or non-directional, DT delayed.
The IN> element may only be used as part of a channel-aided scheme, and is fully described in the Aided DEF section of the Application Notes which follow. The IN>1 and IN>2 backup elements always trip three pole, and have an optional timer hold facility on reset, as per the phase fault elements. (The IN> element can be selected to trip single and/or three pole). All Earth Fault overcurrent elements operate from a residual current quantity which is derived internally from the summation of the three phase currents. The following table shows the relay menu for the Earth Fault protection, including the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function
DT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
IN>1 Directional
Directional Fwd
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>1 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>1 Current Set
0.2 x In
0.08 x In
4.0 x In
0.01 x In
IN>1 Time Delay
1s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>1 Time Delay VTS
0.2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>1 TMS
1
0.025
1.2
0.025
IN>1 Time Dial
7
0.5
15
0.1
IN>1 Reset Char
DT
DT or Inverse
IN>1 tRESET
0
0
100s
0.01s
IN>2 Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
IN>2 Directional
Non Directional
Non-Directional, Directional Fwd, Directional Rev
IN>2 VTS Block
Non directional
Block or Non directional
IN>2 Current Set
0.3 x In
0.08 x In
32 x In
0.01 x In
IN>2 Time Delay
2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN>2 Time Delay VTS
2s
0
200s
0.01s
IN> Char Angle
–45°
–95°
95°
1°
Polarisation
Zero Sequence
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
IN> DIRECTIONAL
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 83/220
Note that the elements are set in terms of residual current, which is three times the magnitude of zero sequence current (Ires = 3I0). The IDMT time delay characteristics available for the IN>1 element, and the grading principles used will be as per the phase fault overcurrent elements. To maintain protection during periods of VTS detected failure, the relay allows an IN> Time Delay VTS to be applied to the IN>1 and IN>2 elements. On VTS pickup, both elements are forced to have non-directional operation, and are subject to their revised definite time delay.
V2 I2 VN
Negative sequence Polarisation Residual zero sequence Polarisation
Directional Calculation
SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev
IN IN
IN>
IN> Pick-up
IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking
IDMT/DT
IN> Trip
&
Any Pole Dead IN> Timer Block
IN> Pick-up CTS Blocking
&
Any Pole Dead
&
IN> Timer Block SBEF Fwd SBEF Rev MCB/VTS Line
IDMT/DT
Directionnal Check
&
>1
&
IN> Trip
IN> TD VTS
0
FIGURE 44 - SBEF CALCULATION & LOGIC
P0490ENa
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 84/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
CTS Block
SBEF Start
SBEF Overcurrent SBEF IDMT/DT Trip
SBEF Trip
SBEF Timer Block P0484ENa
FIGURE 45 - LOGIC WITHOUT DIRECTIONALITY CTS Block SBEF Overcurrent
SBEF Start
Slow VTS Block
Directional Check
Vx > Vs Ix > Is IDMT/DT SBEF Trip SBEF Timer Block P0533ENa
FIGURE 46 - LOGIC WITH DIRECTIONALITY 2.17.1
Directional Earth Fault Protection (DEF) The method of directional polarising selected is common to all directional earth fault elements, including the channel-aided element. There are two options available in the relay menu: •
Zero sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the residual current with respect to the inverted residual voltage: (–Vres = –(Va + Vb + Vc)) derived by the relay.
•
Negative sequence polarising - The relay performs a directional decision by comparing the phase angle of the derived negative sequence current with respect to the derived negative sequence voltage. NOTE:
2.17.2
Even though the directional decision is based on the phase relationship of I2 with respect to V2, the operating current quantity for DEF elements remains the derived residual current.
Application of Zero Sequence Polarising This is the conventional option, applied where there is not significant mutual coupling with a parallel line, and where the power system is not solidly earthed close to the relay location. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarise DEF elements. The relay internally derives this voltage from the 3 phase voltage input which must be supplied from either a 5-limb or three single phase VT’s. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore incompatible with the use of zero sequence polarising. The required characteristic angle settings for DEF will differ depending on the application. Typical characteristic angle settings are as follows: •
Resistance earthed systems generally use a 0° RCA setting. This means that for a forward earth fault, the residual current is expected to be approximately in phase with the inverted residual voltage (-Vres).
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
2.17.3
Page 85/220
•
When protecting solidly-earthed distribution systems or cable feeders, a -45° RCA setting should be set.
•
When protecting solidly-earthed transmission systems, a -60° RCA setting should be set.
Application of Negative Sequence Polarising In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarisation of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic. An example of the former case would be where a suitable type of VT was unavailable, for example if only a three limb VT were fitted. An example of the latter case would be an HV/EHV parallel line application where problems with zero sequence mutual coupling may exist. In either of these situations, the problem may be solved by the use of negative phase sequence (nps) quantities for polarisation. This method determines the fault direction by comparison of nps voltage with nps current. The operate quantity, however, is still residual current. When negative sequence polarising is used, the relay requires that the Characteristic Angle is set. The Application Notes section for the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection better describes how the angle is calculated - typically set at - 45° (I2 lags (-V2)).
2.18
Aided DEF protection schemes The option of using separate channels for DEF aided tripping, and distance protection schemes, is offered in the P441, P442 and P444 relays. When a separate channel for DEF is used, the above DEF schemes are independently selectable. When a common signalling channel is employed, the distance and DEF must Share a common scheme. In this case a permissive overreach or blocking distance scheme must be used. The aided tripping schemes can perform single pole tripping. The relay has aided scheme settings as shown in the following table: Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 AIDED D.E.F. Aided DEF Status
Enabled
Disabled or Enabled
Polarisation
Zero Sequence
Zero Sequence or Negative Sequence
V> Voltage Set
1V
0.5V
20V
0.01V
IN Forward
0.1 x In
0.05 x In
4 x In
0.01 x In
Time Delay
0
0
10s
0.1s
Scheme Logic
Shared
Shared, Blocking or Permissive
Tripping
Three Phase
Three Phase or Single Phase
FIGURE 47 - MiCOM S1 SETTINGS
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 86/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Opto label 01
DIST. CR
DIST CS
Relay Label 01
Opto Label 02
DEF. CR
DEF CS
Relay Label 02 P0534ENa
FIGURE 48 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH AN INDEPENDANT CHANNEL Opto label 01
DIST. CR
DIST CS
DEF. CR
DEF CS
Relay label 01
>1
P0544ENa
FIGURE 49 - PSL REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE DEF LOGIC WITH SHARED CHANNEL V2 I2 VN
Negative Polarisation Residual Polarisation
Directionnal Calculation
DEF Fwd DEF Rev
IN V2
Negative Polarisation
VN
Residual Polarisation
IN
V>
IN> INRev = 0.6*INFwd
DEF V>
INRev> INFwd> P0545ENa
FIGURE 50 - DEF CALCULATION NOTE: 2.18.1
The DEF is blocked in case of VTS or CTS
Polarising the Directional Decision The relative advantages of zero sequence and negative sequence polarising are outlined on the previous page. Note how the polarising chosen for aided DEF is independent of that chosen for backup earth fault elements. The relay has a V> threshold which defines the minimum residual voltage required to enable an aided DEF directional decision to be made. A residual voltage measured below this setting would block the directional decision, and hence there would be no tripping from the scheme. The V> threshold is set above the standing residual voltage on the protected system, to avoid operation for typical power system imbalance and voltage transformer errors. In practice, the typical zero sequence voltage on a healthy system can be as high as 1% (ie: 3% residual), and the VT error could be 1% per phase. This could equate to an overall error of up to 5% of phase-neutral voltage, although a setting between 2% and 4% is typical. On high resistance earthed and insulated neutral systems the settings might need to be as high as 10% or 20% of phase-neutral voltage, respectively. When negative sequence polarising is set, the V> threshold becomes a V2> negative sequence voltage detector. The characteristic angle for aided DEF protection is fixed at –14°, suitable for protecting all solidly-earthed and resistance earthed systems.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 87/220
X
FWD
FWD
R -14˚ REV
REV P0491ENa
2.18.2
Aided DEF Permissive Overreach Scheme
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block
&
Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead
DEF CS
0 150 ms
IN Rev>
&
T
DEF Trip
0
t_delay
UNB CR DEF P0546ENa
FIGURE 51 - INDEPENDANT CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> DEF Timer Block
&
Reversal Guard Any Pole Dead Any DIST Start IN Rev>
>1
DEF CS
0 150 ms
&
DEF Trip
T 0
t_delay
UNB CR DEF
P0547ENa
FIGURE 52 - SHARED CHANNEL – PERMISSIVE SCHEME This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 53 shows the element reaches, and Figure 54 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the forward IN> DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay has also detected a forward fault, then it will operate with no additional delay upon receipt of this signal. Send logic:
IN> Forward pickup
Permissive trip logic:
IN> Forward plus Channel Received.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 88/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 IN> Fwd (A) ZL A
B
IN> Fwd (B) P3070ENa
FIGURE 53 - THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME
FIGURE 54 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF PERMISSIVE SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element, noting that the Time Delay for a permissive scheme aided trip would normally be set to zero. 2.18.3
Aided DEF Blocking Scheme This scheme is similar to that used in the AREVA LFZP, LFZR, EPAC and PXLN relays. Figure 57 shows the element reaches, and Figure 58 the simplified scheme logic. The signalling channel is keyed from operation of the reverse DEF element of the relay. If the remote relay forward IN> element has picked up, then it will operate after the set Time Delay if no block is received.
DEF Fwd IN Fwd>
Tp
DEF V>
0
Reversal Guard
&
T
IN Rev>
&
DEF Trip
0
t_delay
0
Any Pole Dead
150 ms
DEF Timer Block UNB CR DEF
DEF Rev IN Rev>
&
DEF CS
DEF V> P0548ENa
FIGURE 55 - INDEPENDANT CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 89/220
DEF Fwd IN Fwd> DEF V> Reversal Guard
&
T
IN Rev>
0 Tp
0
t_delay
Any Pole Dead
0
>1
Any DIST Start
150 ms
DEF Timer Block
&
UNB CR DEF
DEF Rev
DEF Trip
&
IN Rev>
DEF CS
DEF V> P0549ENa
FIGURE 56 - SHARED CHANNEL – BLOCKING SCHEME Send logic:
DEF Reverse
Trip logic:
IN> Forward, plus Channel NOT Received, with small set delay. IN> Fwd (A)
IN> Rev (A) ZL A
B
IN> Fwd (B) IN> Rev (B) P0550ENa
FIGURE 57 - THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME
Protection A
Signal Send IN> Reverse
IN>1
t
IN>2
t
&
t
0
0
0
Signal Send IN> Reverse
0 Trip
IN > Forward
Protection B
>1
t
IN>1
t
IN>2
t
&
Trip
>1
0
0
IN> Forward
P0551ENa
FIGURE 58 - LOGIC DIAGRAM FOR THE DEF BLOCKING SCHEME The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where “t” is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used. The recommended Time Delay setting = max. signalling channel operating time + 14ms.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 90/220 2.19
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Undervoltage protection Undervoltage conditions may occur on a power system for a variety of reasons, some of which are outlined below:•
Increased system loading. Generally, some corrective action would be taken by voltage regulating equipment such as AVR’s or On Load Tap Changers, in order to bring the system voltage back to it’s nominal value. If the regulating equipment is unsuccessful in restoring healthy system voltage, then tripping by means of an undervoltage relay will be required following a suitable time delay.
•
Faults occurring on the power system result in a reduction in voltage of the phases involved in the fault. The proportion by which the voltage decreases is directly dependent upon the type of fault, method of system earthing and its location with respect to the relaying point. Consequently, co-ordination with other voltage and current-based protection devices is essential in order to achieve correct discrimination.
This function will be blocked with VTS logic or could be disabled if CB open. Both the under and overvoltage protection functions can be found in the relay menu “Volt Protection”. The following table shows the undervoltage section of this menu along with the available setting ranges and factory defaults. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
GROUP 1 VOLT Protection V< & V> MODE
0
V2 Trip
V< Measur't Mode
Phase-Neutral
Phase-phase or Phase-neutral
V1 Start ON 2147483881 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 23 Event Type: Protection operation
−
Monday 03 November 1998 15:32:52 GMT Fault Recorded 0 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 01 Row: 00 Event Type: Fault record
−
Monday 03 November 1998 15:33:11 GMT Logic Inputs 00000000 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 20 Event Type: Logic input changed state
−
Monday 03 November 1998 15:34:54 GMT Output Contacts 0010000 AREVA : MiCOM Model Number: P441 Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21 Event Type: relay output changed state
As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/- symbol. For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to chapter P44x/EN GC.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 171/220
FIGURE 120 4.10
Disturbance recorder The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second duration. NOTE:
1. Compressed Disturbance Recorder used for Kbus/Modbus/DNP3 reach that typical size value (10.5 sec duration) 2. Uncompressed Disturbance Recorder used for IEC 60870-5/103 could be limited to 2 or 3 secondes.
Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one. The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 24 samples per cycle. Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 172/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
The ‘DISTURBANCE RECORDER’ menu column is shown below: Menu text
Default setting
Setting range
Step size
Min
Max
DISTURB RECORDER Duration
1.5s
0.1s
10.5s
0.01s
Trigger Position
33.3%
0
100%
0.1%
Trigger Mode
Single
Single or Extended
Analog Channel 1
VA
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 2
VB
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 3
VC
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 4
VN
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 5
IA
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 6
IB
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 7
IC
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Analog Channel 8
IN
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC, IN
Digital Inputs 1 to 32
Relays 1 to 14/21 and Opto’s 1 to 8/16
Any of 14 or 21 O/P Contacts or Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs or Internal Digital Signals
Inputs 1 to 32 Trigger
No Trigger except No Trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L Dedicated Trip Relay O/P’s which are set to Trigger L/H
Note The available analogue and digital signals may differ between relay types and models and so the individual courier database in Appendix should be referred to when determining default settings etc. The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the ‘Duration’ and ‘Trigger Position’ cells. ‘Duration’ sets the overall recording time and the ‘Trigger Position’ sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times. If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore the trigger if the ‘Trigger Mode’ has been set to ‘Single’. However, if this has been set to ‘Extended’, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the recording time. As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LED’s etc. The complete list of these signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the ‘Input Trigger’ cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts (e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 173/220
FIGURE 121 Trigger choices:
(Minimum one trigger condition must be present ; for providing Drec file.) It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained in Chapter 6.
(Events or Disturbances can be extracted) This message is displayed if the memory is empty (control in that case the trigger condition):
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 174/220
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
After extraction the Drec file can be displayed by the viewer integrated in MiCOM S1(See Commissioning test section – chap CT)
Click down to select :
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 175/220
5.
NEW ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS – VERSION B1.X
5.1
Maximum of Residual Power Protection – Zero Sequence Power Protection
5.1.1
Function description The aim of protection is to provide the system with selective and autonomous protection against resistive Phase to ground faults. High resistive faults such as vegetation fires cannot be detected by distance protection. When a phase to ground fault occurs, the fault can be considered as a zero-sequence power generator. Zero-sequence voltage is at maximum value at the fault point. Zero-sequence power is, therefore, also at maximum value at the same point. Supposing that zerosequence current is constant, zero-sequence power will decrease along the lines until null value at the source’s neutral points (see below). PB
PA Z os1
Z os2
(1-x).Zol
x . Zol
P3100XXa
With:
Zos1:
Zero-sequence source side 1 impedance of
Zol:
Zero-sequence line impedance
Zos2:
Zero-sequence source side2 impedance of
x:
Distance to the fault From PA Vo
Po 1
1
0,5
0,5
0
0 PA
Fault
PB
P3101ENa
Selective fault clearance of the protection for forward faults is provided by the power measurement combined with a time-delay inversely proportional to the measured power. The protection does not send any trip commands for reverse faults. In compliance with sign conventions (the zero-sequence power flows from the fault towards the sources) and with a mean characteristic angle of the zero-sequence source impedances of the equal to 75°, the measured power is determined by the following formula: Sr = Vrr.m.s x Irr.m.s x cos(ϕ - ϕ0) With:
ϕ:
Phaseshift between Vr and Ir
ϕ0:
255° or – 75°
Vrr.m.s, Irr.m.s:
R.M.S values of the residual voltage and current
The Vr and Ir values are filtered in order to eliminate the effect of the 3rd and 5th harmonics.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 176/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Sr > Po
Fixed Time Delay P3837ENa
3-pole trip is sent out when the residual power threshold “Residual Power" is overshot, after a time-delay "Basis Time Delay" and a IDMT time-delay adjusted by the “K” time delay factor. The basis time-delay is set at a value greater than the 2nd stage time of the distance protection of the concerned feeder if the 3-pole trip is active, or at a value greater than the single-phase cycle time if single-pole autorecloser shots are active. The IDMT time-delay is determined by the following formula: T(s) = K x (Sref/Sr) With:
K:
Adjustable time constant from 0 to 2sec (Time delay factor)
Sref:
Reference residual power at: 10 VA for In = 1A 50 VA for In = 5A
Sr:
Residual power generated by the fault
The following chart shows the adjustment menu for the zero-sequence residual overcurrent protection, the adjustment ranges and the default in-factory adjustments. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
Group1 ZERO-SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status K Time Delay Factor
Activated
Activated / Disabled
N/A
0
0
2
0.2
Basis Time Delay
1sec
0sec
10sec
0.01sec
Residual Current
0.1 x In
0.05 x In
1 x In
0.01 x In
Po threshold
510mVA
300mVA
6.0VA
30.0mVA
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.1.2
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 177/220
Settings & DDB cells assigned to zero sequence power (ZSP) function
DDB cell INPUT associated:
The ZSP TIMER BLOCK cell if assigned to an opto input in a dedicated PSL , Zero Sequence Power function will start, but will not perform a trip command - the associated timer will be blocked DDB cell OUTPUT associated:
The ZSP START cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has started - in the same time, it indicates that the timers associated have started and are running (fixed one first and then IDMT timer)
The ZSP TRIP cell at 1 indicates that the Zero Sequence Power function has performed a trip command (after the start and when associated timers are issued)
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 178/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
5.2
Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT)
5.2.1
Function description This CVT supervision will detect the degradation of one or several capacitors of voltage dividers. It is based on permanent detection of residual voltage. A “CVT fault” signal is sent out, after a time-delay T which can be set at between 0 and 300 seconds, if the conditions are as follows:
Vab(t)
•
The residual voltage is greater than the setting threshold during a delay greater then T
•
The 3 phase-phase voltages have a value greater than 0.4 Un
Vab(t) > 0,8*Vn Vab(t) < 0,4*Vn
Vbc(t)
Vbc(t) > 0,8*Vn
S Q R S Q
Vbc(t) < 0,4*Vn
Vca(t)
Vca(t) > 0,8*Vn Vca(t) < 0,4*Vn
Vr(t)
R S
&T
Q
T
TCTs - Alarm
R
Vr(t) > SVr P3102ENa
FIGURE 122 - BASIC CVT SUPERVISION DIAGRAM The table below shows the CVT supervision settings menu, settings range and the default infactory settings. Menu text
Default setting
Setting range Min
Step size Max
Group1 SUPERVISION CVTS Status CVTS VN> CVTS Time Delay
Activated
Activated / Disabled
N/A
1sec
0.5sec
22sec
0.5
100sec
0sec
300sec
0.01sec
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.2.2
Page 179/220
Settings & DDB cells assigned to Capacitive Voltage Transformers Supervision (CVT) function
FIGURE 123 - FOR ENABLING THE FUNCTION
FIGURE 124 – SETTINGS DDB cell OUTPUT associated:
The CVT ALARM cell at 1 indicates that the residual voltage is greater than the threshold adjusted in the settings, during a delay greater than the timer adjusted in MiCOM S1. That alarm is also included in the general alarm.
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 180/220
6.
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC DEFAULT SETTINGS The relay includes programmable scheme logic (PSL)- one PSL by Group of settings enabled (maximum 4 groups of PSLogic can be assigned in the relay) The purpose of this logic is multi-functional and includes the following: •
Enables the mapping of opto-isolated inputs, relay output contacts and the programmable LED’s.
•
Provides relay output conditioning (delay on pick-up/drop-off, dwell time, latching or self-reset).
•
Fault Recorder start mapping, i.e. which internal signals initiate a fault record.
•
Enables customer specific scheme logic to be generated through the use of the PSL editor inbuilt into the MiCOM S1 support software.
Further information regarding editing and the use of PSL can be found in the MiCOM S1 user manual. The following section details the default settings of the PSL. Note that changes to these defaults can only be carried out using the PSL editor and not via the relay front-plate. 6.1
HOW TO USE PSL Editor? OFF Line method: −
Open first the application free software delivered with the relay : MiCOM S1 (can be also downloaded from the web)
−
Open the PSL Editor part.
−
Open a blancking scheme or a default scheme with the good model number (File\New\Default Scheme or Blanck Scheme)
Selection of type of relay & model number is done in that window (Version software is displayed for compatibility ) – Italian is available with model ?40X? ON Line method: −
Communication with the relay can be started (Device\open connection\address1\pword AAAA) and the PSL activated in the internal logic of the relay can be extracted, displayed, modified and loaded again in the protection.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 −
Page 181/220
Any group from 1 to 4 can be modified (ref of group must be validated before resenting the file from PC to relay)
Before creating a dedicated PSL for covering customized application ; please refer to the DDB description cell by cell (conditions of set & reset) in the table included in the annex A at the end of that technical guide. Some additive cells can be present regarding the type of model used by the software embedded in the relay. Software Version
Model N°
A2.11
04
A3.3
06
A4.5
07
B1.2
09
The type of model used by the relay in the settings or PSL is displayed in the bottom of your screen by that line:
and will inform about the : −
Model number used (last 2 digits:???07??)
−
PSL activated for the logic of Group1
−
Number of timers still available (15 on a total of 16)
−
Number of contacts still available (7 on a total of 21 for P442 model)
−
Number of leds still available (0 on 8 – if all already assigned in the PSL)
−
Memory Capacity still available (decrease with the numbers of cells & logical gates linked in the dedicated PSL)
(See also the section commissioning for deeper tools explanations)
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 182/220 6.2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Logic input mapping The default mappings for each of the opto-isolated inputs are as shown in the following table: −
Version A : Optos are in 48VDC polarised (can be energised with the internal field voltage offered by the relay (–J7/J9-J8/J10 in a P441)
−
Version B : Optos are universal and opto range can be selected in MiCOM S1 by:
Opto A - 48VDC: The opto inputs are specified to operate between 30 and 60V to ensure there is enough current flowing through the opto diode to guarantee operation with component tolerances, temperature and CTR degradation over time. Between 13-29V is the uncertainty band. Below 12V, logical status is guaranteed Off Opto B – Universal opto inputs: Setting
Guaranteed No Operation
Guaranteed Operation
24/27
19,2
30/34
24,0
48/54
38,4
110/125
88,0
220/250
176,0
These margins ensure that ground faults on substation batteries do not create mal-operation of the opto inputs.
Or “Custom” can be selected in the menu to offer the possibility to adjust a different voltage pick-up for any optos inputs:
Application Notes MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN AP/E33 Page 183/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 184/220 Opto Input N°
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P441 Relay
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
1
Channel Receive (Distance Channel Receive (Distance Channel Receive (Distance or DEF) or DEF) or DEF)
2
Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF)
Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF)
Channel out of Service (Distance or DEF)
3
MCB/VTS Line
MCB/VTS Line
MCB/VTS Line
(Z measurement-Dist)
(Z measurement-Dist)
(Z measurement-Dist)
4
Block Autoreclose(LockOut)
Block Autoreclose(LockOut)
Block Autoreclose(LockOut)
5
Circuit Breaker Healthy
Circuit Breaker Healthy
Circuit Breaker Healthy
6
Circuit breaker Manual Close external order
Circuit breaker Manual Close external order
Circuit breaker Manual Close external order
7
Reset Lockout
Reset Lockout
Reset Lockout
8
Disable Autoreclose (1pole Disable Autoreclose (1and 3poles) pole and 3poles)
Disable Autoreclose (1pole and 3poles)
9
Not allocated
Not allocated
10
Not allocated
Not allocated
11
Not allocated
Not allocated
12
Not allocated
Not allocated
13
Not allocated
Not allocated
14
Not allocated
Not allocated
15
Not allocated
Not allocated
16
Not allocated
Not allocated
17
Not allocated
18
Not allocated
19
Not allocated
20
Not allocated
21
Not allocated
22
Not allocated
23
Not allocated
24
Not allocated
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.3
Page 185/220
Relay output contact mapping The default mappings for each of the relay output contacts are as shown in the following table (PSL are equivalent for P441/442/444):Relay Contact P441 Relay N°
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
1
TripA+B+C & Z1
TripA+B+C & Z1
TripA+B+C & Z1
2
Any Trip Phase A
Any Trip Phase A
Any Trip Phase A
3
Any Trip Phase B
Any Trip Phase B
Any Trip Phase B
4
Any Trip Phase C
AnyTrip Phase C
Any Trip Phase C
5
Signal send (Dist. or DEF) Signal send (Dist. or DEF) Signal send (Dist. or DEF)
6
Any Protection Start
Any Protection Start
Any Protection Start
7
Any Trip
Any Trip
Any Trip
8
General Alarm
General Alarm
General Alarm
9
DEF A+B+C Trip
DEF A+B+C Trip
DEF A+B+C Trip
+ IN>1Trip
+ IN>1Trip
+ IN>1Trip
+ IN>2Trip
+ IN>2Trip
+ IN>2Trip
10
Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR
Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR
Dist. Trip &Any Zone&DistUnb CR
11
Autoreclose lockout
Autoreclose lockout
Autoreclose lockout
12
Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress
Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress
Autoreclose 1P+3P cycle in progress
13
A/R Close
A/R Close
A/R Close
14
Power Swing Detected
Power Swing Detected
Power Swing Detected
15
Not allocated
Not allocated
16
Not allocated
Not allocated
17
Not allocated
Not allocated
18
Not allocated
Not allocated
19
Not allocated
Not allocated
20
Not allocated
Not allocated
21
Not allocated
Not allocated
22
Not allocated
Not allocated
23
Not allocated
24
Not allocated
25
Not allocated
26
Not allocated
27
Not allocated
28
Not allocated
29
Not allocated
30
Not allocated
31
Not allocated
32
Not allocated
Note that when 3 pole tripping is selected in the relay menu, all trip contacts: Trip A, Trip B, Trip C, and Any Trip close simultaneously.
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 186/220 6.4
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Relay output conditioning The default conditioning for each of the relay output contacts are as shown in the following table: Relay Contact P441 Relay N°
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
1
Straight
Straight
Straight
2
Straight
Straight
Straight
3
Straight
Straight
Straight
4
Straight
Straight
Straight
5
Straight
Straight
Straight
6
Straight
Straight
Straight
7
Straight
Straight
Straight
8
Straight
Straight
Straight
9
Straight
Straight
Straight
10
Straight
Straight
Straight
11
Straight
Straight
Straight
12
Straight
Straight
Straight
13
Straight
Straight
Straight
14
Straight
Straight
Straight
15
Not allocated
Not allocated
16
Not allocated
Not allocated
17
Not allocated
Not allocated
18
Not allocated
Not allocated
19
Not allocated
Not allocated
20
Not allocated
Not allocated
21
Not allocated
Not allocated
22
Not allocated
Not allocated
23
Not allocated
24
Not allocated
25
Not allocated
26
Not allocated
27
Not allocated
28
Not allocated
29
Not allocated
30
Not allocated
31
Not allocated
32
Not allocated NOTE:
Others conditions of relays logic are available in the relays design by PSL. Pulse Timer Pick UP/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (Transparent)
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 187/220
Input
Pulse Timer
Output
Pulse setting
Input Output
Pulse setting
Input
Pick Up/ Drop Off Timer
Output
Tp setting
Td setting
Input Output
Tp setting
Td setting
Input Output
Dwell Timer
Input Output
Input
Pick Up Timer
Timer setting
Output Input Output
Timer setting
Timer setting
Timer setting
Input Output
Drop Off Timer
Timer setting
Input Output
Timer setting
P0562ENa
FIGURE 125 – TIMER DEFINITION IN PSL
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 188/220 6.5
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Programmable led output mapping The default mappings for each of the programmable LED’s are as shown in the following table:LED N°
P441 Relay
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
1
Any Trip A
Any Trip A
Any Trip A
2
Any Trip B
AnyTrip B
Any Trip B
3
Any Trip C
AnyTrip C
Any Trip C
4
Any Start
Any Start
Any Start
5
Z1+Aided Trip
Z1+Aided Trip
Z1+Aided Trip
6
Dist FWd
Dist Fwd
Dist Fwd
7
Dist Rev
Dist Rev
Dist Rev
8
A/R Enable
A/R Enable
A/R Enable
NOTE: 6.6
All the Leds are latched in the default PSL
Fault recorder trigger The default PSL trigger which initiates a fault record is as shown in the following table:P441 Relay
P442 Relay
P444 Relay
Any Start
Any Start
Any Start
Any Trip
Any Trip
Any Trip
FIGURE 126 If the fault recorder trigger is not assigned in the PSL, no Fault recorder can be initiated and displayed in the list by the LCD front panel.
Application Notes
P44x/EN AP/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
7.
Page 189/220
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS Two calculations must be performed – once for the three phase fault current at the zone 1 reach, and once for earth (ground) faults. The highest of the two calculated Vk voltages must be used:
7.1
CT Knee Point Voltage for Phase Fault Distance Protection Vk
≥
KRPA x IF Z1 x (1+ X/R) . (RCT + RL)
Where:
7.2
Vk
=
Required CT knee point voltage (volts),
KRPA
=
Fixed dimensioning factor
IF Z1
=
Max. secondary phase fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A),
X/R
=
Primary system reactance / resistance ratio,
RCT
=
CT secondary winding resistance (Ω),
RL
=
Single lead resistance from CT to relay (Ω).
=
always 0.6
CT Knee Point Voltage for Earth Fault Distance Protection ≥
KRPA x IFe Z1 x (1+ Xe/Re) . (RCT + 2RL)
KRPA
=
Fixed dimensioning factor
IFe Z1
=
Max. secondary earth fault current at Zone 1 reach point (A),
Xe/Re
=
Primary system reactance / resistance ratio for earth loop.
Vk Where:
7.3
=
always 0.6
Recommended CT classes (British and IEC) Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be used. Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be approximated from: Vk
+
(RCT x ALF x In)
=
(VA x ALF) / In
VA
=
Voltampere burden rating,
ALF
=
Accuracy Limit Factor,
In
=
CT nominal secondary current.
Where:
7.4
Determining Vk for an IEEE “C" class CT Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be checked to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC). The equivalence formula is: Vk
8.
=
[ (C rating in volts) x 1.05 ]
+
[ 100 x RCT ]
DDB DESCRIPTION FOR ALL TYPES P441/P442 & P444 MODELS
P44x/EN AP/E33
Application Notes
Page 190/220
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Out
In
In
In
In
SG-opto Invalid
Opto Label 1/8
Opto Label 9/16
Opto Label 17/24
Opto Label 25/32
Opto2
Opto1
Default PSL Changement of Group by Optos
Set with :
Reset with :
Page 191/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
P442 / P444
Not Used
Opto energised for a minimum time : 1,2 sec to be validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
P444
Not Used
See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
P444
Opto energised for a minimum time : 7 ms (48Vdc), 10 ms (universal) to be See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
P442 / P444
Opto energised for a minimum time : 7 ms (48Vdc), 10 ms (universal) to be See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP validated by internal logic See Hysteresis description in sect 6.2 chapter P44x/EN AP
P441 / P442 / P444
Set 0 : No alarm is present
opto power off At 0 : (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
opto power off At 0 : (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
(48Vcc Version A / Universal Version B-C)
P441 / P442 / P444
OPTOS INPUTS
Setting Group selected via opto are invalid Example :1group is requested by the optos status but that group is not present in the settings (Gr3 requested but only Gr1&2 are present in MiCOM S1-The settings restart with GR1 & that cell switch on at 1)
opto energised (>1 sec)(*) – Must be not assigned in the PSL At1 :MSB Bit (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
opto energised (>1 sec)( ) – Must be not assigned in the PSL At1 :LSB Bit (see table in section 3.3.1 in chap AP)
∗
Minimum time >1 sec for: changement Gr/TPAR/SPAR/AR enable
In
No cell assigned
∗
In
Out
In
No cell assigned
DDB label
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
LED 1
22/32
Relay Label
15/21
Relay Label
01/14
Relay Label
DDB label
Page 192/220
Led
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
P44x/EN AP/E33
Default PSL
(Right side – Front panel)
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP A in the default PSL
LEDS
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relay– Not assigned in default PSL Type of Logic: (See Description above)
P444
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relay – Not assigned in default PSL Type of Logic: (See Description above)
P442 / P444
Set1 :For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Programmable Relays : All relays are assigned in The default PSL (See DDB table description) Type of Logic: Pulse timer Pick Up/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (used in default PSL)
P441 / P442 / P444
OUTPUT RELAYS
Set with :
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: (See Description above)
P444
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: (See Description above)
P442 / P444
Set 0 :For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 Type of Logic: Pulse timer Pick Up/Drop Off Timer Dwell Timer Pick Up Timer Drop Off Timer Latching Straight (used in default PSL)
P441 / P442 / P444
Reset with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Out
In
LED 2
DDB label
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Auto Reclose Enable in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Dist REV in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Dist FWD in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : Z1+Aided Trip in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : General Start in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP C in the default PSL
Set1 : For any DDB cell at 1 if linked by PSL Programmable Led : ANY TRIP B in the default PSL
Set with :
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Set 0 : For any DDB cell at 0 if linked by PSL & regarding the type of logic selected in PSL by MiCOM S1 (Latched or not Latched)
Reset with :
Page 193/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
TPAR Enable
A/R Internal
A/R 1p in Prog
A/R 3p in Prog
A/R Close
A/R reclaim
Out
In
SPAR Enable
DDB label
Page 194/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Relay 13
Relay 12
Relay 12
Opto8 +Inv
Opto8 +Inv
Default PSL
Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 :no Ban Tri logic available. AR is disable
Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR 3P internal is disabled (even if selected enable by MiCOM S1) logic becomes :no more 3P cycle available (1P could exist if SPAR at 1)
Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR 1P internal is disabled (even if selected enable by MiCOM S1) AR logic becomes 3P only with AR 3P cycle -if TPAR =1
Reset with :
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Reclaim time from external AR in progress – requested to initiate internal TOR logic / Used in Z1X logic (by specific PSL)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External AR gives a CB closing order – for using internal synchro conditions of P44X
opto energised if linked by PSL External 3P Arcycle in progress - requested for blocking the internal DEF function – (pb of Pole Operating Time)
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At1 : External 1P AR cycle in progress – requested for blocking the internal DEF function
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :AR internal becomes present [AR becomes enable by external contact example :Wdog of Main1 when pick up activates the internal AR in Main2(P44x)]
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :3P AR internal is enabled in the AR logic (higher priority than MiCOM S1)
opto energised (> 1 sec) if linked by PSL At1 :1P AR internal is enabled in the AR logic (higher priority than MiCOM S1)
AUTO RECLOSE (AR) Logic
Set with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
Ext Chk Synch OK
CB Healthy
Force 3P trip
Man.Close CB
Man.Trip CB
CB Discrepancy
External TripA
Out
In
BAR
DDB label
Opto 6
Opto 5
Opto 4
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Reset at 0 : opto power off Conditiond of external synchro are unvailable
Reset at 0 : opto power off AR Lock out is reseted
Reset with :
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command A
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 : Contact from external status of CB poles (one pole opened) – that data must be at 1 before end of Dead time1 if assigned in the PSL OR Internal logic = Any pole &Not All pole Dead (CB Aux must be connected 52a or 52b)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External manual trip command to provide a CB trip command by CB control if selected in MiCOM S1
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External manual close command – requested to initiate SOTF logic & to close CB (Arlock out during SOTF logic)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External command for tripping 3P only (Order issued from Main1 to Main2) – next trip will be 3P
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off OR drop Off Internal Logic At 0 : Stop the 1P cycle if absent at the end of dead time1. AR is ofrced in AR Lock Out
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At 0 : AR cycle is stopped (if that cell is assigned in the At1 :contact from CB when CB is operationnal (gas pressure/mechanical state)- Must be at 1 inside the time window (adjusted by MiCOM S1 : PSL). At the end of InhWInd the signal AR BAR picks up. group1/Autoreclose mode/AR Inhibit Wind) during an AR cycle (signals :AR close & AR Reclaim pick up when CB healthy is detected during the InhWind timer)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External check synchro condition satisfied – to be used with internal AR close by specific PSL – (With AND logic between Arclose&CsyncExt)
opto energised if linked by PSL Set at1 :External condition which blocks the internal AR (other internal blocking conditions can be selected in MiCOM S1 :Autoreclose/Block AR) – see also logic AR lockout figure..
Set with :
Page 195/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
External TripC
AR Lockout Shot>
AR Fail
A/R close
A/R 1p in Prog
Out
In
External TripB
DDB label
Page 196/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Relay 12
Relay 13
Default PSL
At0 : AR Cycles continue if fault still present (not erased by the previous Arcycle) Reset at 0 : Reset Trip1P + Reset Trip3P
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset with :
Reset at 0 with : Close Pulse Time (Setting) OR Trip1P or Trip3P
1P AR cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2 for Blocking Set 0 with : DEF) End of 1P Dead Time +AR Lock out (BAR) + 3P TRip
Set at 1 :AR internal command :CB Close Starts as AR Reclaim
Set at 1 : Absence of check sync condition involve AR failure (For 3P cycle) Reset at 0 : by 3 Poles Closed
AR is blocked by passing over the number of shots selected in Auto Reclose/trip mode (in MiCOM S1) Set at 1 : (AR Enable) & [(Trip1P&No SPAR)+(Trip3P&NoTPAR) +(Trip1P+Trip3P)&(Number of shots=MiCOM S1 value)]
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command C Activate a Trip command phase C(DDB :Any TripC) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripC cell
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :External trip command B Activate a Trip command phase B(DDB :Any TripB) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripB cell
Activate a Trip command phase A (DDB :Any TripA) (No dwell timer is associated as for an internal trip) Activate internal AR Integrated in the Any Trip & Any TripA cell
Set with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
A/R 1st in Prog
A/R 234 in Prog
A/R Trip 3P
A/R Reclaim
Out
In
A/R 3p in Prog
DDB label
Relay 12
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR)
Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR)
Set 0 with : End of 3P Dead time (DAR) +AR Lock Out (BAR) +End of Dead time1 (HSAR)
Reset with :
Set at 1 :Reclaim timer in progress.(Value adjusted in MiCOM S1) Picks up at the end of the dead time –in synchronism with AR Close order - Can be connected to Main2 for cycle in progress external information - Initiate the internal TOR logic
Reset at 0 with : End of Reclaim time (MiCOM S1) OR Reset (Trip1P or Trip3P) (See Figure 78 section 4.5.3)
AR signal which force all trips to be 3P – picks up at the end of the first trip At 0 : AR1P could operate if programmed (1P or 3P) - Can be connected to Main2 as an external Ban Tri Set at 1 : Reset at 0 : (AR enable MiCOM S1)&(No SPAR) SPAR & AR enable MiCOM S1 + (InhibitWind at 0)
Further delayed AR Cyles in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
First high speed AR Cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
3P AR cycle in progress (could be connected to external Main2)
Set with :
Page 197/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
A/R Enable
A/R SPAR Enable
A/R TPAR Enable
A/R Lockout
A/R Force Sync
LED 8
Out
Out
In
AR Discrim
DDB label
Page 198/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Relay 11
Led 8
Default PSL
AR Enable (See DDB Description)
Force the Synchro condition ok at 1 (Could be used during test for getting Arclose whatever are the real conditions of CheckSyn )
AR function locked out/No more cycle is initiated by the AR (Pole is kept opened) – Reset must be done for enabling the AR logic again (AR counters are resetted) Set at 1 = ARenable & [(BAR =1 (see internal logic figure.. section..) +(AR BAR n shot>) AR lockout by number of shots +(No CB Healthy at the end of InhWind(MiCOM S1)) +[No Discrepancy (opto or internal by CBAux if present in PSL) at the end of 1P Dead time1] + (Trip 1P or3P maintained /still present at the end of the1Por3P Dead time) +(After discrim timer if Trip3P occures during a 1PAR Cycle) ]
Set at 1 :3P AR activated (copy of opto TPAR or MiCOM S1)
Set at 1 :1P AR activated (copy of opto SPAR or MiCOM S1)
Copy of status AR Enable Set at 1 : [(optos SPAR) +(optoTPAR)]& (AR enable byMiCOM S1)
Dicrim status detected (inter or Externaly)-timer in progress
Set with :
Latched by PSL design
Reset 0 : With Reset of A/R Reclaim (See DDB description)
At0 : AR is activated Reset at 0 = [Reset(Trip1P)+Reset(Trip3P)] & (End of RC timer) & Reset (BAR ) & Reset (AR BAR n shot>) & Reset (No CB Healty) & Reset (No Discrepancy)
Reset at 0: if TPARopto=0 or AR Disable in MiCOM S1
Reset at 0: if SPARopto=0 or AR Disable in MiCOM S1
Reset at 0: If SPAR and TPAR Optos at 0 (if integrated in PSL) + AR Disable in MiCOM S1
Rest 0 : End of Discrim timer (MiCOM S1) +Trip 3P (DEC 3P) +AR Lock Out (BAR)
Reset with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Control No C/S
VLive line
VLive Bus
MCB/VTS Bus
MCB/VTS Line
Ctrl Cls In Prog
Control Close
Control Trip
Out
In
Check Synch .OK
DDB label
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set at 1 :CB Trip 3P command by internal CB Control See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115
Set at1 :CB Close 3P command by internal CB Control (Control with synchrocheck manual condition could be used in dedicated PSL – MiCOM S1Chk scheme ManCB) See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115
Set at 1 :Manual close in progress – using CB control (Timer manual closing delay in progress)
Set at 1 :Internal fault in VT used for Z measurement ref (Main VT) Distance &all Directionnal functions are blocked(can unblocked with different VTS timer- see MiCOM S1 settings)
Set at 1 :Internal fault in VT used for synchro ref Csync function is blocked
Set at 1: Condition of Live Bus at 1 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) – Default value is 32V
Set at 1: Condition of Dead Bus at 1 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) – Default value is 13V
Set at 1: Condition of Live line at 1 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) – Default value is 32V
Set at 1 : Condition of Dead line at 1 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1) – Default value is 13V
Set at 1 : Internal conditions of Csync are not fulfilled
Set at 1 : Check Synchro conditions are satisfied Used with AR close in dedicated PSL – AND gate : [(AR Close) or (Manual Close) & (Checksync OK)]
CHECK SYNC Logic
Set with :
Reset at 0 : End of timer MiCOM S1 (Trip pulse timer)
Reset at 0 : End of Timer MiCOM S1 (Close pulse timer) +Any Trip +CBC No Csync +CBC Unhealthy See CB Control logic sect 4.8 fig 115
Set at 0 :End of Timer manual closing
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Set at 0 : Condition of Live Bus at 0 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1)
Set at 0 : Condition of Dead Bus at 0 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1)
Set at 0 : Condition of Live line at 0 (voltage below the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1)
Set at 0 : Condition of Dead line at 0 (voltage above the threshold value (settable in MiCOM S1)
Set at 0 :CSYnc conditions available
Set at 0 : Conditions of checksyn unsatisfied (thresholds of dead & live definied in MiCOM S1 :system checks)
Reset with :
Page 199/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
In
In
In
Out
Out
AR Reclaim
CB Aux A
CB Aux B
CB Aux C
SOTF Enable
TOR Enable
Out
In
Man Close CB
DDB label
Page 200/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Opto 6
Default PSL
When SOTF logic is enable Set at 1 : By a Pulse of 500msec initiated by : AR Reclaim internal+AR reclaim External Input OR Any pole opened for more than 200ms
When SOTF logic is enable Set at 1 : [Sotf not disable (Bit D in MiCOM S1)] AND All pole dead & End Timer (110sec/default) + Input Man Close + (CB control & Close in progress)
opto energised if linked by PSL (See CB DDB ) used for Any pole dead/All pole dead
opto energised if linked by PSL (See CB DDB ) used for Any pole dead/All pole dead
opto energised if linked by PSL (See CB DDB ) used for Any pole dead/All pole dead
opto energised if linked by PSL When at 1 (See AR DDB) start the TOR logic
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 : AND no CB Control is activated in MiCOM S1 External command for closing manualy the CB Will initiate SOTF logic if SOTF not disable in MiCOM S1(BitD) AND CB control enable will initiate CB close in progress if All pole dead = SOTF Enable
SOTF – TOR Logic
Set with :
Reset 500ms after Any pole dead stops
Timer 500msec issued after Any pole Dead + Reset of one conditions requested for SOTF enable
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset at 0 : opto power off
Reset with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
In
In
In
In
TOC Start B
TOC Start C
AR Reclaim
SOTF/TOR Trip
Any Pole Dead
All Pole Dead
CB Aux A (52a)
CB Aux A (52b)
CB Aux B (52a)
CB Aux B (52b)
CB Aux C (52a)
Out
In
TOC Start A
DDB label
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Reset with :
Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds
Set 0 :1pole is detected not dead
Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds
Set 0 :All poles are detected not dead
Set 0 :When conditions reset (See logic section 2.12 – fig 37)
Set 0 : (See AR DDB)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole C is closed
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole B is opened
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole B is closed
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole A is opened
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole A is closed
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is opened
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole B is closed
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole B is opened
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is closed
Reset at 0 : opto power off Set 0 :Pole A is opened
CIRCUIT BREAKER Logic (CB Control / CB Monitoring / CB Fail)
Set1 :All poles are open Pole DeadA & P.DeadB & P.Dead C Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds (see dead pole logic in SOTF section 2.12 – fig 35)
Set1 :Minimum 1 pole is open Pole Dead A+Pole DeadB+Pole Dead C Detection of pole status made by Cbaux or internal thresholds (see dead pole logic in SOTF section 2.12 – fig 35)
Set1 :Trip order initiated by any condition fulfilled in the SOTF/TOR logic (See logic section 2.12 – fig 37)
When at 1 (See AR DDB) start the TOR logic
Set1 :Trip order phase C initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
Set1 :Trip order phase B initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
Set1 :Trip order phase A initiated by levels detectors in SOTF logic (Pickup Set 0 : Reset of Level detectors logic 20ms delayed )
Set with :
Page 201/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
Out
Out
Out
CB Healthy
Man Close CB
Man Trip CB
CB Discrepancy
Reset Lockout
Reset All Values
CB Fail Alarm
I^ Maint Alarm
I^ Lockout Alarm
Out
In
CB Aux C (52b)
DDB label
Page 202/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Opto 7
Opto 6
Opto 5
Default PSL
Set1 : Lockout :Alarm picks up when the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by monitoring task is reached (set in MiCOM S1 :I^Maintenance) (min1/Max 25000A)
Set1 : :Alarm Maintenace picks up when the maximum broken current (1st level) calculated by monitoring task is reached (set in MiCOM S1 :I^Maintenance) (min1/Max 25000A)
Set 1 :For any Breaker failure on any trip for any phase
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Provides a CB monitoring reset (all counters & values are reset)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Provides a CB monitoring lockout reset (all counters & values are reset)
See DDB description of AR Logic
See DDB description of AR Logic
See DDB Description in SOTF logic (CB control not used)
See DDB description of AR Logic (CB control not used)
opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Status input from CB-Pole C is opened
Set with :
Set 0 :When the maximum broken current (2nd level) calculated by monitoring task is not reached
Reset 0 : (selectable in MiCOM S1 : CB fail & I< logic) Iphase< + CB open & Iphase< +Trip reset & Iphase +Trip reset OR Iphase are working) (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66)
Set1 :Copy of Instantaneous unconfirmed Fuse Failure (in internal logic detection) (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66) Protections blocked.Min Z can be unblocked by I>&I2>&IN&∆I (for 1P/2P/3P Failure)
See Check Sync DDB description (Used in Synchrocheck logic)
Reset at 0 : opto power off opto energised if linked by PSL At1 :Fuse Failure by external MCB status on Main VT (Z measurement) .All Distance & Directionnality will be blocked after a FFU timer adjusted by MiCOM S1 (See Fuse Failure logic section 4.2 Figure 66) Even if Main VT are Bus side – that cell must be linked to MCB status)
Reset at 0 : opto power off opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL At1 :Signal will initiate Z1 extension logic if selected in MiCOM S1. That cell can be assigned to any external/Internal condition for starting Z1X logic (See Z1X logic section 4.5.4 Figure 13 Figure 14)
Set with :
Page 205/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Dist Fwd
Dist Rev
Dist Trip A
Dist Trip B
Dist Trip C
DIST Start A
DIST Start B
Out
In
DIST UNB CR
DDB label
Page 206/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Led7
Led6
Default PSL
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase B (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase A (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
Set1 :Trip Phase C with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
Set1 :Trip Phase B with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
Set1 :Trip Phase A with Distance protection logic (See Trip logic in Section 2.5 Figure 94)
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse detected in distance Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) AND (CVMR) (See Description of Algorithms in chapter P44x/EN HW, item 4) Assigned to Led 7 by default
Set1 :Directionnal Forward detected in distance Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) AND (CVMR) See Description of Algorithms in chapter P44x/EN HW, item 4) Assigned to Led 6 by default
Set1 :Unblock Main channel signal received See Led 5 / Relay 10 description
Set with :
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested)
Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms)
Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms)
Set 0 :Reset Dist Trip signal (fixed pulse duration is 80ms)
Set 0 : With reset of Any Start/Dist Start
Set 0 : With reset of Any Start/Dist Start
Set 0 :
Reset with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
DIST Sch Accel.
DIST Sch Perm
DIST Sch Block
Z1 = Z'1
Z1X = Z'1x
Z2 = Z'2
Z3 = Z'3
Z4 = Z'4
Out
In
DIST Start C
DDB label
Led5 Relay 10
Led5 Relay 10
Led5 Relay 10
Led5 Relay 10
Led5 Relay 01-10
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z4(convergence of loop in Z4) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Relay 10 / Led5 description
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z3(convergence of loop in Z3) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Relay 10 / Led5 description
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z2(convergence of loop in Z2) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Relay 10 / Led5 description
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z1x(convergence of loop in Z1x) and filtered by blocking/unblocking PSwing/Rguard logic See Led 5/Relay10 description
Set1 :Fault is detected in Z1(convergence of loop in Z1) See Led 5/Relay01/Relay 10 description
Set1 :Distance scheme Blocking – BOP Z1 – BOP Z2 (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
Set1 :Distance scheme Permissive - PUP (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
Set1 :Distance scheme accelerating - POP (Copy of MiCOM S1 setting Dist scheme)
Set1 : Distance Protection logic start phase C (See Description of Algorithms in chapter 3)
Set with :
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1
Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1
Set 0 : If disabled in MiCOM S1
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection I Dead calculated by Laurent (3 or 4 samples requested) V Dead calculated by CB Fail (More than 10ms requested)
Reset with :
Page 207/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
T1
T2
T3
T4
Tzp
Dist Fwd No Filt
Dist Rev No Filt
Dist Convergency
Cross Country Filt
Relay Label 01
Out
In
Zp
DDB label
Page 208/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Led5 Relay 10
Default PSL
Assigned in default PSL : »TRIP Z1 » - Default logic Z1&[( Dist TripA)+ (Dist TripB)+ (Dist TripC)]
Set1 : Cross country logic is activated (1 Fault Fwd/1 Fault Rev detected)
Set1 : logic with CVMR at 1 (Minimum 1 loop has been detected in the quad)
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse decision made by Distance logic without any filter by CVMR or Zone Picks up quicker than Dist Rev
Set1 :Directionnal Forward decision made by Distance logic without any filter by CVMR or Zone Picks up quicker than Dist Fwd
Set1 :Timer Distance for Zp (tZp in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z4 (tZ4 in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z3 (tZ3 in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z2 (tZ2 in MiCOM S1) is issued End of Timer =1
Set1 :Timer Distance for Z1 (tZ1 in MiCOM S1) is issued (If T1=0 picks up when relay starts (CVMR or Predef) End of Timer =1
Set1 :Fault is detected in Zp(convergence of loop in Zp) – See Relay 10 / Led5 description
Set with :
Set 0 : See PSL logic
Set 0 : With reset of initiale conditions
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Identical to Dist Rev reset logic
Set 0 : Identical to Dist Fwd reset logic
Set 0 : Timer Distance T Zp is not issued
Set 0 : Timer Distance T4 is not issued
Set 0 : Timer Distance T3 is not issued
Set 0 : Timer Distance T2 is not issued
Set 0 : Timer Distance T1 is not issued
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Reset with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Led
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
In
LED 5
Power Swing
Reversal Guard
WI Trip A
WI Trip B
WI Trip C
DEF.Chan Recv
Out
In
Relay Label 10
DDB label
Opto1
Relay 14
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set 0 : (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set 0 :
Set 0 : Reset of initiale conditions
Set 0 : See PSL logic
Set 0 : See PSL logic
Reset with :
opto energised if linked by PSL opto power off At1 :Signal (carrier)received on main channel for DEF scheme logic Set 0 :No carrier received (depending on MiCOM S1 settings :Aided DEF/Scheme logic) Selected shared by default – Can operate as an independant scheme with adifferent opto from Dist
Aided DEF PROTECTION Logic
Set1 : For Trip phase C in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set1 : For Trip phase B in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set1 : For Trip phase A in Weak infeed logic (See Weak Infeed logic section 2.9.3 Figure 24)
Set1 :Reversal guard logic is activated (Directionnal switching from Rev to Fwd in parallel line application) See Description logic in section 2.8.2.4 Figure 3)
Set1 : Power Swing detected (See description logic in section 2.14 Figure 40)
Associated DISTANCE PROTECTION Logic
Assigned in default PSL : »Z1+Aided Trip » Relay10 + Z1 + Z1x
Assigned in default PSL : »Dist Aided Trip » - Default logic [( Dist TripA)+ (Dist TripB)+ (Dist TripC)] & Dist Unb CR & (Z1+Z1x+Z2+Z3+Zp+Z4)
Set with :
Page 209/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
DEF Timer Block
DEF Sig Send
DEF UNB CR
DEF Rev
DEF Fwd
DEF Start A
DEF Start B
DEF Start C
DEF Trip A
DEF Trip B
DEF Trip C
Out
In
DEF COS
DDB label
Page 210/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Relay 09
Relay 09
Relay 09
Relay 05
Opto2
Default PSL
Reset with :
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 :
Set 0 :
Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase C (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase B (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
Set1 : DEF Protection logic Trip phase A (See Description of Algorithms in Figure 52)
Set1 :Start Phase C with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
Set1 :Start Phase B with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
Set1 :Start Phase A with DEF protection logic (See Trip logic in section 2.18)
Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset DEF Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description)
Set1 :Directionnal Foward detected in DEF Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) Set 0 : Reset of R/X computation made by All pole Dead detection (See Dist Start DDB reset description) (See Description of Algorithms in section 2.18 Figure 50)
Set1 :Directionnal Reverse detected in DEF Algorithms (Deltas or Classical) See Description of Algorithms in section 2.18 Figure 50)
Set1 :Unblock DEF Channel
Set1 :Signal send in DEF Protection scheme (See logic of DEF section 2.18 Figure 48 and Figure 49)
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The DEF Timer will be blocked & DEF will start but will not perform any Trip command.
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off At1 :Signal (Loss of carrier/Loss of Guard) is detected out of service by external device Selected shared by default – Can operate as an independant scheme with adifferent opto from Dist
Set with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
In
Out
Out
In
In
In
In
In
In
ZSP Start
ZSP Trip
IN>1 Timer Block
IN>2 Timer Block
I>1 Timer Block
I>2 Timer Block
I>3 Timer Block
I>4 Timer Block
Out
In
ZSP Timer Block
DDB label
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set 0:Reset ZSP Trip Order
Set 0:Reset with IN or SR below the threshold IN> or SR> Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I>4 Timer will be blocked & I>4 will start but will not perform any OR Trip command. DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I>3 Timer will be blocked & I>3 will start but will not perform any OR Trip command. DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I>2 Timer will be blocked & I>2 will start but will not perform any OR Trip command. DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I>1 Timer will be blocked & I>1 will start but will not perform any OR Trip command. DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The IN>2 Timer will be blocked & IN>2 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
IN>1/IN>2/I2>/I>1/I>2/I>3/I>4 Logic
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set1 :The IN>1 Timer will be blocked & IN>1 will start but will not perform any Trip command.
BACK UP OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
Set 1:3P Trip order performed by Zero sequence power function when associated timers are issued
Set 1:Zero sequence power function Start (Timer associated picks up) with fixed time delay first and IDMT curve timer
Reset with :
Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto OR DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
ZSP Logic (since version B1.0)
Input energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Set 1:The ZSP Timer will be blocked & ZSP will start but will not perform any Trip command
ZERO SEQUENCE POWER PROTECTION
Set with :
Page 211/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
IN>1 Trip
IN>2 Trip
IN>1 Start
IN>2 Start
I2> Start
I2> Trip
I>Start Any A
I>Start Any B
I>Start Any C
Out
In
I2> Timer Block
DDB label
Page 212/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
Relay 09
Relay 09
Default PSL
Reset with :
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase C
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase B
Set1 :Any Overcurrent function start for phase A
Set1 : Negative sequence current detection – 3P Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 : Negative sequence current detection – Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - with DT curves Negative polarisation
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 2 – Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - DT only Negative or positive sequence polarisation
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 1 – Start function (Timer associated picks up) Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Negative or positive sequence polarisation
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 2 – 3Poles Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 : Earth Fault stage 1 – 3Poles Trip order performed when associated timer is issued
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase C below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase B below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the lowest threshold I>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset I2> Trip Order
(See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold I2> Hysteresis=
Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold IN>2 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with IN below the threshold IN>1 Hysteresis= (See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset IN>2Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset IN>1 Trip Order
opto energised if linked by PSL OR any internal DDB by dedicated PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto Set1 :The I2> Timer will be blocked & I2> will start but will not perform any OR Trip command with negative overcurrent detection DDB at 0 if assigned to a DDB cell
Set with :
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
I>2 Start
I>3 Start
I>4 Start
I>1 Trip
I>2 Trip
I>3 Trip
I>4 Trip
Stub Bus Enable
Out
In
I>1 Start
DDB label
Default PSL
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Application Notes
Set 0 : Reset I>4 Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset I>3 Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset I>2 Trip Order
Set 0 : Reset I>1 Trip Order
(See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>4 Hysteresis=
(See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>3 Hysteresis=
(See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>2 Hysteresis=
(See Pole Dead description in Figure 60)
Set 0 : Reset with Iphase A below the threshold I>1 Hysteresis=
Reset with :
opto energised if linked by PSL Reset at 0 : opto power off if assigned to an opto At1 :Status input from HV line isolator opened – indicates that line is dead & disconnected At1 : I>4 is activated as a back up Stub Bus protection
Set1 :Overcurrent Stage 4 Trip 3P performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 :Overcurrent Stage 3 Trip 3P performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 :Overcurrent Stage 2 Trip 3P performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 :Overcurrent Stage 1 Trip 3P performed when associated timer is issued
Set1 :Overcurrent stage4 start Not Directionnal with DT curves Use without timer for SOTF (see description in section 2.14)
Set1 :Overcurrent stage3 start Not Directionnal with DT curves Use without timer for SOTF (see description in section 2.12 Figure 35)
Set1 :Overcurrent stage2 start Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Directionnal managed by Deltas Algorithms VTS Block timer facility
Set1 :Overcurrent stage1 start Directionnal or not - with DT or IDMT curves Directionnal managed by Deltas Algorithms VTS Block timer facility
Set with :
Page 213/220
P44x/EN AP/E33
In
In
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
V1 Timer Block
V>2 Timer Block
V2 Alarm
V1, I>2, I>3, I>4)
Distance elements: Other zones Resistance Impedance
Distance elements: Zone 1 Resistance Impedance
Element
Protection accuracy
Page 10/30
P44x/EN TD/E33
Accuracy: ±2°
DT: Vs±5% IDMT: 1.05Vs±5%
DT: Vs±5% IDMT: 0.95Vs±5%
Accuracy: ±10%
Is±5%
Accuracy: ±5%
Accuracy: ±5%
Accuracy: ±10% at RCA ±90°
-
0.95Vs±5%
greater of 2% or 20ms
greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms
greater of 2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms
Above setting: 10ms or less Below setting: 15ms or less
±5%
1.05Vs±5%
greater of ±5% or 40ms
-
-
-
greater of ±2% or 20ms greater of 5% or 40ms
greater of ±2% or 20ms greater of ±5% or 40ms
±2ms
±2ms
Timer Accuracy
0.95Is±5%
0.95Is±5%
-
-
0.95Is±5%
1°
Accuracy: ±2° DT: Is±5% IDMT: 1.05Is±5%
0.95Is±2% 0.95Is±5%
Reset
DT: Is±5% IDMT: 1.05Is±5%
Accuracy: ±10%
Accuracy: ±5%
Trigger
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Technical Data
I 2 I1 2 to 20 Is 2 to 20 Is 0 to 10s
Relay overshoot
Breaker fail timers
0.2 to 1.0
Range
Transient Overreach
Broken conductor protection
Element
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Technical Data
-
1 Current Set
1st Stage
0.08 - 4.0In
0.01In
I>2 Current Set
2nd Stage
0.08 - 4.0In
0.01In
I>3 Current Set
TOR/SOTF protection
0.08 - 32In
0.01In
I>4 Current Set
Stub bus protection
0.08 - 32In
0.01In
Time Delay Settings Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay can be blocked by an optically isolated input:
6.3.3
Element
Time delay type
1st Stage
Definite Time (DT) or IDMT(IEC/UK/IEEE/US curves)
2nd Stage
DT or IDMT
3rd Stage
DT
4th Stage
DT
Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US curves as shown in the table below. The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t = TMS ×
K (I/Is)α–1
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula: t=
TD × 7
K
(I/I S )
α
+ L −1
Where t
=
operation time
K
=
constant
I
=
measured current
IS
=
current threshold setting
α
=
constant
L
=
ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
TMS =
Time Multiplier Setting for IEC/UK curves
TD
Time Dial Setting for IEEE/US curves
=
Technical Data
P44x/EN TD/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 21/30
IDMT Curve description
Standard
K Constant
α Constant
Standard Inverse
IEC
0.14
0.02
Very Inverse
IEC
13.5
1
Extremely Inverse
IEC
80
2
Long Time Inverse
UK
120
1
Moderately Inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
0.114
Very Inverse
IEEE
19.61
2
0.491
Extremely Inverse
IEEE
28.2
2
0.1217
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
2
0.18
Short Time Inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
L Constant
IDMT Characteristics Name
Range
Step Size
TMS
0.025 to 1.2
0.025
Time Multiplier Settings for IEC/UK curves Name
Range
Step Size
TD
0.5 to 15
0.1
Time Dial Settings for IEEE/US curves 6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
Definite Time Characteristic Element
Range
Step Size
All stages
0 to 100s
10ms
Reset Characteristics Reset options for IDMT stages: Curve type
Reset time delay
IEC / UK curves
DT only
All other
IDMT or DT
The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT curve as shown in the table below. Thus if IDMT reset is selected the curve selection and Time Dial setting will apply to both operate and reset. All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:
tr TD t Re set = × 7 1 − ( I I ) α S Where tReset
=
reset time
tr
=
constant
I
=
measured current
IS
=
current threshold setting
α
=
constant
TD
=
Time Dial Setting (Same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)
P44x/EN TD/E33
Technical Data
Page 22/30
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
IEEE/US IDMT Curve description
Standard
tr Constant
α Constant
Moderately Inverse
IEEE
0.0515
0.02
Very Inverse
IEEE
19.61
2
Extremely Inverse
IEEE
28.2
2
Inverse
US-C08
5.95
2
Short Time Inverse
US-C02
0.02394
0.02
Inverse Reset Characteristics 6.4
6.5
Negative sequence overcurrent protection Setting
Range
Step size
I2> Current Set
0.08 - 4.0In
0.01In
I2> time Delay
0 - 100s
0.01s
Directional
None/Fwd/Rev
I2> Char Angle
–95° - +95°
1°
Settings
Range
Step size
I2/I1 Setting
0.2 - 1.0
0.01
I2/I1 Time Delay
0 - 100s
0.1s
I2/I1 Trip
Enabled / Disabled
Broken Conductor Protection
6.6
Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection
6.6.1
Threshold Settings
6.6.2
Setting
Range
Step Size
IN>1 Current Set
0.08 - 4.0In
0.01In
IN>2 Current Set
0.08 - 32In
0.01In
Polarising Quantities For Earth Fault Measuring Elements The polarising quantity for earth fault elements can be either zero sequence or negative sequence values.
6.6.3
Setting
Range
Step Size
IN> Char angle
–95° to +95°
1°
Time Delay Characteristics The time delay options for the two earth fault elements are identical, stage 1 may be selected to be either IDMT or definite time. Stage 2 will provide a definite time delay. The settings and IDMT characteristics are identical to those specified for the phase overcurrent elements. The setting range for the definite time delayed element is as specified below: Definite Time Characteristic Element
Range
Step Size
All stages
0 to 200s
0.01s
Technical Data
P44x/EN TD/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.7
Page 23/30
Zero sequence Power Protection (since B1.0) Threshold Settings Setting
Range
Step Size
Po Status
Enabled/Disabled.
-
Time Delay Fact.
0 – 2s
0.200s
Fix Time Delay
0 – 10s
0.010s
IN current set
0.05 - 4 In
0.01 In
P0 Threshold
0.05IN - IN
0.1IN
6.8
Channel Aided Directional Earth Fault Protection
6.8.1
Threshold Settings Setting
Range
Step Size
Polarisation
Zero seq. / Neg. seq.
-
V> Voltage Set (Vn=100/120 V)
0.500 - 20 V
0.010 V
IN Forward
0.05 - 4 In
0.01 In
Teleprotection Time delay
0 - 10s
0.1s
Scheme logic
Shared / Blocking / Permissive
Tripping
Any Phase / Three Phases
6.9
Under Voltage Protection
6.9.1
Threshold Settings
6.9.2
Setting
Range
Step Size
V2 Voltage Set (Vn = 100/120V)
60 - 185V
1V
Time Delay Characteristics The Overvoltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay. The first stage has a time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or Definite Time. The second stage has an associated Definite Time delay setting. Each measuring element time delay can be blocked by the operation of a user defined logic (optical isolated) input. The inverse characteristic is defined by the following formula :
t=
K ( M − 1)
Where K
=
Time Multiplier Setting
T
=
Operating time in seconds
M
=
Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs)
Setting
Range
Step Size
DT setting
0 - 100s
0.01s
TMS Setting (K)
0.5 - 100s
0.5
Setting
Range
Step Size
VTS Time Delay
1.0 - 20s
1s
3 phase undervoltage threshold
10-70V
1V
VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit
0 - In
0.01In
Superimposed current Delta I>
0.01 - 5A
0.01 A
Definite time and TMS setting ranges 6.11
6.12
Voltage Transformer Supervision
Capacitive Voltage Transformer Supervision (since B1.0) Setting
Range
Step Size
CVTS status
Enabled / Disabled
CVTS VN>
0.500 - 22V
0.500V
CVTS Time Delay
0 – 300s
1s
Technical Data
P44x/EN TD/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.13
6.14
Page 25/30
Current Transformer Supervision Setting
Range
Step size
CTS VN< Inhibit
0.5 - 22V (for Vn = 100/120V)
0.5V
CTS IN> Set
0.08In - 4In
0.01In
CTS Time Delay
0 - 10s
1s
Undercurrent Element This element is used by the breaker fail and circuit breaker monitoring functions of the relay.
6.15
Name
Range
Step size
I< Current Set
0.05 – 3.2In
0.050In
Breaker Fail Timers (TBF1 and TBF2) There are two stages of breaker fail that can be used to re-trip the breaker and back trip in the case of a circuit breaker fail. The timers are reset if the breaker opens, this is generally detected by the undercurrent elements. Other methods of detection can be employed for certain types of trip (see Application notes Volume 1 Chapter 2). Timer
Setting range
Step
tBF1
0 to 10s
0.005s
tBF2
0 to 10s
0.005s
CBF non Current reset
I Live Line
30-120V
1V
V< Dead Bus
5-30V
1V
V> Live Bus
30-120V
1V
Diff Voltage
0.5-40V
0.1V
Diff Frequency
0.02-1Hz
0.01Hz
Diff Phase
5°-90°
2.5°
Bus-Line Delay
0.1 to 2s
0.1s
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring The relay can monitor the state of the circuit breaker using either a 52a or 52b signal, it is possible to select which of these is being used on the relay menu. If the menu is used to select the ‘Both 52a and 52b’ option is selected then a discrepancy alarm can be detected. If these contacts remain simultaneously open or simultaneously closed for >5s, then the CB Status alarm will be indicated.
Technical Data
P44x/EN TD/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.4
Page 29/30
Circuit Breaker Control Name
Range
CB Control by
Disabled/ Local/ Remote/ Local+Remote/ Opto/ Opto+local/ Opto+Remote/ Opto+Rem+local
Manual close pulse time
0.1 to 10s
0.01s
Trip pulse time
0.1 to 5s
0.01s
Man Close Delay
0.01 to 600s
0.01s
Healthy Windows
0.01 to 9999
0.01
C/S Window
0.01 to 9999
0.01
AR single pole
Disabled/Enabled
-
AR three pole
Disabled/Enabled
-
8.5
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
8.5.1
Maintenance alarm settings
8.5.2
Step size
Name
Range
Step size
I^ Maintenance
1 to 25000A
1
No. of CB Ops Maint
1- 10000
1
CB Time Maint
5 - 500ms
1ms
Name
Range
Step size
I^ threshold
1 to 25000
1
No. of CB Ops Lock
1- 10000
1
CB Time Lockout
5 - 500ms
1ms
Fault Freq Count
0 to 9999
1
Fault Freq Time
0 to 9999s
1s
Lockout reset by:
CB close, User Interface
Manual close reset delay
0.01 to 600s
Lockout Alarm Settings
0.01s
Summated broken current
Circuit breaker opening time
P44x/EN TD/E33
Technical Data
Page 30/30 8.6
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Programmable Logic The programmable logic is not editable from the relay menu, a dedicated support package is provided as part of the MiCOM S1 support software. This is a graphical editor for the programmable logic. The features of the programmable logic are more fully described within the application section of the user manual. As part of the logic each output contact has a programmable conditioner/timer, there are also eight general purpose timers for use in the logic. The output conditioners and the general-purpose timers have the following setting range:
8.7
Time
Range
Step size
t1 to t8
0 to 4 hours
0.001s
CT and VT Ratio Settings The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase currents. Primary range
Secondary range
Current transformer
1 - 30000 Amps step size 1 A
1 or 5 Amps
Voltage transformer
100 V - 1000 kV step size 1 V
80 - 140 V step size 1 V
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
INSTALLATION
Installation MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN IN/E33 Page 1/10
CONTENT 1.
RECEIPT OF RELAYS
3
2.
STORAGE
3
3.
UNPACKING
3
4.
RELAY MOUNTING
4
4.1
Rack mounting
5
4.2
Panel mounting
6
5.
RELAY WIRING
8
5.1
Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections
8
5.2
RS485 port
8
5.3
IRIG-B connections (if applicable)
9
5.4
RS232 port
9
5.5
Download/monitor port
9
5.6
Earth connection
9
P44x/EN IN/E33
Installation
Page 2/10
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
1.
Page 3/10
RECEIPT OF RELAYS Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D Protection & Control should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.
2.
STORAGE If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing it in the carton. To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side. Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency. Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between –25˚C to +70˚C.
3.
UNPACKING Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. NOTE:
With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Do not remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during transportation and storage and will be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being carried out at the same time as construction work.
P44x/EN IN/E33
Installation
Page 4/10
4.
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
RELAY MOUNTING MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found in the product publication. Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE (GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001). Note that the 60TE cover also fits the 80TE case size of the relay. The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are closed. If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.
P0146XXa
FIGURE 1 - LOCATION OF BATTERY ISOLATION STRIP If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in figure 1, ie. with the strip behind the battery with the red tab protruding.
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1
Page 5/10
Rack mounting MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number FX0021 001), as illustrated in figure 2. These frames have been designed to have dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to use. On a standard 483mm (19”) rack system this enables combinations of widths of case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side. P545 and P546 relays in 80TE cases are also available as direct 19” rack mounting ordering variants, having mounted flanges similar to those shown in figure 2. The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE:
Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting angles at each end of the tier.
P0147XXa
FIGURE 2 - RACK MOUNTING OF RELAYS Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting. Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
P44x/EN IN/E33
Installation
Page 6/10
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”. Case size summation
Blanking plate part number
5TE
GJ2028 001
10TE
GJ2028 002
15TE
GJ2028 003
20TE
GJ2028 004
25TE
GJ2028 005
30TE
GJ2028 006
35TE
GJ2028 007
40TE
GJ2028 008
TABLE 1 - BLANKING PLATES 4.2
Panel mounting The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit). These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104). NOTE:
Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front cover moulding if used.
Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of 2.5mm. For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a range of collars are available. Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel. NOTE:
It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets as this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from the panel in the future if repair is necessary.
If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529 IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the complete assembly.
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 7/10
Width
Single tier
Double tier
10TE
GJ9018 002
GJ9018 018
15TE
GJ9018 003
GJ9018 019
20TE
GJ9018 004
GJ9018 020
25TE
GJ9018 005
GJ9018 021
30TE
GJ9018 006
GJ9018 022
35TE
GJ9018 007
GJ9018 023
40TE
GJ9018 008
GJ9018 024
45TE
GJ9018 009
GJ9018 025
50TE
GJ9018 010
GJ9018 026
55TE
GJ9018 011
GJ9018 027
60TE
GJ9018 012
GJ9018 028
65TE
GJ9018 013
GJ9018 029
70TE
GJ9018 014
GJ9018 030
75TE
GJ9018 015
GJ9018 031
80TE
GJ9018 016
GJ9018 032
TABLE 2 - IP52 SEALING RINGS Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012, “MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions”.
P44x/EN IN/E33
Installation
Page 8/10
5.
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
RELAY WIRING This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
5.1
Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per relay terminal. If required, AREVA T&D Protection & Control can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100. Part number
Wire size
Insulation colour
ZB9124 901
0.25 – 1.65mm2 (22 – 16AWG)
Red
ZB9124 900
1.04 – 2.63mm2 (16 – 14AWG)
Blue
ZB9124 904
2.53 – 6.64mm2 (12 – 10AWG)
Uninsulated*
TABLE 3 - M4 90° CRIMP RING TERMINALS * To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping. The following minimum wire sizes are recommended: Current Transformers
2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx
1.5mm2
RS485 Port
See separate section
Other circuits
1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not preinsulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay. The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms. It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used. 5.2
RS485 port Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be: Each core:
16/0.2mm copper conductors PVC insulated
Nominal conductor area:
0.5mm2 per core
Screen:
Overall braid, PVC sheathed
Installation
P44x/EN IN/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3
Page 9/10
IRIG-B connections (if applicable) The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50Ω. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath.
5.4
RS232 port Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations.
5.5
Download/monitor port Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. Chapter 2, Section 3.7 of this manual details the pin allocations.
5.6
Earth connection Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is 2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used. NOTE:
To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor and the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipment's rating label
P44x/EN IN/E33
Installation
Page 10/10
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 1/54
CONTENT 1.
INTRODUCTION
3
2.
SETTING FAMILIARISATION
4
3.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
5
3.1
Minimum Equipment Required
5
3.2
Optional Equipment
5
4.
PRODUCT CHECKS
6
4.1
With the Relay De-energised
6
4.1.1
Visual Inspection
7
4.1.2
Current Transformer Shorting Contacts
8
4.1.3
External Wiring
9
4.1.4
Insulation
9
4.1.5
Watchdog Contacts
10
4.1.6
Auxiliary Supply
10
4.2
With the Relay Energised
10
4.2.1
Watchdog Contacts
10
4.2.2
Date and Time
10
4.2.3
With an IRIG-B signal
11
4.2.4
Without an IRIG-B signal
11
4.2.5
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
11
4.2.6
Field Voltage Supply
12
4.2.7
Input Opto-isolators
12
4.2.8
Output Relays
13
4.2.9
Rear Communications Port
15
4.2.10
Current Inputs
16
4.2.11
Voltage Inputs
16
5.
SETTING CHECKS
18
5.1
Apply Application-Specific Settings
18
5.2
Check Application-Specific Settings
18
5.3
Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation
19
5.3.1
Functional Tests : Start control & Distance characteristic limits
19
5.3.2
Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL)
34
5.3.3
Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST
35
5.3.4
Weak infeed mode test
35
5.3.5
Protection function during fuse failure
36
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 2/54
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
5.4
Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation
37
5.4.1
Connect the Test Circuit
37
5.4.2
Perform the Test
38
5.4.3
Check the Operating Time
38
5.5
Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle
39
6.
ON-LOAD CHECKS
40
6.1
Voltage Connections
40
6.2
Current Connections
41
7.
FINAL CHECKS
42
8.
MAINTENANCE
43
8.1
Maintenance Period
43
8.2
Maintenance Checks
43
8.2.1
Alarms
43
8.2.2
Opto-isolators
43
8.2.3
Output Relays
43
8.2.4
Measurement accuracy
43
8.3
Method of Repair
44
8.3.1
Replacing the Complete Relay
44
8.3.2
Replacing a PCB
45
8.4
Recalibration
52
8.5
Changing the battery
52
8.5.1
Instructions for Replacing The Battery
52
8.5.2
Post Modification Tests
53
8.5.3
Battery Disposal
53
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
1.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 3/54
INTRODUCTION The MiCOM P440 distance protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays. To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (Preferred method) Via the operator interface. To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specific settings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protection element. Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relay’s internal programmable scheme logic. Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter for completion as required. As the relay’s menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu is restored to the customer’s preferred language on completion. To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions, they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING, Cell Text]. For example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under the column heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would be given as [0001: SYSTEM DATA, Language]. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the ‘safety section’ and chapter P44x/EN IN, ‘installation’, of this manual.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 4/54
2.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
SETTING FAMILIARISATION When commissioning a MiCOM P440 relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. Chapter P44x/EN IT contains a detailed description of the menu structure of the relays. With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the [Enter] key are accessible. All menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared. Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
3.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING
3.1
Minimum Equipment Required
Page 5/54
Overcurrent test set with interval timer 110V ac voltage supply (if stage 1 of the overcurrent function is set directional) Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0250V respectively Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter) Phase angle meter Phase rotation meter NOTE: 3.2
Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional Equipment Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed) An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (For insulation resistance testing when required). A portable PC, with appropriate software (This enables the rear communications port to be tested if this is to be used and will also save considerable time during commissioning). KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter (if RS485 K-Bus port is being tested and one is not already installed). RS485 to RS232 converter (if RS485 Modbus port is being tested). A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 6/54
4.
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
PRODUCT CHECKS These product checks cover all aspects of the relay that need to be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by: •
Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (This requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay)
•
Extracting the settings from the relay itself (This again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software)
•
Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings as the relay’s menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.
If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password 2 should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to commencement of testing. NOTE:
4.1
In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from AREVA by quoting the serial number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to that relay and will not work on any other relay.
With the Relay De-energised The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block. Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may also be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test block. DANGER:
NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.1.1
Page 7/54
Visual Inspection Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
B
A
C
D
E
F
P3001ENa
FIGURE 1A - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 40TE CASE (P441)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
IRIG-B
TX RX
P3002ENa
FIGURE 1B - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 60TE CASE (P442)
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 8/54
A
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
D
C
B
1 2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
24
2
18
1
17
5
16
4
23
3
15
2
14
N
M
1
13
5
22
4
12
3
11
2
10
L
1
21
5
9
3
8
K
1
7
J
4
20
H
2
6
G
5
5
F
3
4
E 1
19
1
3
2
2
1
1
IRIG-B 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9 10
11
12
13
12
14
15
14
16
17
16
18
18
18
10
16
18
17
14
17 16
15
12
15 14
13
10
13 12
11
11 10
9
9
18
18
18
18
17
16
17
16
17
16
17
16
17
15
14
15
14
15
14
15
14
15
13
12
13
12
13
12
13
12
13
11
10
11
10
11
10
11
10
11
9
9
9
9
9
TX RX
P3003ENa
FIGURE 1C - REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 80TE CASE (P444) Current Transformer Shorting Contacts If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference C in figure 1) is disconnected from the current input PCB. The heavy duty terminal block is fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead screws. These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third and fourth, columns of terminals. NOTE:
The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
15
23
18
24
10
9
12
14 17
18
17
16
15
14
13
13
11
22
12
11
10
8
7
21
9
8
7
6
5
4
20
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
3
2
1
Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check that all the shorting switches being used are closed with a continuity tester. table 1 shows the terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.
16
4.1.2
Heavy duty terminal block
Medium duty terminal block P3004ENa
FIGURE 2 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR TERMINAL BLOCKS
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Current Input
Page 9/54 Shorting contact between terminals 1A CT’s
5A CT’s
IA
C3-C2
C1-C2
IB
C6-C5
C4-C5
IC
C9-C8
C7-C8
IM
C12-C11
C10-C11
TABLE 1 - CURRENT TRANSFORMER SHORTING CONTACT LOCATIONS 4.1.3
External Wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the AREVA order acknowledgement for the relay. If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the live side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5, 7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and 15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay’s positive and negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer’s normal practice.
4.1.4
Insulation Insulation resistance tests only need to be done during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they haven’t been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together. The main groups of relay terminals are: a)
Voltage transformer circuits.
b)
Current transformer circuits
c)
Auxiliary voltage supply.
d)
Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.
e)
Relay contacts.
f)
S485 communication port.
g)
Case earth.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the unit.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 10/54 4.1.5
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check that the normally closed watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 2 for a de-energised relay. Terminals
Contact State Relay De-energised
Relay Energised
F11-F12 J11-J12 N11-N12
(P441) (P442) (P444)
Closed
Open
F13-F14 J13-J14 N13-N14
(P441) (P442) (P444)
Open
Closed
TABLE 2 - WATCHDOG CONTACT STATUS 4.1.6
Auxiliary Supply The relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in table 3. Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Nominal Supply Rating
DC Operating Range
AC Operating Range
DC [AC rms] 24/54V
[-]
19 - 65V
-
48/110V
[30/100V]
37 - 150V
24 - 110V
110/250V
[100/240V]
87 - 300V
80 - 265V
TABLE 3 - OPERATIONAL RANGE OF AUXILIARY SUPPLY It should be noted that the relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply. DO NOT ENERGISE THE RELAY USING THE BATTERY CHARGER WITH THE BATTERY DISCONNECTED AS THIS CAN IRREPARABLY DAMAGE THE RELAY’S POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITRY. Energise the relay if the auxiliary supply is within the operating range. If an MMLG test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. 4.2
With the Relay Energised The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay. The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks.
4.2.1
Watchdog Contacts Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in table 3 for an energized relay.
4.2.2
Date and Time The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.3
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 11/54
With an IRIG-B signal (models P442 or P444 only) If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised. To allow the relay’s time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to ‘Enabled’. Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [0805: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Status] reads ‘Active’. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed. Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set manually in this cell. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay. Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
4.2.4
Without an IRIG-B signal If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell [0804: DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to ‘Disabled’. Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On reenergisation, the time in cell [0801: DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.
4.2.5
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. Control the PSL activated in the internal logic. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing required for that LED because it is known to be operational. Testing the alarm and out of service leds The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSIONING TESTS menu column. Set cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Enabled’. Check that the alarm and out of service LEDs illuminate. It is not necessary to return cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Disabled’ at this stage because test mode will be required for later tests. Testing the trip led The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later. Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 12/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Testing the user-programmable leds To test the user-programmable LEDs set cell [0F10: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test LEDs] to ‘Apply Test’. Check that all 8 LEDs on the right-hand side of the relay illuminate. 4.2.6
Field Voltage Supply The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V that should be used to energise the opto-isolated inputs. Measure the field voltage across the terminals given in table 4. Check that the field voltage is present at each positive and negative terminal and that the polarity is correct. Repeat for terminals 8 and 10. Supply rail
Terminals P441
P442
P444
+48 Vdc
F7 & F8
J7 & J8
N7 & N8
–48 Vdc
F9 & F10
J9 & J10
N9 & N10
TABLE 4 - FIELD VOLTAGE TERMINALS 4.2.7
Input Opto-isolators This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 8 opto-isolated inputs while P442 relays have 16 opto-isolated inputs and P444 relays have 24 opto-isolated inputs. The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested. The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in table 5. See hysteresis and settings about universal optos in chapter AP section 5. NOTE:
The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external 50V battery in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage otherwise damage to the relay may result.
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using cell [0020: SYSTEM DATA, Opto I/P Status], a ‘1’ indicating an energised input and a ‘0’ indicating a de-energised input. When each opto-isolated input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change to the value shown in table 5 to indicate the new state of the inputs. Apply field voltage to terminals P441
P442
P444
-ve
+ve
-ve
+ve
-ve
+ve
Opto input 1
D1
D2
D1
D2
D1
D2
Opto input 2
D3
D4
D3
D4
D3
D4
Opto input 3
D5
D6
D5
D6
D5
D6
Opto input 4
D7
D8
D7
D8
D7
D8
Opto input 5
D9
D10
D9
D10
D9
D10
Opto input 6
D11
D12
D11
D12
D11
D12
Opto input 7
D13
D14
D13
D14
D13
D14
Opto input 8
D15
D16
D15
D16
D15
D16
Opto input 9
E1
E2
E1
E2
Opto input 10
E3
E4
E3
E4
Opto input 11
E5
E6
E5
E6
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 13/54 Apply field voltage to terminals P441 -ve
P442 +ve
P444
-ve
+ve
-ve
+ve
Opto input 12
E7
E8
E7
E8
Opto input 13
E9
E10
E9
E10
Opto input 14
E11
E12
E11
E12
Opto input 15 (P442 only)
E13
E14
E13
E14
Opto input 16 (P442 only)
E15
E16
E15
E16
Opto input 17
F1
F2
Opto input 18
F3
F4
Opto input 19
F5
F6
Opto input 20
F7
F8
Opto input 21
F9
F10
Opto input 22
F11
F12
Opto input 23
F13
F14
Opto input 24
F15
F16
TABLE 5 - OPTO-ISOLATED INPUT TERMINALS 4.2.8
Output Relays This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P441 relays have 14 output relays , the P442 relays have 21 output relays and the P444 relays have 32 output relays. Ensure that the relay is still in test mode by viewing cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode]. The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for testing, set cell [0F0E: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Pattern] as shown in table 6. Connect an continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given in table 6. To operate the output relay set cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to ‘Apply Test’. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Reset the output relay by setting cell [0F0F: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Contact Test] to ‘Remove Test’. NOTE:
It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
Repeat the test for relays 2 to 14 for P441 relays or relays 2 to 21 for P442 relays or relays 2 to 32 for P444 relays.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 14/54 Output
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Monitor terminals P441
P442
P444
N/C
N/O
N/C
N/C
N/O
Relay 1
-
E1-E2
-
H1-H2
M1-M2
Relay 2
-
E3-E4
-
H3-H4
M3-M4
Relay 3
-
E5-E6
-
H5-H6
M5-M6
Relay 4
E7-E9
E8-E9
H7-H9
H8-H9
M7-M8
Relay 5
E10-E12
E11-E12
H10-H12
H11-H12
M9-M10
Relay 6
E13-E15
E14-E15
H13-H15
H14-H15
M11-M12
Relay 7
E16-E18
E17-E18
H16-H18
H17-H18
M13-M15
M14-M15
Relay 8
-
B1-B2
-
G1-G2
M16-M18
M17-M18
Relay 9
-
B3-B4
-
G3-G4
L1-L2
Relay 10
-
B5-B6
-
G5-G6
L3-L4
Relay 11
B7-B9
B8-B9
G7-G9
G8-G9
L5-L6
Relay 12
B10-B12
B11-B12
G10-G12
G11-G12
L7-L8
Relay 13
B13-B15
B14-B15
G13-G15
G14-G15
L9-L10
Relay 14
B16-B18
B17-B18
G16-G18
G17-G18
L11-L12
Relay 15
-
F1-F2
L13-L15
L14-L15
Relay 16
-
F3-F4
L16-L18
L17-L18
Relay 17
-
F5-F6
K1-K2
Relay 18
F7-F9
F8-F9
K3-K4
Relay 19
F10-F12
F11-F12
K5-K6
Relay 20
F13-F15
F14-F15
K7-K8
Relay 21
F16-F18
F17-F18
K9-K10
Relay 22
N/O
K11-K12
Relay 23
K13-K15
K14-K15
Relay 24
K16-K18
K17-K18
Relay 25
J1-J2
Relay 26
J3-J4
Relay 27
J5-J6
Relay 28
J7-J8
Relay 29
J9-J10
Relay 30
J11-J12
Relay 31
J13-J15
J14-J15
Relay 32
J16-J18
J17-J18
TABLE 6 - RELAY OUTPUT TERMINALS AND TEST PATTERN SETTINGS Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Disabled’.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 4.2.9
Page 15/54
Rear Communications Port This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
4.2.9.1
Courier Communications If a K-Bus to RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PC running the appropriate software to the incoming (remote from relay) side of the protocol converter. If a KITZ protocol converter is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PC to the type installed. In this case a KITZ protocol converter and portable PC running appropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relay’s K-Bus port. The terminal numbers for the relay’s K-Bus port are given in table 7. However, as the installed protocol converter is not being used in the test, only the correct operation of the relay’s K-Bus port will be confirmed. Connection
Terminal
K-Bus
Modbus or VDEW
P441
P442
P444
Screen
Screen
F16
J16
N16
1
+ve
F17
J17
N17
2
–ve
F18
J18
N18
TABLE 7 - RS485 TERMINALS Ensure that the communications baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those on the protocol converter (usually a KITZ but could be a SCADA RTU). The relay’s Courier address in cell [0E02: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] must be set to a value between 0 and 255. Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC. 4.2.9.2
Modbus Communications Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Modbus Master Station software to the relay’s RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter. The terminal numbers for the relay’s RS485 port are given in table 7. Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address], [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] and [0E07: COMMUNICATIONS, Parity] of the relay. Check that communications with this relay can be established.
4.2.9.3
IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) Communications If the relay has the optional fibre optic communications port fitted, the port to be used should be selected by setting cell [0E09: COMMUNICATIONS, Physical Link] to ‘Fibre Optic’ or ‘RS485’. IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local Master Station and this should be used to verify that the relay’s fibre optic or RS485 port, as appropriate, is working. Ensure that the relay address and baud rate settings in the application software are set the same as those in cells [0E03: COMMUNICATIONS, Remote Address] and [0E06: COMMUNICATIONS, Baud Rate] of the relay. Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can be established.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 16/54 4.2.10
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Current Inputs This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [0009: SYSTEM DATA, Frequency]. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to the each current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)
Apply current to 1A line CT
5A line CT
[0201: IA Magnitude]
C3-C2
C1-C2
[0203: IB Magnitude]
C6-C5
C4-C5
[0205: IC Magnitude]
C9-C8
C7-C8
[0207: IM Magnitude]
C12-C11
C10-C11
TABLE 8 - CURRENT INPUT TERMINALS The measured current values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in the ‘VT and CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 9). If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed should be equal to the applied current. The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)
Corresponding CT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)
[0201: IA Magnitude] [0203: IB Magnitude] [0205: IC Magnitude]
[0A07:Phase CT Primary] [0A08:Phase CT Sec'y]
[022F: IM Mutual Current Mag]
[0A0B:MComp/CT Primary] [0A0C: MComp/CT Sec'y]
TABLE 9 - CT RATIO SETTINGS 4.2.11
Voltage Inputs This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. Refer to table 8 for the corresponding reading in the relay’s MEASUREMENTS 1 column and record the value displayed. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)
Voltage applied To
[021A: VAN Magnitude]
C19-C22
[021C: VBN Magnitude]
C20-C22
[021E: VCN Magnitude] [022B: C/S Voltage Mag]
C21-C22 ∗
C23-C24
TABLE 10 - VOLTAGE INPUT TERMINALS ∗
Voltage reference for synchrocheck Can be PGnd or PP reference with VT bus side or VT line (see setting description in chapter AP section 4.4)
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 17/54
The measured voltage values on the relay will either be in primary or secondary volts. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied voltage multiplied by the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘VT and CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 11). If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the value displayed should be equal to the applied voltage. The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±2%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)
Corresponding VT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)
[021A: VAN Magnitude] [021C: VBN Magnitude] [021E: VCN Magnitude]
[0A01:Main VT Primary] [0A02:Main VT Sec'y]
[022B: C/S Voltage Mag]
[0A03:C/SVT Primary] [0A04: C/SVT Sec'y]
TABLE 11 - VT RATIO SETTINGS
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 18/54
5.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
SETTING CHECKS The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings) for the particular installation have been correctly applied to the relay. If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 5.1 and 5.2.
5.1
Apply Application-Specific Settings There are two methods of applying the settings: •
Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software (see compatibility with S1 version in chapter VC) via the relay’s front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). This method is the preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with which the relay is supplied are to be used then this is the only way of changing the settings. If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where programmable scheme logic changes are to be applied to the relay.
• 5.2
Enter them manually via the relay’s operator interface. This method is not suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.
Check Application-Specific Settings The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure they have been entered correctly. However, this is not considered essential if a customer-prepared setting file has been transferred to the relay using a portable PC. There are two methods of checking the settings: •
Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the front RS232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port (with a KITZ protocol converter connected). Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).
•
Step through the settings using the relay’s operator interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record.
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests. Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it is beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be performed, written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation of the application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who created it. These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with the diskette containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 19/54
5.3
Demonstrate Correct Distance Function Operation
5.3.1
Functional Tests : Start control & Distance characteristic limits Despite of working in 100% numeric technology some tests could be performed in order to control the good feature of the relay; regarding the different choices in the functions and settings (settings of protection (with S1/settings & records) and logical schemes (with S1/PSL Editor)) . Subsection 5.3.2. explains point by point the steps to follow for providing a complet control of every distance protection functions of the relay (with the factory’s settings & PSL : "P&C by default"). In case of relay’s or application’s failure : WARNING:
COME BACK TO THE BASIC CONFIGURATION (SETTINGS & PSL) THEN VALID THE TESTS FOLLOWING THE ENCLOSED DESCRIPTION (this manipulation can be achieved by lcd in front face (configuration/restore defaults/all settings+valid)) see chapter ap section 4.9/4.10 & 5 as well "test tools" for a diagnosis help in case of failing (method/event/disturbance records/zgraph)
Default Password if requested for validation of settings is : AAAA
N.B. :
5.3.1.1
Every action managed by a laptop, could be done as well by the LCD front panel (only PSL and Text Editor use a computer)
Measurements’ control : Before starting tests, perform the following injections on secondary side of the relay :
Currents TEST 1 Voltages
IA
0,2 IN
0°
IB
0,4 IN
- 120°
IC
0,8 IN
+ 120°
VAN
30 V
0°
VBN
40 V
- 120°
VCN
50 V
+ 120°
−
Control the displayed values in the relay’s front face (LCD) : "system/meas1"
−
Secondary values in amplitude and phase
−
Or primary values (control of ratios VT & CT) – If selected in MiCOM S1 – See Fig 3.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 20/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Control of ratios VT & CT
Control the measurement reference
W0001ENa
FIGURE 3 NB1 :
Control the measurement reference (ref. angle of phase shift) in : "Measurt set up/Measurement ref." (VA by default).
The monitoring can be selected also in MiCOM S1 for providing a polling of the network parameters (I/U/P/Q/f…) NB2 :
In LCD : IN=3I0 After this step the mistakes on phases orders, ratios of CT, VT and wiring (Analogic input only) will be detected.
NB3 :
See connections drawing in P44x/EN CO
NB4 :
See LCD structure in test tools
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 21/54
FIGURE 4 - MEASUREMENT 1/LCD MENU (see complete description of menu in chapter HI) Control of the polarisation of the protection : inject a three-phase symmetrical charge according to the following table :
Currents TEST 2 Voltages
IA
IN
20°
IB
IN
-100°
IC
IN
+140°
VAN
57 V
0°
VBN
57 V
-120°
VCN
57 V
+120°
−
If one phase is missing the output Fuse Failure alarm will pick up & the led general alarm in the front panel will light up (see FFU description P44x /EN AP)
−
According to the measurement mode chosen we will get
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 22/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 (S1/Measurement setup/Measurement mode):
Measurement mode
0
1
2
3
P
+
-
+
-
Q
-
-
+
+
Selected in S1 by:
W0002ENa
FIGURE 5
Mode 0
Mode 1
P
i u
i u
u
Mode 2
P
i u
u i
P
u
P u
i
i
Q i
i u
u
i Q
i
i u
u
Mode 3
u
Q i
u
i
u i
Q i
u
u i
P3014ENa
FIGURE 6 −
Control the signs of values P,Q to LCD ("Measurements 2 ") – settable with LCD (see figure 5) The primary side orientation remains previously points with a primary injection) See LCD Structure in chapter HI
to be achieved (repeat
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 23/54
MEASURE'T SETUP Default Display Description
Default Display Description Default Display Date and Time
Measurement Ref VB Measurement Ref VA
Measurement Ref VA
Default Display P-P
Measurement Ref IA
Default Display U - I Freq
Measurement Ref IB
Default Display Plant Reference
Local Values Secondary
Local Values Secondary
Measurt Mode
Measurt Mode 0
Local Values Primary
Remote Values Secondary
Remote Values Secondary
0 Measurt Mode 1
Demand Interval 30.00 mins
Remote Values Primary
Demand Interval 30.00 mins Demand Interval 29.00 mins
P3016ENa
FIGURE 7 - MEASUREMENT SETUP/LCD MENU
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 24/54 5.3.1.2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Default simulation principle To simulate a single-phase fault The distance protection detects a single-phase default in E if the impedance and phase of this point place it inside the characteristic. The relation of impedance and phase with the voltage and current injected is as follows : −
Fault Impedance Z = Vphase/Iphase ;
−
Fault Phase • = phase-shift(Vphase, Iphase) ;
−
The Vphase voltage has to remain lower than the rated voltage value
Test of the impedance for zone 1 : I1
= 1A
ϕ1
= line angle = 76°
V1 I1
= Zfault = Zd (1 + k0) + Rfault
Rfault = R loop
Distance X Xlim
E
Z -Rlim
ϕ
Resistance R Rlim P3017ENa
FIGURE 8 - CHARACTERISTIC’S POINT DETERMINATION (RLIM BIPHASE & SINGLEPHASE CAN BE DIFFERENT) The angle of Characteristic is: •
For phase to phase: Argument of the positive impedance of the line (Z1)
•
For phase to ground : Argument of 2Z1+Z0
Characteristic of the relay can be created and displayed with Zgraph (MiCOM Zgraph software is a tool delivered with the protection – available in the CD-ROM "MiCOM P440 User " ) – see the "test tools"
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 25/54
W0003ENa
FIGURE 9 - EXAMPLE OF ZGRAPH SCREEN (RIO FORMAT CAN BE CREATED AS WELL)
W0004ENa
FIGURE 10 - EVOLVING IMPEDANCE FROM THE LOAD AREA TO THE FINAL FAULT IMPEDANCE IN ZONE1 To simulate a default in a zone, it’s necessary to vary progressively the current to move the point from the load area inside the desired zone. A single-phase starting characteristic with different values of K0 can be created : (K0x = (Zx0 - Z1) /(3 Z1) (See P44x /EN AP). (In S1 there are up to four possibilities KZ1 & KZ2, KZp, KZ3/4) This solution is carried in case of the underground cable/overhead line section (KZ1 different from KZ2 = KZp = KZ3/4) where arguments between Z01 & Z02 can be very different (HV Line at 80° and cable at 45°). Nevertheless the most common injection devices don’t offer the possibility to manage several values of K0 (the same for ZGraph) ; so it will be necessary for an accurate control of zones limits,to generate several characteristics files (as much Rio file as KZ values – ref to ZGraph user ).
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 26/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
W0005ENa
FIGURE 11 - SINGLE CHARACTERISTIC WITH P FORWARD ZONE Z1, Z2, Z3, Zp, Z4
: limits of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4
R1G, R2G, R3G, RpG
: limits in resistance of zone 1, 2, 3, p, 4 for single-phase fault.
K01, K02, K03, K0p
:ground compensation coefficient of zone 1, 2, 3, p
Zone 1, 2, 3 & P can have different limit in resistance and ground coefficient. Zones 3 et 4 (Starting zone) have the same resistance sensitivity and ground compensation coefficient. The ground compensation coefficient depends of the line’s characteristic on each zone. 2x Z1+Zx0 where Zx0 is the zero sequence impedance for zone x 3 and Z1 is the positive impedance.
Line angle : ϕpg = Arg
Cover of zones Different lines angles for each single-phase characteristic zone can be defined. And, following the configuration of each zone, some intersections between zone could occur.
W0006ENa
FIGURE 12
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 27/54
In the characteristic above, the marked parts A, B et C are intersections between several zones. •
The surface A is considered as being in zone 1.
•
The surface B is not a part of the characteristic (no start element).
•
The surface C is not a part of the starting characteristic.(New logic will be implemented in next version A4.0 for keeping fwd Z1 detection in the surface C (even with a negative fault reactance value bigger than the reverse limit X4) )
Coherency: To have a homogeneous characteristic, it’s necessary that the characteristic’s different parameters respect the equations as follows: (No blocking coherency test is provided by the internal logic control of the relay) −
−
if zone P is a forward zone : −
Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Zp < Z3
−
tZ1 < tZ2 < tZp < tZ3
−
R1G ≤ R2G ≤ RpG ≤ R3G
−
R1Ph ≤ R2Ph ≤ RpPh ≤ R3Ph
if zone P is a reverse zone : −
Z1 < Z1ext < Z2 < Z3
−
Zp < Z4
−
tZ1 < tZ2 < tZ3
−
tZp < tZ4
−
R1G ≤ R2G ≤ R3G
−
RpG ≤ R4G
−
R1Ph ≤ R2Ph ≤ R3Ph
−
RpPh ≤ R4Ph
−
The Z minimum value measured by the relay is: 60 mohms (Z1mini adjusted in S1, is 1ohm with CT 1Amp & 200 mohms with CT 5Amp)
−
There is no limit for the R/X ratio, because a floating point processor is used for the R calculation & X calculation (separated dynamic range for each calculation). In consequence the limit will be given by the angle error of the CT.
For example in PUR with CT accuracy angle at 1° (for IN) it gives a R/X = 5,7 – for keeping 10% of error in the X1 measurement. •
Limit of R: min 0 /Max 80 ohms (CT 5Amp) – min 0/Max400 ohms (CT 1Amp)
•
Limit of X: min0,2/100 ohms (CT 5Amp) – min1/Max 500 ohms (CT 1Amp)
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 28/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
To simulate a two-phase fault The two-phase fault simulation principle is the same as the one used to simulate a singlephase fault but : −
the voltage reference is the line to line voltage between phases, Uab for example;
−
the reference current is the difference between the phases current, Ia - Ib for example; −
The fault impedance Z = (Uphase-phase/(Iphase1 - Iphase2)).
−
the R1M point (single phase) is replaced by the R1ph point.(Biphase)
Two-phase characteristic with reverse zone P:
W0007ENa
Fault simulation
U12 = 2 x Zd + Rfault I1
With : U12 I1 ϕ1
: fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle
Rfault = R loop For a triphase fault : Fault simulation
V1 Rfault = Zd + I1 2
With : V1 I1 ϕ1
: fault voltage phase-to-phase : fault current : fault angle Remark :
With z graph’s help a Rio format characteristic can be created. This Rio file can be loaded in a numeric injector which accept this kind of files. The active settings (distance elements) can be modified by Zgraph and relay can be upgraded with new distance parameters
For more precision refer to item: Test tools : "Z graph user "
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.1.3
Page 29/54
Control & Test of starting characteristics IN THIS PART – TESTS ARE DESCRIBED WITH THE DEFAULT PARAMETERS (AREVA T&D EAI ) Open the file corresponding to the MiCOM characteristic. (see item :test tools/S1 user) If none change have been achieved, we get those values (Zgraph screen):
W0008ENa
FIGURE 13 Control of single-phase fault characteristic’ CAUTION :
IF DIFFERENT K0 ARE USED – SEE § 5.3.1.2
1.
Energise MiCOM P440 with a healthy 3phase network (without unbalanced condition) with load (during a minimum time of 500 msec). This is for: – Enabling the use of deltas algorithms – Avoiding the start of SOTF logic (see SOTF logic description in P44x /EN AP)
2.
Reduce the current value to obtain a relation between V et I following the attached table (For Rlim – phase-shift at 0°, for Z limit – phase-shift corresponding to Z1 (in multiphase default) or corresponding to 2Z1+Z0 (in single fault).
3.
Check that the tripping order (DDB: Any trip / Any Trip A/ Any Trip B/ Any Trip C – see in the chapter AP section 6.3 ”output contact mapping”, the description of DDB for models 01 to 06) is transmitted when the concerned zone time delay is issued.(For distance scheme with transmission and all distance trip logic see in P44x /EN AP). NOTE :
The DDB signal any Trip A is a OR gate between Ext Trip A Int Trip A
4.
See as well the test report model provided in chapter RS Test tools.
5.
Control also in the PSL (programmable scheme logic) the tripping orders addressing (Any Trip is linked by default to the relay 7).
By default: see the wiring diagram in chapter CO (for assignment of inputs/outputs). Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), all or part of the 8 red led in the front panel could be assigned using the PSL.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 30/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Z1 DDB #191
Latching
LED 8 DDB #069
Z2 DDB #193
Latching
LED 7 DDB #070
T2 DDB #198
NonLatching
LED 8 DDB #071
Z1
Z2
T2 P3018ENa
FIGURE 14 If Led are latched, the reset latch could be activated by a dedicated PSL, to avoid useless keyboard access: during the tests : Any Start DDB #253
Reset Latches DDB #118
P3019ENa
FIGURE 15 Usefultip: - For controlling the logic level of internal datas (DDB cells), monitor bit control can be used in "commissioning Test/Opto/Relay/Test port status/Led status/Monitor bit1 to bit 8".Any cells from the DDB can be assigned and then displayed as 1 of the 8 bits.(See User Tools ) NB1:
See LCD structure in chapter HI
COMMISSION TESTS Opto I/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1 64
Relay O/P Status 0000000000100 Monitor Bit 1
Monitor Bit 1 64
Test port Status 00000000
64 Monitor Bit 1 64
Monitor Bit 2
Monitor Bit 2
65
65 LED Status 00000000 Monitor Bit 8
Monitor Bit 8 71
71
P3020ENa
FIGURE 16 - LCD MENU FOR A CONTROL OF INPUT/OUTPUT/ & MONITOR BITS CONTROL
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 31/54
Test point B :Bi M :mono
I,V phase shift (I is behind V)
Tripping time
R1 B
0°
T1
R1 M
0°
T1
R2 B
0°
T2
R2 M
0°
T2
Rp B
0°
Tp
Rp M
0°
Tp
R3 B
0°
T3
R3 M
0°
T3
- R Lim = -R3
0°
T4
Z1 B
Arg Zd
T1
Z1 M
Arg (2Zd+Z0)
T1
Z2 B
Arg Zd
T2
Z2 M
Arg (2Zd+Z0)
T2
Zp B
Arg Zd
Tp
Zp M
Arg (2Zd+Z0)
Tp
Z3 B
Arg Zd
T3
Z3 M
Arg (2Zd+Z0)
T3
Z4 B
Arg Zd
T4
Z4 M
Arg (2Zd+Z0)
T4
TABLE 12 - PARAMETERS OF ZONE TO TEST (ZP CAN BE REVERSE OR FORWARD / EACH ZONES CAN BE ENABLE OR DISABLE – Z IS ALWAYS ACTIVATED) NB :
R3 represents the starting limit on R axis (detection sensitivity of resistive defaults – The starting element for phase/ground can be superior to the phase/phase). If the reverse zone has been deactivated (Z4), it still exists a no-tripping zone (up to version A3.2 & 2.10) in the 4th quadrant below the R axis.
Zone has been deactivated (Z4)
W0009ENa
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 32/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
W0010ENa
If Z3 is deactivated, the resistance limits R3-R4 are not more visible in S1. NOTE :
All other characteristic point can be tested after having calculated the impedance and the phase shift between U et I.
NOTE :
All these examples use the default settings.
W0011ENa
FIGURE 17 - EXAMPLE : AN- LIM Z1 VAN/IA = Zf =Z1(1+K01)
40V/2A (phase shift of –70°) =20Ω = Z1(1+1)
Lim Z1=10Ω (si KO1=1)
W0012ENa
FIGURE 18 - EXAMPLE : AB - LIMR2 VAB = 2 sin 34,72° * 35,12=40v / IAB=2A UAB/IA (in phase) =Rf=20Ω=LimR2
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 33/54
W0013ENa
FIGURE 19 - EXAMPLE : ABC-LIMZ4 (REVERSE) VAN/IAN = Zf=Rf=20V/0,500mA=40Ω=Lim Z4 with angle(VAN/IAN)=70°-180°=-110° NOTE :
The simulator use generating transients superior to 0,2 In on currents when fault condition generation can induce mistake about the directional calculation with algorithms "Deltas". This mistake is du to simulator boxes which not always reflect the real conditions of fault appearance during the transient condition. To avoid this trouble during the starting zones checking we advice you to inhibit algorithms "Deltas" during the characteristics path by setting T1 at 50ms (beyond 40ms, algorithms "Deltas" are no more valid). It is the case about numeric injection boxes.
NOTE :
Control in the injection device, if any possibility of DC component could be chosen to force the start of the faulty current at 0 (If not model network could be not realistic)
Z3
Z2
Z1
- Rlim
R1
R2
R3
-Zp
W0014ENa
FIGURE 20 - POINTS LIMIT OF THE CHARACTERISTIC TO BE TESTED (WITH ZP SELECTED AS A REVERSE ZONE)
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 34/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
5.3.2
Distance scheme test (if validated in S1 & PSL)
5.3.2.1
Control •
The type of distance scheme enable in S1
•
The DDB cells assigned for distance scheme
•
Ref to the description feature in P44x /EN AP item 2.4 & 2.5:
⇒
Settings in S1
⇒
DDB cells
⇒
Internal logic in A2.10 & A3.2 REMINDER:
NOTE :
General equation to the tripping in distance protection since A2.9/A3.1 – From A2.10/A3.2 could be found in the Chap EN AP – item 2.5 Before tests, control the input presence /Output in PSL (See chapter AP section 6.2 & 6.3) linked to the selected teleaction scheme (DDB : DistCR/Dist CS/).Control as well the I/O condition change (on LCD in FAV in "system ")
Input :(PSL by default "P&C ") WARNING :
Output : (PSL by default "P&C ")
TAKE CARE ABOUT THE CHANGEMENT OF GROUP BY OPTOS – IF SELECTED IN S1 (OPTO 1 & 2 IN THAT CASE SWITCHING GROUPS BY OPTOS) – IF USED FOR SWITCHING GROUP (OPTO 1 & 2 MUST BE ABSENT FROM THE PSL)
Opto Label 01 DDB #032
DEF. Chan Recv DDB #097
Opto Label 01 DDB #032
DEF. Chan Recv DDB #096
Opto Label 02 DDB #033
DIST. COS DDB #099
Opto Label 02 DDB #033
DIST. COS DDB #098
Signal Send (Dist + DEF) DIST Sig Send DDB #178 DIST Sig Send DDB #207
0
1
Relay Label 05 DDB #004
Pick-Up 0
P3021ENa
1.
From MiCOM S1, select a one of the mode in the table 5.6 in P44x /EN AP (last column).
2.
Implement the indicated default in the panel first column , The carrier signal input being activated (with TAC).
3.
Check the tripping contact have been energised at the issue of the indicated time delay indicated in the same column (With TAC).
4.
Repeat step 2 and 3 but without teleaction input and by checking the indicated time delay in the panel’s 2nd column (Without TAC).
Repeat step 2 and 4 for the others zones defaults by checking, whatever the teleaction input condition, the associated time delays to every zones are not modified (according to the 4th column equations) NOTE :
– TAC can be simulated by inverting the opto. – TAC transmissions can also be checked by generating defaults according to the 3rd column. – To make easy the relay I/O control condition, the LEDs affectation in PSL can be modified. Another possibility is in S1 – See Testing tools (monitor bit control).
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.3.3
Page 35/54
Loss of guard/loss of carrier TEST If this function have been validated in S1 (See chap P44x /EN AP):
TEST : Follow the truth table in P44x /EN AP item 2.6.4 NOTE : 5.3.4
In case of TAC loss the scheme Z1X(out fail) will be applied if selected in S1
Weak infeed mode test From MiCOM S1 (If Permissive schemes validated in S1 :4 possible choices):fig winf1
FIG WINF2
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 36/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Put into service the weak infeed mode (Possibility of Single pole except for P441) ; 1.
Inhibit tripping authorisation and phase selection.
2.
Activate the teleaction input.
3.
Check : - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the tripping contact is not activated.
From MiCOM S1, validate the three-phase authorisation.
FIGURE 21 1.
Activate the teleaction input.
2.
Check: - the teleaction signal is activated ; - the tripping contacts closing.
From MiCOM S1, validate the minimum voltage phase selection, set under voltage threshold to 0,4 Vn, put VB = -VC = Vn, validate the single phase tripping authorisation.
5.3.5
1.
Activate the teleaction input.
2.
Check : - the teleaction transmission signal is activated; - the protection trips the phase A single phase.
Protection function during fuse failure See internal logic description in P44x /EN AP – item 4.2 Relay locking (1 or 2 phases loss) 1.
Supply MiCOM P440 with a "healthy" network with charge:
2.
Take off the A phase supply .((V0) & (/I0) creation)
3.
Check : - the fuse failure sign is activated at the end of the time delay sign; - The protection starting and tripping sign are not activated.
Relay unlocking 1.
Keep the A phase supply cut and make a fault (Single or two) of which the fault current (IR>3I0) is superior to the programmed threshold.(I2 or I0)
2.
Check the tripping contact is activated.
Relay locking (3 phases loss) 1.
Repeat the 1 then open the 3 voltages channels without creating delta I. Check as in 3
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 37/54
Outside sign : 1.
Polarised the input : and check the outputs change condition :
Sign repercussions : The sign (VT fail alarm) fall if :
MCB/VTS Line DDB #101
VTS Fast DDB #263
MCB/VTS Bus DDB #100
VT Fail Alarm DDB #132 P3022ENa
Fuse_Failure = 0 and INP_FFUS_Line = 0 and (All Pole Dead Or healthy network) All Pole Dead : No current And no voltage on the line or open circuit-breaker Healthy network : Rated voltage on the line And
5.4
−
No zero sequence voltage and current And
−
No starting And
−
No pumping
Demonstrate Correct Overcurrent Function Operation This test, performed on stage 1 of the overcurrent protection function in setting group 1, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-specific settings. It is not considered necessary to check the boundaries of operation where cell [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ as the test detailed already confirms the correct functionality between current and voltage inputs, processor and outputs and earlier checks confirmed the measurement accuracy is within the stated tolerance.
5.4.1
Connect the Test Circuit Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an I>1 trip occurs by viewing the relay’s programmable scheme logic. The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay allocations will still be applicable. If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on ‘A’ phase faults should be used. If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme logic, output relay 3 should be used for the test as it operates for any trip condition. The associated terminal numbers can be found either from the external connection diagram (P44x/EN CO) or table 5. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer. Connect the current output of the test set to the ‘A’ phase current transformer input of the relay (terminals C3 and C2 where 1A current transformers are being used and terminals C1 and C2 for 5A current transformers).
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 38/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
If [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] is set to ‘Directional Fwd’, the current should flow out of terminal C2 but into C2 if set to ‘Directional Rev’. If cell [351D: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, VCO Status] is set to ‘Enabled’ (overcurrent function configured for voltage controlled overcurrent operation) or [3502: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Direction] has been set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C19 and C22. Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay. NOTE:
5.4.2
If the timer does not start when the current is applied and stage 1 has been set for directional operation, the connections may be incorrect for the direction of operation set. Try again with the current connections reversed.
Perform the Test Ensure that the timer is reset. Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [3503: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 Current Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
5.4.3
Check the Operating Time Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in table 13. NOTE:
Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times given in table 13 are for a time multiplier or time dial setting of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in table 13 must be multiplied by the setting of cell [3505: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, I>1 TMS] for IEC and UK characteristics or cell [3506: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time Dial] for IEEE and US characteristics. In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the relay’s acceptable range of operating times. For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Characteristic
Operating Time at twice current setting and time multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0 Nominal (Seconds)
Range (Seconds)
DT
[3504: I>1 Time Delay] setting
Setting ±2%
IEC S Inverse
10.03
9.53 - 10.53
IEC V Inverse
13.50
12.83 - 14.18
IEC E Inverse
26.67
24.67 - 28.67
UK LT Inverse
120.00
114.00 - 126.00
IEEE M Inverse
0.64
0.61 - 0.67
IEEE V Inverse
1.42
1.35 - 1.50
IEEE E Inverse
1.46
1.39 - 1.54
US Inverse
0.46
0.44 - 0.49
US ST Inverse
0.26
0.25 - 0.28
TABLE 13 - CHARACTERISTIC OPERATING TIMES FOR I>1
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 5.5
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 39/54
Check Trip and Auto-reclose Cycle If the autoreclose function is being used, the circuit breaker trip and autoreclose cycle can be tested automatically at the application-specific settings. To test the first autoreclose cycle, set cell [0F11: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Autoreclose] to “3 Pole Test”. The relay will perform a trip/reclose cycle. Repeat this operation to test the subsequent autoreclose cycles. Check all output relays used for circuit breaker tripping and closing, blocking other devices, etc. operate at the correct times during the trip/close cycle.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 40/54
6.
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
ON-LOAD CHECKS Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant being protected.
6.1
Voltage Connections Using a multimeter measure the voltage transformer secondary voltages to ensure they are correctly rated. Check that the system phase rotation is correct using a phase rotation meter. Compare the values of the secondary phase voltages with the relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary voltages. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘VT & CT RATIOS’ menu column (see table 14). Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Voltage
Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)
Corresponding VT Ratio (in ‘VT and CT RATIO column (0A) of menu)
VAB
[0214: VAB Magnitude]
[0A01: Main VT Primary] [0A02: Main VT Sec'y]
VBC
[0216: VBC Magnitude]
VCA
[0218: VCA Magnitude]
VAN
[021A: VAN Magnitude]
VBN
[021C: VBN Magnitude]
VCN
[021E: VCN Magnitude]
VCHECKSYNC
[022B: C/S Voltage Mag]
[0A03: C/S VT Primary] [0A04: C/S VT Sec'y]
TABLE 14 - MEASURED VOLTAGES AND VT RATIO SETTINGS
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 6.2
Page 41/54
Current Connections Measure the current transformer secondary values for each using a multimeter connected in series with corresponding relay current input. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the phase angle between the current and voltage, either against a phase meter already installed on site and known to be correct or by determining the direction of power flow by contacting the system control centre. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents and phase angle with the relay’s measured values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column. NOTE:
Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by temporarily disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these current transformer secondary windings.
If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The relay values should be within 1% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Secondary’, the currents displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer ratio set in ‘VT & CT RATIOS’ menu column. Again the relay values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 42/54
7.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
FINAL CHECKS The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell [0F0D: COMMISSIONING TESTS, Test Mode] is set to ‘Disabled’. If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using cell [0608: CB CONDITION, Reset All Values]. If the required access level is not active, the relay will prompt for a password to be entered so that the setting change can be made. If a MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace the MMLG cover so that the protection is put into service. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
8.
MAINTENANCE
8.1
Maintenance Period
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 43/54
It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D Protection & Control receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P440 distance relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact. If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customer’s organisation then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular program. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:
8.2
•
the operating environment
•
the accessibility of the site
•
the amount of available manpower
•
the importance of the installation in the power system
•
the consequences of failure
Maintenance Checks Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself). BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE ‘SAFETY SECTION’ AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, ‘INSTALLATION’, OF THIS MANUAL.
8.2.1
Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
8.2.2
Opto-isolators The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their energisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.5 of this chapter.
8.2.3
Output Relays The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.6 of this chapter.
8.2.4
Measurement accuracy If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be compared with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performed correctly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of this chapter. Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay terminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Sections 4.2.8 and 4.2.9 of this chapter. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 44/54 8.3
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Method of Repair If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found in Chapter P44x/EN PR, ‘Problem Analysis’. The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs. However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring. Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated. BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE ‘SAFETY SECTION’ AND CHAPTER P44x/EN IN, ‘INSTALLATION’, OF THIS MANUAL. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
8.3.1
Replacing the Complete Relay The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay. NOTE:
The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal block is removed.
Disconnect the relay earth connection from the rear of the relay. There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty, which are fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws. NOTE:
The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal connectors. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers fitted and open. IF THE TOP AND BOTTOM ACCESS COVERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE SMALLER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE FRONT PANEL ON THE RELAY. Withdraw the relay from the panel, rack, etc. carefully because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth, IRIG-B and fibre optic connections are replaced. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2
Page 45/54
Replacing a PCB If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to Chapter P44x/EN PR, ‘Problem Analysis’, to help determine which PCB has become faulty. To replace any of the relay’s PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel. Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must be removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated. Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE cases the access covers have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when the access covers are opened by more than 90°, thus allowing their removal. If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do this is given in Chapter P44x/EN IT, ‘Introduction’. By slightly bending the access covers at one end, the end pivot can be removed from its socket and the access cover removed to give access to the screws that fasten the front panel to the case. The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case, one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE case has an additional two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate. Undo and remove the screws. DO NOT REMOVE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS WHICH ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE ACCESS COVERS ARE FITTED AND OPEN. THESE SCREWS HOLD THE RELAY IN ITS MOUNTING (PANEL OR CUBICLE). When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled forward and separated from the metal case. Caution should be observed at this stage because the front panel is connected to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable. The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel. F
Power supply board
E
Relay board
Power supply module
D
Input board
C
Transformer board
Input module
B
A
Not used
IRIG-B board
P0150ENa
FIGURE 22 - P441 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 46/54 J
Power supply board
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 H
Relay board
G
F
Relay board
Opto board
E
Not used
D
C
Input board
Transformer board
B
Not used
A
IRIG-B board
Input module
Power supply module
P0151ENa
FIGURE 23 - P442 PCB/MODULE LOCATIONS (VIEWED FROM FRONT) The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. figure 22 and figure 23 show the PCB locations for the distance relays in size 40TE (P441) and size 60TE (P442) cases respectively. The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors. The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a rear terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are labelled from right to left. NOTE:
To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of an identical part number. table 15 lists the part numbers of each PCB type.
PCB
Part Number
Power Supply Board (24/54V dc) (48/125V dc) (110/250V dc)
ZN0001 001 ZN0001 002 ZN0001 003
Relay ETOpto Board
ZN0002 001
Input ETOpto Board
ZN0005 001
Opto Board
ZN0005 002
IRIG-B Board (IRIG-B input only) (Fibre optic port only) (Both)
ZN0007 001 ZN0007 002 ZN0007 003
Co-processor board
ZN0003 003 TABLE 15 - PCB PART NUMBERS
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.1
Page 47/54
Replacement of the main processor board The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all the other PCBs. Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove the six screws from the metallic screen, as shown in figure 24. Remove the metal plate. There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment moulding, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws. The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.
P3007XXa
FIGURE 24 - FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the reverse procedure, ensuring that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main processor board and all eight screws are re-fitted. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy of the applicationspecific settings is available on disk. Although this is not essential, it can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protection is out of service. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 48/54 8.3.2.2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Replacement of the IRIG-B board Depending on the model number of the relay, the IRIG-B board may have connections for IRIG-B signals, IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications, both or not be present at all. To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay. The module is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay, one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in figure 25. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
IRIG-B
TX RX
P3008XXa
FIGURE 25 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR IRIG-B BOARD Gently pull the IRIG-B board forward and out of the case. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 26 illustrates the layout of the IRIG-B board with both IRIG-B and IEC60870-5-103 options fitted (ZN0007 003). The other versions (ZN0007 001 and ZN0007 002) use the same PCB layout but with less components fitted.
ZN0007
C
SERIAL No.
P3009XXa
FIGURE 26 - TYPICAL IRIG-B BOARD The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. Reconnect all IRIG-B and/or IEC60870-5-103 connections at the rear of the relay.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 49/54
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.3
Replacement of the input module The input module comprises of two boards fastened together, the transformer board and the input board. The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible from the front of the relay, as shown in figure 27. Remove these screws carefully as they are not captive in the front plate of the module.
Input module
Handle
P3010ENa
FIGURE 27 - LOCATION OF SECURING SCREWS FOR INPUT MODULE On the right-hand side of the analogue input module there is a small metal tab which brings out a handle. Grasping this handle firmly, pull the module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of two terminal blocks, one medium duty and one heavy duty. NOTE:
Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it will suddenly come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks has been overcome. This is particularly important with loose relays as the metal case will need to be held firmly whilst the module is withdrawn.
Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all the relay’s input voltage and current transformers. The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are re-fitted. NOTE:
The transformer and input boards within the module are calibrated together with the calibration data being stored on the input board. Therefore it is recommended that the complete module is replaced to avoid on-site recalibration having to be performed.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 50/54 8.3.2.4
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Replacement of the power supply board The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM distance relays. Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks. The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated by pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid damaging the interboard connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs towards the front of the power supply module. The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 28 illustrates the layout of the power supply board for all voltage ratings.
SERIAL No.
ZN0001
D
P3011XXa
FIGURE 28 - TYPICAL POWER SUPPLY BOARD Re-assemble the module with a replacement board ensuring the inter-board connectors are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are securely located in their respective holes in each PCB. Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter.
Commissioning
P44x/EN CM/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 8.3.2.5
Page 51/54
Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in 8.3.2.4 above. The relay board is the one with the board with holes cut in it to allow the transformer and two large electrolytic capacitors to protrude through. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 illustrates the layout of the relay board.
1 2 3 4
PL2
ZN0002
D
SERIAL No.
P3012XXa
FIGURE 29 - TYPICAL RELAY BOARD Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in the relay case. Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.3.2.6
Replacement of the extra relay board (P442 1 P444 only) The P442 distance relay has two additional boards to the P441 and the P444 four additional boards to the P441. Some of these boards provides extra output relays and opticallyisolated inputs. To remove it, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case. If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced. To help identify that the correct board has been removed, figure 29 and figure 30 illustrate the layout of the relay and Opto boards respectively. The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 8.3.2. After refitting and closing the access covers on case sizes 60TE, press at the location of the hingeassistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 52/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P3013XXa
FIGURE 30 - TYPICALOPTO BOARD Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 7 inclusive of this chapter. 8.4
Recalibration Recalibration is not usually required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of the two boards in the input module, the replacement of which directly affect the calibration. Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipment with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted to an approved service centre.
8.5
Changing the battery Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained include event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure. This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as part of the relay’s continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition. If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the battery, but do not replace with a new battery.
8.5.1
Instructions for Replacing The Battery Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay. Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize the battery free. Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket. NOTE:
Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.
Commissioning MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN CM/E33 Page 53/54
Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the bottom access cover. 8.5.2
Post Modification Tests To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads ‘Healthy’.
8.5.3
Battery Disposal The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
P44x/EN CM/E33
Commissioning
Page 54/54
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
P44x/EN RS/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
COMMISSIONING TEST & RECORD SHEETS
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN RS/E33
Page 1/10
CONTENT 1.
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD
3
1.1
Product Checks
3
1.1.1
With the Relay De-energised
3
1.1.2
With the Relay Energised
4
1.2
Setting Checks
9
1.2.1
Application-specific function settings applied?
9
1.2.2
Application-specific function settings verified?
9
1.2.3
Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested?
9
1.2.4
Protection Function Timing Tested?
9
1.2.5
Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked
9
1.3
On-load Checks
9
1.3.1
VT wiring checked?
9
1.3.2
CT wiring checked ?
10
1.4
Final Checks
10
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
Page 2/10
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
1.
Page 3/10
COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD Date
Engineer
Station
Circuit
System Frequency Front Plate Information Distance protection relay
P441/P442/P444*
Model number Serial number Rated Current In Rated Voltage Vn Auxiliary Voltage Vx *Delete as appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed?
1.1
Product Checks
1.1.1
With the Relay De-energised
1.1.1.1
Visual Inspection Relay damaged?
Yes/No*
Rating information correct for installation?
Yes/No*
Case earth installed?
Yes/No*
1.1.1.2
Current transformer shorting contacts close?
1.1.1.3
External Wiring
1.1.1.4
Yes/No*
Yes/No/Not checked*
Wiring checked against diagram?
Yes/No*
Test block connections checked?
Yes/No/na*
Insulation resistance >100MΩ at 500V dc
Yes/No/Not tested*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
Page 4/10 1.1.1.5
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply off) Terminals 11 and 12
Contact closed? Contact resistance
Terminals 13 and 14
Contact open?
Measured Auxiliary Supply
1.1.2
With the Relay Energised
1.1.2.1
Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply on)
1.1.2.4
Yes/No*
Terminals 11 and 12
Contact open?
Open/Closed*
Terminals 13 and 14
Contact closed?
Open/Closed*
Contact resistance
1.1.2.3
___Ω/Not measured*
______V ac/dc*
1.1.1.6
1.1.2.2
Yes/No*
____Ω/Not measured*
Date and Time Clock set to local time?
Yes/No*
Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed?
Yes/No*
Light Emitting Diodes Relay healthy (green) LED working?
Yes/No*
Alarm (yellow) LED working?
Yes/No*
Out of service (yellow) LED working?
Yes/No*
Trip (red) LED working?
Yes/No*
All 8 programmable LEDs working?
Yes/No*
Field supply voltage Value measured between terminals 7 and 9
______V dc
Value measured between terminals 8 and 10
______V dc
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 1.1.2.5
1.1.2.6
Page 5/10
Input Opto-isolators Opto input 1 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 2 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 3 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 4 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 5 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 6 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 7 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 8 working?
Yes/No*
Opto input 9 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 10 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 11 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 12 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 13 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 14 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 15 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 16 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 17 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 18 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 19 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 20 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 21 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 22 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 23 working?
Yes/No/na*
Opto input 24 working?
Yes/No/na*
Output Relays Relay 1
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 2
____Ω/Not measured*
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 3
____Ω/Not measured*
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 4
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 5
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Yes/No* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
Page 6/10 Relay 6
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Working? Contact resistance
Relay 7
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 8
Yes/No*
Yes/No* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 9
____Ω/Not measured*
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 10
____Ω/Not measured*
Working?
Yes/No*
Contact resistance Relay 11
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 12
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 19
Yes/No*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 18
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 17
(N/O)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 16
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 15
(N/C)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 14
Yes/No*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 13
____Ω/Not measured*
Yes/No/na* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Yes/No/na* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Relay 20
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 21
Yes/No/na* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured* Yes/No/na*
(N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 32
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 31
(N/O)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 30
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 29
(N/C)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 28
Yes/No/na*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 27
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 26
(N/O)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 25
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 24
(N/C)
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 23
Yes/No/na*
Working? Contact resistance
Relay 22
Page 7/10
Yes/No/na* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
Working? Contact resistance
Yes/No/na* (N/C)
____Ω/Not measured*
(N/O)
____Ω/Not measured*
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
Page 8/10 1.1.2.7
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Rear Communications Port Communication standard
K-Bus/Modbus/ IEC608705-103*
Communications established?
Yes/No*
Protocol converter tested? 1.1.2.8
Yes/No/na*
Current Inputs Displayed Current
1.1.2.9
Primary/Secondary* _______A/na*
Phase CT Ratio
[ Phase CT Primary] [ Phase CT Sec' y]
_______A/na*
Mutual CT Ratio
[ Mutual CT Primary] [ Mutual CT Sec' y]
Input CT
Applied value
Displayed value
IA
_______A
_______A
IB
_______A
_______A
IC
_______A
_______A
IM
_______A
_______A
Voltage Inputs Displayed Voltage
Primary/Secondary* _______V/na*
Main VT Ratio
[ Main VT Primary] [ Main VT Sec' y]
_______V/na*
C/S VT Ratio
[ C/S VT Primary] [ C/S VT Secondary]
Input VT
Applied value
Displayed value
Va
_______V
_______V
Vb
_______V
_______V
Vc
_______V
_______V
C/S Voltage
_______V/na*
_______V
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Page 9/10
1.2
Setting Checks
1.2.1
Application-specific function settings applied?
Yes/No*
Application-specific programmable scheme logic settings applied?
Yes/No/na*
If settings applied using a portable computer and software, which software and version was used?
__________________
1.2.2
Application-specific function settings verified?
Yes/No/na*
1.2.3
Application-specific programmable scheme logic tested?
Yes/No/na*
1.2.4
Protection Function Timing Tested? Overcurrent type
Yes/No*
(cell [3502 I>1 Direction])
Directional /Non-directional*
Applied voltage
_________V/na*
Applied current
_________A
Expected operating time
_________s
Measured operating time
_________s
1.2.5
Trip and Auto-Reclose Cycle Checked
Yes/No/na*
1.3
On-load Checks Test wiring removed?
Yes/No/na*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked?
Yes/No/na*
On-load test performed? 1.3.1
Yes/No*
VT wiring checked?
Yes/No/na*
Phase rotation correct?
Yes/No*
Displayed Voltage
Primary/Secondary* _______V/na*
Main VT Ratio
[Main VT Primary] [Main VT Sec' y]
_______V/na*
C/S VT Ratio
[C/S VT Primary] [C/S VT Secondary]
Voltages
Applied value
Displayed value
Va
_______V
_______V
Vb
_______V
_______V
Vc
_______V
_______V
C/S Voltage
_______V/na*
_______V
P44x/EN RS/E33
Commissioning Test & Record Sheets
Page 10/10 1.3.2
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
CT wiring checked ?
Yes/No/na*
CT polarities correct ?
Yes/No*
Displayed Current
1.4
Primary/Secondary* _______A/na*
Phase CT Ratio
[Phase CT Primary] [Phase CT Sec' y]
_______A/na*
Mutual CT Ratio
[Mutual CT Primary] [Mutual CT Sec' y]
Currents
Applied value
Displayed value
IA
_______A
_______A
IB
_______A
_______A
IC
_______A
_______A
IM
_______A
_______A
Final Checks Test wiring removed ?
Yes/No/na*
Disturbed customer wiring re-checked ?
Yes/No/na*
Circuit breaker operations counter reset ?
Yes/No/na*
Current counters reset ?
Yes/No/na*
Event records reset ?
Yes/No*
Fault records reset ?
Yes/No*
Disturbance records reset ?
Yes/No*
Alarms reset ?
Yes/No*
LEDs reset ?
Yes/No*
Commissioning Engineer
Customer Witness
Date
Date
Connection Diagrams
P44x/EN CO/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Connection Diagrams MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
P44x/EN CO/E33 Page 1/12
CONTENT 1.
MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
3
2.
MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
4
3.
MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
5
4.
MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
6
5.
MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
7
6.
MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
8
7.
MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
9
8.
MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
10
9.
MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
11
P44x/EN CO/E33
Connection Diagrams
Page 2/12
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
10.35
= = =
HEALTHY
ENTER
READ
CLEAR
OUT OF SERVICE
ALARM
TRIP
MiCOM
206.0
FRONT VIEW
200.0
181.3 202.0
155.4
177.0
4.5
168.0
30.0
24
18
1
SIDE VIEW
240.0 INCL. WIRING
157.5 MAX. RX
TX
IRIG-B
A
TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST
B
C
D
REAR VIEW E
F
THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL
TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.
17
MEDIUM DUTY
TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS
HEAVY DUTY
19
3
MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.
16
4
1
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL
3.4
18
2
1.
159.0
23.3
8 OFF HOLES Æ
Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 3/12
MiCOM P441 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
(b)
(a)
b
a
c
n
N
C
P2
S2
PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION
C
B
A
SEE NOTE 2.
NOTE 4.
S1
P1
VC
VB
VA
C24
C23
C22
C21
C20
C19
C12
C11
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
5A
D1 D2
1A
5A
MiCOM P441 (PART)
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.
V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)
IC
IB
IA
B C PHASE ROTATION
IM
B C PHASE ROTATION
A
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET
50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
B
A
S1
A
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 8
OPTO 7
OPTO 6
OPTO 5
OPTO 4
OPTO 3
OPTO 2
OPTO 1
0V
TO-T7
DO-D7
-
*
3
48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT
AC OR DC AUX SUPPLY
-
-
+
+
+
8 RTS
F10
F9
F8
F7
F2
F1
9
7 CTS
6
5
4
RX 0V
1 2
14 SK1
*
SK2
POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
19,18,22,25
11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24
2-9
17
16
10
1
F16 SCN
F18
TX
NOT CONNECTED
SERIAL PORT
Vx
TEST/ DOWNLOAD
DOWNLOAD COMMAND
EXTERNAL RESET
DATA ACKNOWLEDGE
DATA READY
RS485 PORT
F17
MiCOM P441 (PART)
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
E18
E16 E17
E15
E14
E13
E12
E11
E10
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
F14
F13
F12
F11
CASE EARTH
RELAY 14
RELAY 13
RELAY 12
RELAY 11
RELAY 10
RELAY 9
RELAY 8
RELAY 7
RELAY 6
RELAY 5
RELAY 4
RELAY 3
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
WATCHDOG CONTACT
WATCHDOG CONTACT
Page 4/12
NOTES 1.
C
S2
P1
2.
B
A
P2
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
P44x/EN CO/E33 Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
*
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F 7
F 8
F 10
PL1
F 9
F 11
F 12
F 13
F 17
SK1
F 16
F 18
SK2
SERIAL
E 3
TEST/DOWNLOAD
SK1
E 2
SK1
*
E 1
E 4
E 5
E 6
E 8 E 10
PL3
E 9
E 11 E 12
PL1
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01
E 7 E 13 E 14
E 16
E 17 E 18
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
E 15
*
D 1 D 2
D 3
B 1
D 4
B 2
D 5 D 7 D 8 D 10
PL2
D 9 D 11 D 12
D 13
B 3
B 4
B 5
B 6
PL1
D 14
D 15
B 7
B 8
B 9
B 10
PL3 B 11
B 12
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0002 01
PL1
ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0005 01
D 6
D 17
B 13
B 14
SK1
D 16
B 15
D 18
B 16
B 17
B 18
C 3
SK1
C 2
*
C 1 C 4
C 5 C 6 C 8
C 10
C 12
PL1
C 11
PL1
TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013
C 9 C 19
C 20
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0003 03
C 7 C 21
C 22
C 23
C 24
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BOARD CONTAINS SAFETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.
BATTERY
F 15
PL1
F 14
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERFACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01
F 6
*
F 5
3.
STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013(110V)
Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/E33 Page 5/12
MiCOM P441 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
10.3
159.0
= = =
HEALTHY
ENTER
READ
CLEAR
OUT OF SERVICE
ALARM
TRIP
MiCOM
303.5
305.5
309.6
129.5
142.45
177.0
4.5
168.0
Æ3.4
30.0
18 24
1
TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST
SIDE VIEW
240.0 INCL. WIRING
157.5 MAX. RX
TX
IRIG-B
A
C
D
F
G
H
J
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL
E
REAR VIEW
THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
B
TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.
17
MEDIUM DUTY
TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS
HEAVY DUTY
19
3
MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.
16
4
1
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL
12 OFF HOLES
18
2
Page 6/12
FRONT VIEW
155.4
116.55
4.
23.25
P44x/EN CO/E33 Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
MiCOM P442 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
S2
9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET
50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
P2
PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION
C
B
A
SEE NOTE 2.
NOTE 4.
S1
S1
P1
IC
IB
IA
VC
VB
VA
C24
3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.
4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
E18
E17
C23
E15
E14
E13
E12
E11
E10
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
E16
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
5A
C22
C21
C20
C19
C12
C11
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
MV PLATFORM DISTANCE PROTECTION (PART)
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.
V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)
A
B C PHASE ROTATION
IM
B C PHASE ROTATION
A
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
S2
P1
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 16
OPTO 15
OPTO 14
OPTO 13
OPTO 12
OPTO 11
OPTO 10
OPTO 9
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 8
OPTO 7
OPTO 6
OPTO 5
OPTO 4
OPTO 3
OPTO 2
OPTO 1
TEST/ DOWNLOAD
17
16
10
1
J16 SCN
J18
-
48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT
-
-
+
+
+
8 RTS
SK1
2nd REAR COM
*
MV PLATFORM DISTANCE PROTECTION (PART)
SK4 (OPTIONNAL)
* POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
J10
J9
J8
J7
J2
J1
9
7
6
5
4
3
1 2
CTS
0V
RX
TX
14
19,18,22,25
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1 2
G18
G17
G16
G15
G14
G13
G12
G11
G10
G9
G8
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
H18
H17
H16
H15
H14
J17
F18
H12 H13
H11
F17
F16
H10
H9
F15
11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24
AC OR DC Vx AUX SUPPLY
SERIAL PORT
F13 F14
TO-T7
NOT CONNECTED
P442
H7
2-9
0V
SK2
H6
F11 H8
H5
F9
F12
H4
F8
H3
F7
F10
H2
H1
J14
F6
F5
F4
J13
J11 J12
F1 F2 F3
DO-D7
DOWNLOAD COMMAND
EXTERNAL RESET
DATA ACKNOWLEDGE
DATA READY
RS485 PORT
RELAY 21
RELAY 20
RELAY 19
RELAY 18
RELAY 17
RELAY 16
RELAY 15
CASE EARTH
P3909ENa
FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
EIA485 -2(-ve)
EIA485 -1(+ve)
IRIG-B INPUT (OPTIONAL)
RX
TX
N.C.
CTS#
RTS#
N.C.
0V
DTR#
TxD.
RxD
N.C.
RELAY 14
RELAY 13
RELAY 12
RELAY 11
RELAY 10
RELAY 9
RELAY 8
RELAY 7
RELAY 6
RELAY 5
RELAY 4
RELAY 3
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
WATCHDOG CONTACT
WATCHDOG CONTACT
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
(b)
(a)
NOTES 1.
b c
n
N
a
C
B
A
P2
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
5.
C
B
A
Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/E33 Page 7/12
MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
J 2
J 4
J 5
J 7
J 8
J 9
J 10
J 11
J 12
J 13
J 14
J 15
J 18
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
D-type
3
SK4
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
D-type
3
SK5 (unused)
RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001
SK1
TEST/DOWNLOAD
SK2
SERIAL
H 4
G 1
*
H 3
SK1
H 2
*
H 1
G 2
H 5
G 3
H 6
H 8
H 9
H 10
H 11 H 12
H 13
G 5
G 6
H 15 H 16
G 7 G 8
G 9 G 10
G 11 G 12
1 2
4
5 6
7 8
9
D-type
3
SK4
H 18
1
G 14
2
F 2
*
F 1
F 3 F 4
F 5
G 15 G 16
G 17 G 18
4
5 6
7 8
9
D-type
3
E 1
*
E 2
F 7 F 8
F 9 F 10
F 11 F 12
E 3
F 15 F 16
E 7 E 8
E 9 E 10
E 11 E 12
E 13
E 15
F 18
E 14
F 17
E 16
E 17 E 18
D 2
*
D 1
D 3 D 4
D 5 D 7 D 8
D 9 D 10
D 11 D 12
D 13 D 14
D 15
PL1
D 17 D 18
Tx1
SK1
D 16
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS
Rx1
Tx1
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS
Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002
BNC
Rx1
IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 01
PL1
ANALOGUE & OPTO INPUT PCB ZN0005 001 ou ZN0017 001
D 6
BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.
*
IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001
E 6
BNC
E 5
F 14
PL1
F 13
OPTO PCB ZN0005 002 ou ZN0017 002 (UI)
P442
E 4
PL1
RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001
F 6
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
H 17
SK5 (unused)
G 13
RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001
PL1
H 14
RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002
G 4
PL1
RELAY PCB ZN0002 001 ou ZN0031 001
H 7
C 3
SK1
C 2
*
C 1 C 4
C 5 C 6
C 7 C 8 C 10
C 11 C 12
C 19
C 20
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03
PL1
TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013
C 9 C 21
C 22 C 23
C 24
P3911ENa
Page 8/12
BNC
J 17
SK1
J 16
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
PL1
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01
J 6
BATTERY
*
J 3
6.
*
J 1
STANDARD INPUT MODULE GN0010 013 (110V)
P44x/EN CO/E33 Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
MiCOM P442 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
159.0
62.0
= = =
HEALTHY
ENTER
READ
CLEAR
OUT OF SERVICE
ALARM
TRIP
MiCOM
406.9
408.9
413.2
FRONT VIEW
155.4
116.55
129.5
142.45
30.0
177.0
16
4
1
3
18 24
TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL
SIDE VIEW
240.0 INCL. WIRING
157.5 MAX.
SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)
TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST
TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 7 BRASS CHEESE HEAD SCREWS WITH
1
RX
TX
IRIG-B
16
18
2
TERMINAL BLOCKS SEE DETAIL
REAR VIEW
THE TERMINATION POSITIONS SHOWN ARE TYPICAL ONLY
LOCK WASHERS PROVIDED.
17
MEDIUM DUTY
EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS
HEAVY DUTY
19
MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.
FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL CUT-OUT DETAIL.
4.5
168.0
12 OFF HOLES Dia. 3.4
7.
74.9
Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/E33
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444 Page 9/12
MiCOM P444 – HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
(b)
(a)
9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET
50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR
PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)
C.T. SHORTING LINKS
S2
PARALLEL LINE PROTECTION
C
B
A
P2
S1
P1
VC
VB
VA
C24
C23
C22
C21
C20
C19
C12
C11
C10
C9
C8
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
5A
1A
5A
4. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
3. V BUSBAR ONLY REQUIRED IF CHECK SYNCHRONISM FUNCTION ENABLED.
2. IM INPUT IS FOR OPTIONAL MUTUAL COMPENSATION OF FAULT LOCATOR.
V BUSBAR (SEE NOTE 3.)
IC
IB
IA
C1
MV PLATFORM DISTANCE PROTECTION (PART)
B C PHASE ROTATION
IM
B C PHASE ROTATION
A
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
SEE NOTE 2.
NOTE 4.
S1
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
F10
F9
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
E18
E17
E16
E15
E14
E13
E12
E11
E10
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
E2
E1
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 24
OPTO 23
OPTO 22
OPTO 21
OPTO 20
OPTO 19
OPTO 18
OPTO 17
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 16
OPTO 15
OPTO 14
OPTO 13
OPTO 12
OPTO 11
OPTO 10
OPTO 9
COMMON CONNECTION
OPTO 8
OPTO 7
OPTO 6
OPTO 5
OPTO 4
OPTO 3
OPTO 2
OPTO 1
TEST/ DOWNLOAD
-
48V DC FIELD VOLTAGE OUT
-
-
+
+
+
*
8
RTS
SK1
*
SK2
P444
POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24/54V D.C. ONLY
MV PLATFORM DISTANCE PROTECTION (PART)
N10
N9
N8
N7
N2
N1
9
7
6
5
4
3
1 2
14
19,18,22,25
11,12,15,13, 20,21,23,24
2-9
17
16
10
1
N16 SCN
N18
CTS
0V
RX
AC OR DC Vx AUX SUPPLY
SERIAL PORT
TX
NOT CONNECTED
0V
TO-T7
DO-D7
DOWNLOAD COMMAND
EXTERNAL RESET
DATA ACKNOWLEDGE
DATA READY
RS485 PORT
N17
TX
CASE EARTH
IRIG-B INPUT (OPTIONAL)
RX
FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
2nd REAR COM SK4 (OPTIONNAL)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1 2
M18
M17 K18
K17
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
M10
M9
M8
M7
M6
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
L18
L17
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
M16 RELAY 24
RELAY 23
RELAY 22
RELAY 21
RELAY 20
RELAY 19
RELAY 18
RELAY 17
RELAY 32
RELAY 31
RELAY 30
RELAY 29
RELAY 28
RELAY 27
RELAY 26
RELAY 25
WATCHDOG CONTACT
WATCHDOG CONTACT
K16
K15
K14
K13
K12
K11
K10
K9
K8
K7
K6
K5
K4
K3
K2
K1
J18
J17
J16
J15
J14
J13
J12
J11
J10
J9
J8
J7
J6
J5
J4
J3
J2
J1
N14
N13
N12
N11
RELAY 9
EIA485 -1(+ve)
N.C.
CTS#
P3910ENa
RTS# EIA485 -2(-ve)
N.C.
0V
DTR#
TxD.
RxD
N.C.
RELAY 8
RELAY 7
RELAY 6
RELAY 5
RELAY 4
RELAY 3
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
RELAY 16
RELAY 15
RELAY 14
RELAY 13
RELAY 12
RELAY 11
RELAY 10
Page 10/12
NOTES 1.
b c
n
N
a
C
B
A
S2
P1
A
8.
C
B
A
P2
DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW
P44x/EN CO/E33 Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (1/2)
N 2
N 4
N 7
N 8
N 9
N 10
N 11
N 12
N 13
N 14
N 15
N 17
N 18
SK1
N 16
Tx1
J 1
J 2
M 5
CO-PROCESSOR CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0003 03
SK1
TEST/DOWNLOAD
SK2
M 4
*
M 3
SK1
M 2
*
M 1
SERIAL
MAIN PROCESSOR & USER INTERLACE PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0006 01
POWER SUPPLY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0001 01
N 6
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS
Rx1
IRIG-B PCB CIRCUIT DIAG 01 ZN0007 03
BNC
N 5
BATTERY
*
N 3
J 3
M 7
M 8
M 9
M 10
M 11 M 12
J 4
J 5
J 6
M 13 M 14
M 15
J 7 J 8
J 9 J 10
J 11 J 12
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
M 6
M 18
L 2
*
L 1
L 3 L 4
L 5 L 6
J 14
J 15 J 17 J 18
K 1 K 2
L 8
L 9 L 10
1 2
4
6
7 8
9
D-type
5
SK4 3
L 11 L 12
K 3 K 4
K 5
L 13
K 6
K 7 K 8
K 9
2
4
5 6
7 8
9
D-type
3
SK5 (unused) 1
L 14
L 15
K 11 E 12 K 14
K 15
L 18
P444
K 10
L 17
K 13
L 16
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
RearCom2 + IRIGB (optional) 01 ZN0025001
J 16
*
L 7
RELAY PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0019 01
64-WAY RIBBON CABLE
M 17
BNC
J 13
M 16
K 17 K 18
D 4
F 1
*
D 3
F 2
D 5
1 2
4
6
7 8
9
D-type
5
SK4 3
D 7 D 8
D 9 D 10
D 11 D 12
D 13 D 14
F 5 F 6
F 7 F 8
F 9
1 2
4
5 6
7 8
9
F 10
F 11 F 12
F 13
D 17
F 14
F 15
F 17
C 4
E 1
*
C 3
SK1
C 2
*
C 1
E 2
C 5
E 3
C 6
IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 001
F 18
BNC
F 16
D 18
SK1
D 16
E 4
C 7
E 5
C 8 C 10
C 11 C 12
EXAMPLE FOR: P444114A3A????A
C 19
C 20
E 6
E 7
E 8
E 9
E 10
E 11
E 12
E 13
E 14
UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 ZN0017 02
C 24
Tx1
P3912ENa
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSDUCERS
Rx1
Optical fiber + IRIG-B PCB 01 ZN0007 002
E 18
C 23
E 17
C 22
E 16
C 21
E 15
TRANSFORMER ASSY GN0014 013
C 9
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BOARD CONTAINS SALETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS.
D-type
3
SK5 (unused)
F 4
D 15
UNIVERSEL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 02
UNIVERSAL OPTO INPUT PCB CIRCUIT DIAG. 01 Zn0017 01
D 6
F 3
RearCom2 (optional) 01 ZN0025002
K 16
D 2
*
D 1
9.
*
N 1
Connection Diagrams P44x/EN CO/E33 Page 11/12
MiCOM P444 – WIRING DIAGRAM (2/2)
P44x/EN CO/E33
Connection Diagrams
Page 12/12
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
BLANK PAGE
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
CONFIGURATION / MAPPING
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 2
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
This documentation version E44 is specific to the following models
Model number P441-------30-G or J P442-------30-G or J P444-------30-G or J or H
For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D Protection and Control for the relevant information.
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 1
Configuration / Mapping This Chapter is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Part A: Menu database This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and the front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also defined within this database. Note: The following labels are used within the database Label
Description
Value
V1
Main VT Rating 1 (100/110V)
V2
Checksync VT Rating
I1 Phase CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
I4 Mutual CT Rating
1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)
1 (100/110V)
Part B: Menu datatype definition for Modbus This table defines the datatypes used for Modbus (the datatypes for the Courier and user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross reference to from the Menu Database using a G number. Part C: Internal digital signals (DDB) This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define protection events produced by the relay. Part D: Menu Database for MODBUS This database defines the structure of the menu for the Modbus interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part E: IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications Chapter of this Manual (P44x/EN CT).
P44x/EN GC/E44 Page 2
Courier Data Base MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Part F: DNP3.0 Database This database defines the structure of the menu for the DNP3.0 interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements. Part G: Maintenance records This section of the Appendix specifies all the maintenance information that can be produced by the relay. DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (PSL)
References Chapter IT: Introduction : User Interface operation and connections to relay Chapter CT: Communications: Overview of communication interfaces Courier User Guide R6512 Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems - Transmission Protocols – Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Comms Level
Relay Address
Plant Status
Control Status
Active Group
CB Trip/Close
CB Trip/Close
Software Ref. 1
Software Ref. 2
00
00
00
00
01
01
Password Level 1
Password Level 2
Reserved for levels > 2
VIEW RECORDS
Select Event
Alarm Status 3
00
00
Alarm Status 2
Password Control
00
Alarm Status 1
Access Level
00
00
Relay O/P Status 2
00
00
Frequency
Relay O/P Status 1
00
Serial Number
00
00
Model Number
Alarm Status 1
00
Plant Reference
00
00
Description
00
00
Password
Relay O/P Status
00
Language
Opto I/P Status
00
SYSTEM DATA
1
00
D4-D8
D3
D2
D1
D0
52
51
50
41
40
22
21
20
12
11
10
10
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
09
08
06
05
04
02
01
00
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Unsigned Integer(2)
ASCII Password(4 characters)
ASCII Password(4 characters)
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits)
ASCII Text(16 characters)
ASCII Text(16 characters)
Indexed String(2)
Indexed String(2)
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits)
Binary Flags(16 bits)
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)
Unsigned Integer(1 byte)
ASCII Text(7 bytes)
ASCII Text(32 bytes)
ASCII Text(16 bytes)
ASCII Text(16 bytes)
ASCII Password(4 bytes)
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G20
G20
G22
G1
G55
G55
G1
G20
G19
40100
40025
40023
40022
30017
30015
30013
30011
30009
30007
30727
30052
40021
30006
30004
30002
40020
30044
30020
40012
40004
40001
40100
40026
40024
40022
30017
30016
30014
30012
30010
30008
30728
30059
40021
30006
30004
30002
40020
30051
30035
40019
40011
40002
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G1
G20
G20
G22
G1
G250
G111
G96
G251
G9
G96
G9
G27
G3
G55
G1
G5
G4
G1
G1
G3
G3
G3
G3
G20
G19
0
AAAA
AAAA
2
No Operation
No Operation
255
2
50
Serial Number
Model Number
AREVA
MiCOM
AAAA
English
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Command
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
65
65
0
0
0
0
50
32
32
65
0
Min
249
90
90
2
2
2
255
60
163
163
90
3
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
Step
0
2
1
2
0
1
1
2
2
2
0
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * *
Max value is oldest record
Visible to Rear Port
Visible to LCD+Front Port
Needs to be address of interface Rear Courier Address available via LCD
Comment
Page 1
P44x/EN GC /E44
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
01
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Active Group
Distance Trip Z# aided Started Phase ABCN Tripped Phase ABCN Overcurrent Start I> 1 2 3 4 Overcurrent Trip I> 1 2 3 4 Neg Seq O/C Start I2> Neg Seq O/C Trip I2> Broken Conductor Trip Earth Fault Start IN> 1 2 3 4 Earth Fault Trip IN> 1 2 3 4 Aided D.E.F Start Aided D.E.F Trip Undervoltage Start V< 1 2 Undervoltage Trip V< 1 2 Overvoltage Start V> 1 2 Overvoltage Trip V> 1 2 Breaker Fail CB Fail 1 2 Supervision VTS CTS CVTS LOL Trip SOTF/TOR Trip TOC Start TOC Trip Weak Infeed Trip ZSP Start ZSP Trip
7
6
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer 30113
40101
30108
30113
40101
30109
G1
G1
G27
G12
01
Binary Flag(32)/UINT32
30106
Select Fault
5
30103
01
Ascii String(32)
IEC870 Time & Date
0
0
(From Record)
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Event Value
4
3
(From Record)
01
Cell Reference
01
2
Event Text
Cell Type
Time & Date
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
01
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
Menu Cell Ref
Courier Data Type
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
0
Min
4
Max
1
Step
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
visible if Trip LOL
VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
1/2 visible if Trip V1/2/3/4
1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
# equal Zonr on the Trip ( Zone 1/ 2/ 3/ P/ 5)
Note DTL depends on event type See Event sheet of Spreadsheet Allows Fault Record to be selected
See Event sheet
Indicates type of event See Event sheet
Comment
Page 2
P44x/EN GC /E44
01
01
02
02
02
Reset Indication
MEASUREMENTS 1
IA Magnitude
IA Phase Angle
01
Report Text
01
01
Select Report
Maint Data
01
Maint Type
01
Fault in Zone
01
IB
Fault Resistance
01
IA
01
01
Fault Location
VCN
01
Fault Location
01
01
Fault Location
VBN
01
Fault Location
01
01
Relay Trip Time
01
01
Fault Duration
VAN
01
System Frequency
IC
01
Fault Alarms
2
1
00
FF
F3
F2
F1
F0
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (current)
Indexed String
UINT32
UINT32
Ascii String(32)
Unsigned Integer
Indexed string
Courier Number (Ohms)
Courier Number(voltage)
Courier Number(voltage)
Courier Number(voltage)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number(% )
Courier Number (ohms)
Courier Number (Miles)
Courier Number (Metres)
Courier Number (time)
Courier Number (time)
Courier Number (frequency)
Binary Flags (32 Bits)
IEC870 Time & Date
Binary Flags (8 Bits)
G11
G87
G12
N/A G130
30200 30702 30202
30038
30036
40102
30153
30151
30149
30147
30145
30143
30141
30139
30137
30135
30133
30131
30129
30127
30126
30124
30120
30119
30201 30703 30202
30039
30037
40102
30153
30152
30150
30148
30146
30144
30142
30140
30138
30136
30134
30132
30130
30128
30126
30125
30123
30119
30118
G24 G24 G30
G27
G27
G1
G110
G125
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G24
G125
G125
G125
G125
G24
G24
G25
G87
G12
G130
G85
No
Data Data Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Manual override to s Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
01
30117
G84
01
N/A G85
30116
Time Stamp
Binary Flags (32 Bits)
30115
Validities
0A
N/A G84
01
Binary Flags (32 Bits)
G16
Trip Elements
9
30114
01
30114
Start Elements
N/A G16
Data
Binary Flags (8 Bits)
01
8
Data
N/A
Cell Type
Data
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
N/A
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Data
Courier Data Type
N/A
CourierRef Col Row
PAP Start PAP Trip USER Trip Faulted Phase
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
0
0
Min
1
4
Max
1
1
Step
1
2
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * *
Allows Self Test Report to be selected
Resistor for Fault Laocator
Resistor for Fault Laocator
( 0D08 = 2 AND 090D 0 )
( 0D08 = 1 AND 090D 0 )
( (OD08=0 AND 0D07=1) AND 090D 0 )
( (0D08=0 AND 0D07=0) AND 090D 0 )
Faullt Alarms/Warnings
Viliditie of Fault Report
Tripped elements 1
Started elements
visible if Start LOL Started phases + tripped phases
visible if Start LOL
visible if Start LOL
Comment
Page 3
P44x/EN GC /E44
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
IB Phase Angle
IC Magnitude
IC Phase Angle
IN Derived Mag
IN Derived Angle
I1 Magnitude
I2 Magnitude
I0 Magnitude
VAB Magnitude
VAB Phase Angle
VBC Magnitude
VBC Phase Angle
VCA Magnitude
VCA Phase Angle
VAN Magnitude
VAN Phase Angle
VBN Magnitude
VBN Phase Angle
VCN Magnitude
VCN Phase Angle
VN Derived Mag
VN Derived Ang
V1 Magnitude
V2 Magnitude
V0 Magnitude
Frequency
C/S Voltage Mag
C/S Voltage Ang
IM Magnitude
IM Angle
02
IB Magnitude
30
2F
2C
2B
2A
26
25
24
23
22
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
0F
0E
0D
0A
9
6
5
4
3
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (frequency)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (voltage)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (angle)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Data Type
30269
30267
30266
30263 30721 30264
30255
30253
30251
30250
30248
30247
30245
30244
30242
30241
30239
30236 30712 30238
30233 30710 30235
30230 30708 30232
30222
30220
30218
30214
30212
30206 30706 30208
30203 30704 30205
30269
30268
30266
30263 30721 30265
30256
30254
30252
30250
30249
30247
30246
30244
30243
30241
30240
30237 30713 30238
30234 30711 30235
30231 30709 30232
30223
30221
30219
30214
30213
30207 30707 30208
30204 30705 30205
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G30
G24
G30
G30 G30 G24
G24
G24
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G30
G24
G24 G24 G30
G24 G24 G30
G24 G24 G30
G24
G24
G24
G30
G24
G24 G24 G30
G24 G24 G30
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data Data Data
Data Data Data
Data Data Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data Data Data
Data Data Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
* * *
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
* * *
4c 4d
Comment
Page 4
P44x/EN GC /E44
06
06
06
06
CB B Operations
CB C Operations
Total IA Broken
03
3Ph W Peak Demand
CB A Operations
03
3Ph VArs Fix Dem
06
03
3Ph W Fix Demand
04
03
CPh Power Factor
CB CONDITION
03
BPh Power Factor
Reset Thermal
03
APh Power Factor
04
03
3Ph Power Factor
Thermal State
03
Zero Seq Power
04
03
3 Phase VA
MEASUREMENTS 3
03
3 Phase VArs
03
03
3 Phase Watts
03
03
C Phase VA
Reset Demand
03
B Phase VA
3Ph VArs Peak Demand
03
03
A Phase VArs
A Phase VA
03
C Phase Watts
03
03
B Phase Watts
03
03
A Phase Watts
C Phase VArs
03
MEASUREMENTS 2
B Phase VArs
02
Slip Frequency
4
3
2
1
00
3
2
0
25
21
20
17
16
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
31
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number (current)
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Courier Number (percentage)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (decimal)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VAr)
Courier Number (Power)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VA)
Courier Number (VAr)
Courier Number (VAr)
Courier Number (VAr)
Courier Number (Power)
Courier Number (Power)
Courier Number (Power)
Courier Number (frequency)
Courier Data Type
G11
30603
30602
30601
30600
40104
30434
40103
30352
30349
30346
30343
30342
30341
30339 30720 30340
30336
30327 30714 30330 30717 30333
30324
30321
30318
30315
30312
30309
30306
30303
30300
30604
30602
30601
30600
40104
30434
40103
30354
30351
30348
30345
30342
30341
30339 30720 30340
30338
30329 30716 30332 30719 30335
30326
30323
30320
30317
30314
30311
30308
30305
30302
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 30270 30270
G125
G1
G1
G1
G11
G30
G1
G29
G29
G29
G29
G30
G30
G30 G30 G30
G29
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
G29
0
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G30
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data Data Data
Data
Data Data Data Data Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
0
0
Min
1
1
Max
1
1
Step
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
* * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
* * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
* * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
*
* * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * *
Broken Current A Phase
Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
3 Phase VArs - Peak Demand
3 Phase Watts - Peak Demand
3 Phase VArs - Fixed Demand
3 Phase Watts - Fixed Demand
Comment
Page 5
P44x/EN GC /E44
07
Healthy Window
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
IRIG-B Status
Battery Status
Battery Alarm
CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults
Setting Group
Active Settings
Save Changes
Copy From
Copy to
08
07
Man Close Delay
08
07
Trip Pulse Time
Date 35807 Time 0,5 IRIG-B Sync
07
Manual Close Pulse Time
Date/Time
07
CB Control by
08
07
CB CONTROL
DATE and TIME
06
Reset Total A/R
07
06
Total 3P Reclosures
A/R Three Pole
06
Total 1P Reclosures
07
06
Reset CB Data
07
06
CB Operate Time
A/R Single Pole
06
Total IC Broken
C/S Window
06
Total IB Broken
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
7
6
5
4
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
ASCII String
Indexed String
G37 G17
G98
G90
G62
G90
G61
G53
G37
G59
40407
40406
40405
40404
40403
40402
40305
30091
30090
40304
40407
40406
40405
40404
40403
40402
40305
30091
30090
40304
40303 42052
40205
40204
40209
40207
40203
40202
40201
40200
40141
30612
30611
40140
G98
G90
G62
G90
G61
G53
G37
G59
G17
G37
G12 G12
G37
G37
G35
G35
G2
G2
G2
G99
G11
G1
G1
G11
G25
G125
G125
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
5
5
10
0.5
0.5
Disabled
No
No
No Operation
Group 1
No Operation
Group 1
Select via Menu
No Operation
Enabled
Command
Setting
Command
Setting
Setting
Command
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Data
Data
Command
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
0
0
0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
0
0
0
Min
1
1
1
9999
9999
600
5
10
7
1
1
Max
1
1
1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
1
1
1
Step
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
2
3
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
0 0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Check Sync Window
Manual Close Delay
Reset No of Autoreclosures
No of Autoreclosures
No of Autoreclosures
Reset All Values
Circuit Breaker operating time
Broken Current C Phase
Broken Current B Phase
Comment
Front Panel Menu only
40300 42049
40205
40204
40208
40206
40203
40202
40201
40200
40141
30612
30611
40140
30609
30608
30606
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
N/A
N/A
G37
G37
G99
G11
G11
30609
30607
30605
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
Front Panel Menu only
IEC870 Time & Date
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Indexed String
Courier Number (time)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Data Type
N/A
1
00
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base Page 6
P44x/EN GC /E44
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
Internal A/R
Input Labels
Output Labels
CT & VT Ratios
Event Recorder
Disturb Recorder
Measure't Setup
Comms Settings
Commission Tests
Setting Values
Control Input
Ctrl I/P Config
Ctrl I/P Labels
Direct Acces
InterMicom
LCD Contrast
09
Supervision
Thermal Overload
09
CB Fail & I<
System Checks
09
09
Volt Protection
09
Earth Fault Prot
Aided D.E.F
09
09
Power-Swing
Broken Conductor
09
Dist. Protection
09
09
Setting Group 4
09
09
Setting Group 3
Neg Sequence O/C
09
Setting Group 2
Back-Up I>
09
Setting Group 1
FF
40
39
36
35
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
26
25
24
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0D
0A
9
8
7
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G37
G231
G80
G80
G80
G54
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G80
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G131
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
40440
40424
40423
40422
40421
40420
40419
40418
40417
40416
40415
40414
40413
40412
40411
40410
40409
40424
40423
40422
40421
40420
40419
40418
40417
40416
40415
40414
40413
40412
40411
40410
40409
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G37 40408 40408
G80
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G131
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
11
Disabled
Disabled
unvisible
Invisible
Visible
Secondary
Invisible
Visible
Invisible
Invisible
Invisible
Visible
Visible
Visible
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G37 Enabled
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Disturbance recorder
Comment
Page 7
P44x/EN GC /E44
0A
Mcomp CT Sec'y
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
DDB element 191 - 160
DDB element 223 - 192
DDB element 255 - 224
DDB element 287 - 256
0B
DDB element 95 - 64
DDB element 159 - 128
0B
DDB element 63 - 32
DDB element 127 - 96
0B
0B
0B
Maint Rec Event
DDB element 31 - 0
0B
Fault Rec Event
Protection Event
0B
Relay O/P Event
0B
0B
Alarm Event
System Event
0B
Clear Maint
Opto Input Event
0B
0B
Clear Faults
0B
0A
Mcomp CT Primary
Clear Events
0A
Phase CT Sec'y
0B
0A
Phase CT Primary
RECORD CONTROL
0A
C/S VT Secondary
0A
0A
C/S VT Primary
0A
0A
Main VT Sec'y
Main VT Location
0A
Main VT Primary
C/S Input
0A
CT AND VT RATIOS
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
10
0F
0E
0D
8
7
4
3
2
1
00
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (current)
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Courier Data Type
G302
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G11
G89
40543
40541
40539
40537
40535
40533
40531
40529
40527
40526
40525
40524
40523
40522
40521
40520
40511
40510
40509
40508
40507
40506
40505
40503
40502
40500
40511
40510
40509
40508
40507
40506
40505
40504
40502
40501
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G89
G302
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G35
G2
G35
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Line
A-N
1
1
1
1
110
110
110
110
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
80*V2
100
80*V1
100
Min
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
5
30000
5
30000
140*V2
1000000
140*V1
1000000
Max
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
1
1*V2
1
1*V1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Label NM1 = 0A08^1001 Label M4=0A07/0A08 Label I4=Mcomp CT Rating Label M7=0A0D/0A0F Mutua compensation CT Secondary Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
Check Sync VT Secondary Label M2=0A03/0A04 I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Label M1=0A01/0A02 Label V2=C/S VT Rating/110
Label V1=1
Comment
Page 8
P44x/EN GC /E44
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0B
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
DDB element 319 - 288
DDB element 351 - 320
DDB element 383 - 352
DDB element 415 - 384
DDB element 447 - 415
DDB element 479 - 448
DDB element 511 - 480
DDB element 543 - 512
DDB element 575 - 544
DDB element 607 - 575
DDB element 639 - 608
DDB element 671 - 640
DDB element 703 - 672
DDB element 735 - 704
DDB element 767 - 736
DDB element 799 - 768
DDB element 831 - 800
DDB element 863 - 832
DDB element 895 - 864
DDB element 927 - 896
DDB element 959 - 928
DDB element 991 - 960
DDB element 1022 - 992
Clear Dist Recs
DISTURB RECORDER
Duration
Trigger Position
Trigger Mode
Analog Channel 1
Analog Channel 2
Analog Channel 3
Analog Channel 4
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
30
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (percentage)
Courier Number (time)
Indexed String
Binary Flag (31 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Courier Data Type
G31
G31
G31
G31
G34
G11
40606
40605
40604
40603
40602
40601
40600
40589
40587
40585
40583
40581
40579
40577
40575
40573
40571
40569
40567
40565
40563
40561
40559
40557
40555
40553
40551
40549
40547
40606
40605
40604
40603
40602
40601
40600
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 40545
G31
G31
G31
G31
G34
G2
G2
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
VN
VC
VB
VA
Single
33.3
1.5
No
0x7FFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G27 0xFFFFFFFF
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
10
10
10
10
1
100
10.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
0.1
0.01
1
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 1 * * * *
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Visible if one DDB signal is Protection EVENT
Comment
Page 9
P44x/EN GC /E44
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Input 12 Trigger
Digital Input 13
Input 13 Trigger
Digital Input 14
0C
Digital Input 11
Digital Input 12
0C
Input 10 Trigger
Input 11 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 9
Digital Input 10
0C
Input 8 Trigger
Input 9 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 7
Digital Input 8
0C
Input 6 Trigger
Input 7 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 5
Digital Input 6
0C
Input 4 Trigger
Input 5 Trigger
0C
0C
Digital Input 4
0C
Digital Input 3
Input 3 Trigger
0C
Input 2 Trigger
0C
Digital Input 1
0C
0C
Analog Channel 8
0C
0C
Analog Channel 7
Digital Input 2
0C
Analog Channel 6
Input 1 Trigger
0C
Analog Channel 5
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G31
G31
G31
G31
40637
40636
40635
40634
40633
40632
40631
40630
40629
40628
40627
40626
40625
40624
40623
40622
40621
40620
40619
40618
40617
40616
40615
40614
40613
40612
40611
40610
40609
40608
40607
40637
40636
40635
40634
40633
40632
40631
40630
40629
40628
40627
40626
40625
40624
40623
40622
40621
40620
40619
40618
40617
40616
40615
40614
40613
40612
40611
40610
40609
40608
40607
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G31
G31
G31
G31
Relay 14
No Trigger
Relay 13
No Trigger
Relay 12
No Trigger
Relay 11
No Trigger
Relay 10
No Trigger
Relay 9
No Trigger
Relay 8
No Trigger
Relay 7
No Trigger
Relay 6
No Trigger
Relay 5
No Trigger
Relay 4
No Trigger
Relay 3
No Trigger
Relay 2
No Trigger
Relay 1
IN
IC
IB
IA
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
10
10
10
10
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
Comment
Page 10
P44x/EN GC /E44
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
0C
Input 28 Trigger
Digital Input 29
Input 29 Trigger
Digital Input 30
0C
Digital Input 27
Digital Input 28
0C
Input 26 Trigger
Input 27 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 25
Digital Input 26
0C
Input 24 Trigger
Input 25 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 23
Digital Input 24
0C
Input 22 Trigger
Input 23 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 21
Digital Input 22
0C
Input 20 Trigger
Input 21 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 19
Digital Input 20
0C
Input 18 Trigger
Input 19 Trigger
0C
0C
0C
Digital Input 17
Digital Input 18
0C
Input 16 Trigger
Input 17 Trigger
0C
0C
Digital Input 16
0C
Digital Input 15
Input 15 Trigger
0C
Input 14 Trigger
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
3F
3E
3D
3C
3B
3A
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
40669
40668
40667
40666
40665
40664
40663
40662
40661
40660
40659
40658
40657
40656
40655
40654
40653
40652
40651
40650
40649
40648
40647
40646
40645
40644
40643
40642
40641
40640
40639
40669
40668
40667
40666
40665
40664
40663
40662
40661
40660
40659
40658
40657
40656
40655
40654
40653
40652
40651
40650
40649
40648
40647
40646
40645
40644
40643
40642
40641
40640
40639
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G66 40638 40638
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
G32
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G66 No Trigger
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
Comment
Page 11
P44x/EN GC /E44
0E
0E
0E
Baud Rate
Baud Rate
Parity
0E
0E
Baud Rate
0E
0E
RP1 InactivTimer
RP1 Status
0E
RP1 Address
CS103 Blocking
0E
RP1 Address
0E
0E
RP1 Address
Time Sync
0E
RP1 Address
0E
0E
RP1 Protocol
Physical Link
0E
COMMUNICATIONS
0E
0D
Fault Location
0E
0D
Distance Unit
Measure't Period
0D
Demand Interval
Parity
0D
0D
Measurement Mode
0D
Remote Values
Measurement Ref
0D
Local Values
0C
Input 32 Trigger
0D
0C
Digital Input 32
0D
0C
Input 31 Trigger
Default Display
0C
Digital Input 31
MEASURE'T SETUP
0C
Input 30 Trigger
0B
A
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
4
3
2
2
2
2
1
00
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
4B
4A
49
48
47
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time-minutes)
Unsigned integer
Unsigned integer
Unsigned integer
Unsigned integer
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time - Minutes)
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G208
G210
G37
G21
G39
G39
G38d
G38m
G38v
G71
G51
G97
G2
G1
G56
G54
G54
G52
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
40803
40802
40801
40800
40707
40706
40705
40704
40703
40702
40701
40700
40674
40673
40672
40671
40670
40803
40802
40801
40800
40707
40706
40705
40704
40703
40702
40701
40700
40674
40673
40672
40671
40670
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G1
G1
G39
G38
G2
G1
G51
G97
G2
G1
G56
G54
G54
G52
G66
G32
G66
G32
G66
Disabled
Disabled
RS485
10
None
None
19200 bits/s
19200 bits/s
19200 bits/s
15
1
1
1
255
Distance
Kilometres
30
0
VA
Primary
Secondary
Description
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Not Used
No Trigger
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
2
1
1
60
2
2
1
1
2
30
65534
255
247
255
2
1
99
3
5
1
1
6
2
DDB Size
2
DDB Size
2
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = DNP
Fibre Optic board fitted
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = DNP
Build = Modbus
Build = DNP
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = Modbus
Build = DNP
Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build = Modbus
Build = Courier
Measurement Phase Reference
Remote Measurement Values
Local Measurement Values
MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
Comment
Page 12
P44x/EN GC /E44
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
AP Title
AE Qual. Used
AE Qualifier
Ethernet Media
GOOSE STATISTICS
Enrolled Flags
0E
0E
GOOSE VIP Status
Present. Select
0E
GOOSE Startup
0E
0E
GOOSE Increment
Session Select
0E
GOOSE Min Cycle
0E
0E
GOOSE Min Cycle
0E
0E
Default Pass Lvl
Transport Select
0E
NSAP Address
0E
Inactivity Timer
0E
Router Address 2
Target Network 4
0E
Target Network 1
0E
0E
Router Address 1
Router Address 4
0E
Number of Routes
0E
0E
Subnet Mask
Target Network 3
0E
IP Address
0E
0E
ETHERNET COMMS
0E
0E
RP1 Baud Rate
Router Address 3
0E
RP1 Comms Mode
Target Network 2
0E
RP1 Port Config
40
3F
3D
3C
3B
3A
39
38
37
36
34
32
31
30
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
21
20
1F
0E
0D
0C
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Binary Flag (32 bits)
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Indexed String
ASCII Text
ASCII Text
ASCII Text
ASCII Text
ASCII Text
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
(Sub-heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G220
G38m
G206
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G207
G1
G1
0x00000000h
Copper
0
Not Used
000.000.000.000
00.00
00.00
00.00.00.00
0x00000000h
0x00000000h
Broadcast
900
0
10
2
15
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
0
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
19200 bits/s
IEC60870 FT1.2
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G1 K Bus
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
1
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
0
48
48
0
0
0
Min
1
2
30
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
4
57
57
2
1
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Build = UCA2.0
Comment
Page 13
P44x/EN GC /E44
0F
0F
0F
COMMISSION TESTS
Monitor Bit 1
0E
RP2 Baud Rate
LED Status
0E
RP2 InactivTimer
0F
0E
RP2 Address
Test Port Status
0E
RP2 Comms Mode
0F
0E
RP2 Port Config
Relay Status 2
0E
RP2 Card Status
0F
0E
RP2 Protocol
0F
0E
REAR PORT2 (RP2)
Relay Status 1
0E
Reload Mode
Opto I/P Status
0E
0E
0E
IED Timeouts
Loopback Mode
0E
IED Missed Chngs
IED Stats Reset
0E
0E
0E
IED Last Seq Rx
IED Missed Msgs
0E
IED Recvd Msgs
IED Last Msg Rx
0E
Our Last Msg Tx
0E
0E
Our Last Seq Tx
IED View Select
0E
Our DDB Changes
Our Msg Rjct Cnt
0E
0E
Our Rx Msg Cnt.
0E
Our Tx Msg Cnt.
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
94
92
90
8A
88
84
81
80
61
60
5F
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
46
45
44
43
42
41
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Unsigned Integer
Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flag(32 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits) Indexed String Binary Flags(8 bits)
Indexed String
Courier Number (time-minutes)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Unsigned Integer (16 bits)
Courier Data Type
G32
G38
G206
G205
G204
G71
40850
30722
40849
30722
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G32
G124
G27
G27
G27
G38m
G206
G205
G204
G71
Relay 1
19200 bits/s
15
255
IEC60870 FT1.2
EIA232 (RS232)
Courier
No Action
No Action
Our IED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
0
0
1
0
0
0
Min
DDB Size
1
30
255
1
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
1
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
DDB Size different for each model
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
Comment
Page 14
P44x/EN GC /E44
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
Monitor Bit 2
Monitor Bit 3
Monitor Bit 4
Monitor Bit 5
Monitor Bit 6
Monitor Bit 7
Monitor Bit 8
Test Mode
Test Pattern 1
Test Pattern 2
Contact Test
Test LEDs
Autoreclose Test
DDB element 31 - 0
DDB element 63 - 32
DDB element 95 - 64
DDB element 127 - 96
DDB element 159 - 128
DDB element 191 - 160
DDB element 223 - 192
DDB element 255 - 224
DDB element 287 - 256
DDB element 319 - 288
DDB element 351 - 320
DDB element 383 - 352
DDB element 415 - 384
DDB element 447 - 415
DDB element 479 - 448
DDB element 511 - 480
DDB element 543 - 512
DDB element 575 - 544
DDB element 607 - 575
32
31
30
2F
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flags (8bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Binary Flags (32bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Unsigned Integer
Courier Data Type
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
G36
G94
G93
G9
G9
G204
G32
G32
G32
G32
G32
G32
30759
30757
30755
30753
30751
30749
30747
30745
30743
30741
30739
30737
30735
30733
30731
30729
30727
30725
30723
40865
40864
40863
40861
40859
40858
40857
40856
40855
40854
40853
40852
30760
30758
30756
30754
30752
30750
30748
30746
30744
30742
30740
30738
30736
30734
30732
30730
30728
30726
30724
40865
40864
40863
40862
40860
40858
40856
40855
40854
40853
40852
40851
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G32 40851 40850
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G36
G94
G93
G9
G9
G204
G32
G32
G32
G32
G32
G32
No Operation
No Operation
No Operation
0
0
Disabled
Relay 8
Relay 7
Relay 6
Relay 5
Relay 4
Relay 3
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G32 Relay 2
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
Command
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
4
1
2
16383
1
1
1
1
4,295E+09 1
2
DDB Size
DDB Size
DDB Size
DDB Size
DDB Size
DDB Size
DDB Size
Max
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Relay Visible by Courier and Modbus Opto Visible by Courier and Modbus
0924=1 AND 0F0E=2
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
DDB Size different for each model
Comment
Page 15
P44x/EN GC /E44
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
N° CB Ops Maint
N° CB Ops Maint
N° CB Ops Lock
N° CB Ops Lock
CB Time Maint
CB Time Maint
CB Time Lockout
CB Time Lockout
Fault Freq Lock
Fault Freq Count
Fault Freq Time
Lockout Reset
0F
DDB element 1022 - 992
10
0F
DDB element 991 - 960
10
0F
DDB element 959 - 928
I^ Lockout
0F
DDB element 927 - 896
I^ Lockout
0F
DDB element 895 - 864
10
0F
DDB element 863 - 832
I^ Maintenance
0F
DDB element 831 - 800
10
0F
DDB element 799 - 768
I^ Maintenance
0F
DDB element 767 - 736
10
0F
DDB element 735 - 704
10
0F
DDB element 703 - 672
Broken I^
0F
DDB element 671 - 640
CB MONITOR SETUP
0F
DDB element 639 - 608
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
00
3F
3E
3D
3C
3B
3A
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Courier Number (time)
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer
Indexed String
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Decimal)
Binary Flag (31 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
Courier Data Type
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
G11
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
G88
40172
40170
40169
40168
40166
40165
40163
40162
40161
40160
40159
40158
40156
40155
40153
40152
40151
30785
30783
30781
30779
30777
30775
30773
30771
30769
30767
30765
30763
30761
40172
40171
40169
40168
40167
40165
40164
40162
40161
40160
40159
40158
40157
40155
40154
40152
40151
30786
30784
30782
30780
30778
30776
30774
30772
30770
30768
30766
30764
30762
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G11
G35
G1
G88
G35
G88
G35
G88
G1
G88
G1
G88
G35
G88
G35
G88
G2
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
No
3600
10
Alarm Disabled
0,2
Alarm Disabled
0,1
Alarm Disabled
20
Alarm Disabled
10
Alarm Disabled
2000
Alarm Disabled
1000
Alarm Disabled
2
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Command
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0,005
0
0,005
0
1
0
1
0
1*NM1
0
1*NM1
0
1
Min
1
0,1
Step
1
1
9999
9999
1
0,5
1
0,5
1
10000
1
10000
1
1
1
1
1
0,001
1
0,001
1
1
1
1
1
25000*NM1 1*NM1
1
25000*NM1 1*NM1
1
2
Max
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Reset Maintenance Alarms
Excessive Fault Frequency Time
Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Excessive fault frequency
Circuit Breaker Operating time for lockout alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause lockout alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause maintenance alarm Circuit Breaker Operating time for maintenance alarm
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for lockout alarm
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for maintenance alarm Circuit Breaker Trips to cause lockout alarm
Circuit Breaker Trips to cause maintenance alarm
IX Maintenance Lockout
Broken Current to cause lockout alarm
IX Maintenance Alarm
Broken Current to cause maintenance alarm
Broken Current Index
Comment
Page 16
P44x/EN GC /E44
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
Opto Input 22
Opto Input 23
Opto Input 24
Opto Input 25
Opto Input 26
Opto Input 27
Opto Input 28
11
Opto Input 14
11
11
Opto Input 13
Opto Input 21
11
Opto Input 12
11
11
Opto Input 11
11
11
Opto Input 10
Opto Input 20
11
Opto Input 9
Opto Input 19
11
Opto Input 8
11
11
Opto Input 7
Opto Input 18
11
Opto Input 6
11
11
Opto Input 5
Opto Input 17
11
Opto Input 4
11
11
Opto Input 3
11
11
Opto Input 2
Opto Input 15
11
Opto Input 1
Opto Input 16
11
11
Global threshold
10
Man Close RstDly
UNIVERSAL INPUTS
10
Reset Lockout by
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13
12
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (time)
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G200
40928
40927
40926
40925
40924
40923
40922
40921
40920
40919
40918
40917
40916
40915
40914
40913
40912
40911
40910
40909
40908
40907
40906
40905
40904
40903
40902
40901
40900
40174
40928
40927
40926
40925
40924
40923
40922
40921
40920
40919
40918
40917
40916
40915
40914
40913
40912
40911
40910
40909
40908
40907
40906
40905
40904
40903
40902
40901
40900
40174
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G81 40173 40173
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G201
G200
G2
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
5
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G81 CB Close
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.01
0
Min
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
600
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.01
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * * Manual Close Reset Delay
Comment
Page 17
P44x/EN GC /E44
50
80
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Opto Input 29
Opto Input 30
Opto Input 31
Opto Input 32
Opto Filter Cntl
Characteristic
CONTROL INPUTS
Ctrl I/P Status
Control Input 1
Control Input 2
Control Input 3
Control Input 4
Control Input 5
Control Input 6
Control Input 7
Control Input 8
Control Input 9
Control Input 10
Control Input 11
Control Input 12
Control Input 13
Control Input 14
Control Input 15
Control Input 16
Control Input 17
Control Input 18
Control Input 19
Control Input 20
Control Input 21
Control Input 22
Control Input 23
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
21
20
1F
1E
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G202
G237
G8
G201
G201
G201
G201
40974
40973
40972
40971
40970
40969
40968
40967
40966
40965
40964
40963
40962
40961
40960
40959
40958
40957
40956
40955
40954
40953
40952
40950
40935
40933
40932
40931
40930
40929
40951
40935
40934
40932
40931
40930
40929
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G202
G1
G8
G201
G201
G201
G201
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
0x00000000
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Setting
PLAT_OPTO_CHARSetting
0xFFFFFFFF
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
24-27V
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0x00000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
FFFFFFFF 1
4
4
4
4
Max
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
visible if (bit14 of model number = J)
Comment
Page 18
P44x/EN GC /E44
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Control Input 24
Control Input 25
Control Input 26
Control Input 27
Control Input 28
Control Input 29
Control Input 30
Control Input 31
Control Input 32
CTRL I/P CONFIG
Hotkey Enabled
Control Input 1
Ctrl Command 1
Control Input 2
Ctrl Command 2
Control Input 3
Ctrl Command 3
Control Input 4
Ctrl Command 4
Control Input 5
Ctrl Command 5
Control Input 6
Ctrl Command 6
Control Input 7
Ctrl Command 7
Control Input 8
Ctrl Command 8
Control Input 9
Ctrl Command 9
Control Input 10
Ctrl Command 10
Control Input 11
38
35
34
31
30
2D
2C
29
28
25
24
21
20
1D
1C
19
18
15
14
11
10
1
0
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Binary Flag (32 bits) Indexed String Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G233
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
410022
410021
410020
410019
410018
410017
410016
410015
410014
410013
410012
410011
410010
410009
410008
410007
410006
410005
410004
410003
410002
40983
40982
40981
40980
40979
40978
40977
40976
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G203 40975
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
G203
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
0xFFFFFFFF
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
No operation
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G203 No operation
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Command
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0xFFFFFFFF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
32
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Hotkey Menu - Control Input availability
Comment
Page 19
P44x/EN GC /E44
13
13
13
13
13
13
Control Input 25
Ctrl Command 25
Control Input 26
Ctrl Command 26
13
Ctrl Command 23
Ctrl Command 24
13
Control Input 23
Control Input 24
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 21
Ctrl Command 22
13
Control Input 21
Control Input 22
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 19
Ctrl Command 20
13
Control Input 19
Control Input 20
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 17
Ctrl Command 18
13
Control Input 17
Control Input 18
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 15
Ctrl Command 16
13
Control Input 15
Control Input 16
13
Ctrl Command 13
13
13
Control Input 13
Ctrl Command 14
13
Ctrl Command 12
Control Input 14
13
13
Control Input 12
13
Ctrl Command 11
75
74
71
70
6D
6C
69
68
65
64
61
60
5D
5C
59
58
55
54
51
50
4D
4C
49
48
45
44
41
40
3D
3C
39
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
410053
410052
410051
410050
410049
410048
410047
410046
410045
410044
410043
410042
410041
410040
410039
410038
410037
410036
410035
410034
410033
410032
410031
410030
410029
410028
410027
410026
410025
410024
410023
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Comment
Page 20
P44x/EN GC /E44
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Lost Messages
Elapsed Time
Reset Statistics
Ch Diagnostics
Data CD Status
FrameSync Status
Message Status
15
Rx Perm Count
15
15
Rx Direct Count
Rx ErroredCount
15
Ch Statistics
15
15
Remote Device
15
15
Baud Rate
Rx NewDataCount
15
Received Address
Rx Block Count
15
15
15
IM Input Status
Source Address
15
INTERMICOM COMMS
IM Output Status
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 31
Ctrl Command 32
13
Control Input 31
Control Input 32
13
13
13
Ctrl Command 29
Ctrl Command 30
13
Control Input 29
Control Input 30
13
13
Ctrl Command 28
13
Ctrl Command 27
Control Input 28
13
Control Input 27
43
42
41
40
31
30
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
13
12
11
10
2
1
0
8D
8C
89
88
85
84
81
80
7D
7C
79
78
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Float
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Unsigned Integer(32 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Binary Flags (8 bits)
Binary Flags (8 bits)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G217
G217
G217
G218
G213
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
310018
310017
310016
410506
410505
310014
310012
310010
310008
310006
310004
310002
410504
410503
410502
410501
410500
310001
310000
410065
410064
410063
410062
410061
410060
410059
410058
410057
410056
410055
310018
310017
310016
410506
410505
310015
310013
310011
310009
310007
310005
310003
410504
410503
410502
410501
410500
310001
310000
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G234 410054
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G27
G10
G27
G27
G27
G27
G27
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G27
G27
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
G234
G232
Invisible
No
Invisible
PX30
9600
2
1
Data
Data
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Latched
SET/RESET
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G234 Latched
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1
1
1
1
4
10
10
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Message Alarm Status
Frame synchronisation status
Data Carrier Detect status
Channel diagnostics visibility
Number of lost messages. Value compared with cell 0x1611 Elapsed time since statistics were last reset Reset Statistical counters to 0
Number of messages received at Direct security level Number of messages received at permissive security level Number of messages received at Blocking level Number of messages received with new data Number of errored messages
When enabled an idle char is inserted between messages Visble/invisible
InterMiCOM Output status
InterMiCOM input status
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Individual Control Input Command Text
Individual Control Input Type
Comment
Page 21
P44x/EN GC /E44
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
IM1 Cmd Type
IM1 FallBackMode
IM1 DefaultValue
IM1 FrameSyncTim
IM2 Cmd Type
IM2 FallBackMode
IM2 DefaultValue
IM2 FrameSyncTim
IM3 Cmd Type
IM3 FallBackMode
IM3 DefaultValue
IM3 FrameSyncTim
IM4 Cmd Type
IM4 FallBackMode
IM4 DefaultValue
IM4 FrameSyncTim
IM5 Cmd Type
IM5 FallBackMode
IM5 DefaultValue
IM5 FrameSyncTim
IM6 Cmd Type
IM6 FallBackMode
IM6 DefaultValue
IM6 FrameSyncTim
Loopback Status
16
15
Test Pattern
IM Msg Alarm Lvl
15
Loopback Mode
INTERMICOM CONF
15
15
IM H/W Status
15
Channel Status
2B
3A
39
38
33
32
31
30
2B
2A
29
28
23
22
21
20
1B
1A
19
18
13
12
11
10
1
0
52
51
50
45
44
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Binary Flags (8 bits) Indexed String Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Courier Data Type
G215
G212
G215
G212
G215
G211
G215
G211
G215
G211
G215
G211
G217
G214
G216
G217
410550
410549
410548
410547
410545
410544
410543
410542
410540
410539
410538
410537
410535
410534
410533
410532
410530
410529
410528
410527
410525
410524
410523
410522
410520
310021
410508
410507
310020
310019
410551
410549
410548
410547
410546
410544
410543
410542
410541
410539
410538
410537
410536
410534
410533
410532
410531
410529
410528
410527
410526
410524
410523
410522
410521
310021
410508
410507
310020
310019
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Direct
25
256
Disabled
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data
Setting
Setting
Data
Data
Cell Type
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
100
8
1
Max
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,1
1
2
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Defaut
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
Alarm level before default data is assigned in inputs InterMiCOM signal 1
Binary flags to set InterMiCOM signal Loopback test status
Internal / External loopback
Linked to cell 0x1611 Communication Link Fail status four power cycle test InterMiCOM hardware status
Comment
Page 22
P44x/EN GC /E44
18
18
18
18
18
18
ETHERNET NCIT
Physical Link
AntiAlaising Fil
Merge Unit Delay
L.N. Arrangement
Logical Node 1
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
LN2 CT Ratio
Logical Node 1B
LN1B VT Ratio
LN1B Input
Logical Node 2B
LN2B VT Ratio
LN2B Input
CTRL I/P LABELS
Control Input 1
Control Input 2
Control Input 3
Control Input 4
Control Input 5
Control Input 6
18
16
IM8 FrameSyncTim
LN2 VT Ratio
16
IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue
18
16
IM8 FallBackMode
Logical Node 2
16
IM8 Cmd Type
18
16
IM7 FrameSyncTim
18
16
IM7 DefaultValue
LN1 CT Ratio
16
IM7 FallBackMode
LN1 VT Ratio
16
IM7 Cmd Type
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4B
4A
49
48
43
42
41
40
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Voltage)
ASCII Text(34 characters)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Voltage)
ASCII Text(34 characters)
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Voltage)
ASCII Text(34 characters)
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Voltage)
ASCII Text(34 characters)
Indexed String
Courier Number(Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Float
Unsigned Integer(16 bit)
Indexed Strings
Indexed Strings
Courier Data Type
G302
G35
G3
G302
G35
G3
G2
G35
G3
G2
G35
G3
G240
G37
G37
G300
G215
G212
G215
410140
410132
410124
410116
410108
410100
410560
410559
410558
410557
410555
410554
410553
410147
410139
410131
410123
410115
410107
410561
410559
410558
410557
410556
410554
410553
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End G212 410552 410552
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G2
G1
G1
G1
G2
G1
G1
Control Input 6
Control Input 5
Control Input 4
Control Input 3
Control Input 2
Control Input 1
A-N
1
Logical Node 4
A-N
1
Logical Node 3
1
1
Logical Node 2
1
1
Logical Node 1
LN 1
0
Disabled
Electrical
1,5
0
Default
Direct
1,5
0
Default
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G1 Direct
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
0,1
65
0
0,1
65
0,1
0,1
65
0,1
0,1
65
0
0
0
1
0,01
0
0
0
0,01
0
0
0
Min
163
163
163
163
163
163
5
1000
90
5
1000000
90
1000000
1000000
90
1000000
1000000
90
10
0,003
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
1,5
1
1
2
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0,1
1
1
0,1
1
0,1
0,1
1
0,1
0,1
1
1
0,00025
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
0,01
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * *
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
(1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10)
(1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10)
(1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 1) or (1804 =2) or (1804 = 3) or (1804 = 4) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 5) or (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 7) or (1804 = 8) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10) (1804 = 6) or (1804 = 9) or (1804 = 10)
visible if bit6 of model number = A
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Assign logic 0 or 1 to InterMiCOM signal
Latch or Default
InterMiCOM signal 1
Comment
Page 23
P44x/EN GC /E44
00
1
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
Control Input 7
Control Input 8
Control Input 9
Control Input 10
Control Input 11
Control Input 12
Control Input 13
Control Input 14
Control Input 15
Control Input 16
Control Input 17
Control Input 18
Control Input 19
Control Input 20
Control Input 21
Control Input 22
Control Input 23
Control Input 24
Control Input 25
Control Input 26
Control Input 27
Control Input 28
Control Input 29
Control Input 30
Control Input 31
Control Input 32
GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS GROUP 1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS Line Setting
Line Length
Line Length
3
2
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number (miles)
Courier Number (metres)
(Sub Heading)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Courier Data Type
41002
41000
410348
410340
410332
410324
410316
410308
410300
410292
410284
410276
410268
410260
410252
410244
410236
410228
410220
410212
410204
410196
410188
410180
410172
410164
410156
410148
41003
41001
410355
410347
410339
410331
410323
410315
410307
410299
410291
410283
410275
410267
410259
410251
410243
410235
410227
410219
410211
410203
410195
410187
410179
410171
410163
410155
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G35
G35
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
62
100000
Control Input 32
Control Input 31
Control Input 30
Control Input 29
Control Input 28
Control Input 27
Control Input 26
Control Input 25
Control Input 24
Control Input 23
Control Input 22
Control Input 21
Control Input 20
Control Input 19
Control Input 18
Control Input 17
Control Input 16
Control Input 15
Control Input 14
Control Input 13
Control Input 12
Control Input 11
Control Input 10
Control Input 9
Control Input 8
Control Input 7
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0.2
300
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Min
625
1000000
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Max
0.005
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Setting strored in Km, displayed using miles
Length in Km
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Default PSL Text for Control Input DDB
Comment
Page 24
P44x/EN GC /E44
30
30
R1G
R1Ph
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
kZp Res Comp
kZp Angle
Zp
RpG
RpPh
tZp
R3Ph - R4Ph
Zone P - Direct.
30
R3G - R4G
30
30
Z3
tZ4
30
kZ3/4 Angle
30
30
kZ3/4 Res Comp
30
30
tZ2
Z4
30
R2Ph
tZ3
30
30
R2G
30
30
Z1X
Z2
30
Z1
30
30
kZ1 Angle
kZ2 Angle
30
kZ1 Res Comp
30
30
Zone Status
30
30
Zone Setting
kZ2 Res Comp
30
Line Angle
tZ1
30
Line Impedance
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number
Indexed String
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Number(Ohm)
Courier Number (Angle)
Binary Flag (8 bits) Courier Number
(Sub Heading)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number(Ohms)
Courier Data Type
G120
41040
41039
41038
41036
41035
41034
41033
41032
41030
41029
41028
41027
41025
41024
41023
41022
41021
41020
41018
41017
41016
41015
41014
41013
41011
41009
41008
41007
41006
41040
41039
41038
41037
41035
41034
41033
41032
41031
41029
41028
41027
41026
41024
41023
41022
41021
41020
41019
41017
41016
41015
41014
41013
41012
41010
41008
41007
41006
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41004 41005
G2
G2
G2
G35
G2
G2
G123
G2
G35
G2
G2
G2
G35
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G35
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G35
G35
G2
G2
G120
G2
0.4
25
25
25
0
1
Directional Fwd
1
40
0.6
30
30
30
0
1
0.2
20
20
20
0
1
0
10
10
15
10
0
1
000011110
70
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G35 12
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0.001*V1/I1
-180
0
0
0
0.001*V1/I1
0
0
0
0.001*V1/I1
-180
0
0
0
0
0.001*V1/I1
-180
0
0
0
0
0.001*V1/I1
0.001*V1/I1
-180
0
0
-90
0.001*V1/I1
Min
10
400*V1/I1
400*V1/I1
500*V1/I1
180
7
1
10
500*V1/I1
10
400*V1/I1
400*V1/I1
500*V1/I1
180
7
10
400*V1/I1
400*V1/I1
500*V1/I1
180
7
10
400*V1/I1
400*V1/I1
500*V1/I1
500*V1/I1
180
7
31
90
500*V1/I1
Max
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0.01
0.01*V1/I1
0.01*V1/I1
2
2
2
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.1
0.001
1
0.01
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.01
0.01*V1/I1
0.01*V1/I1
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.1
0.001
0.01
0.01*V1/I1
0.01*V1/I1
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.1
0.001
0.002
0.01*V1/I1
0.01*V1/I1
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.001*V1/I1 2
0.1
0.001
1
0.1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 0.001*V1/I1 2 * * * *
Step
((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1)) or ((3007 AND 001100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) ((3007 AND 010100b) > 0) and (301D = 1))
(3007 AND 010000b) > 0
(3007 AND 010000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 001000b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000010b) > 0
(3007 AND 000001b) > 0
Positive Sequence Angle
Positive Sequence Impedance
Comment
Page 25
P44x/EN GC /E44
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
Serial Comp Line
Zone Overlap Mode
Z1m Tilt Angle
Z1p Tilt Angle
Z2/Zp Tilt Angle
Fwd Zone Chg Del
Fault Locator
kZm Mutual Comp
kZm Angle
31
Unblocking Logic
31
31
PAP : P1
WI : Trip Time Delay
31
31
WI : V< Thres.
PAP : Trip Delayed Enable
31
WI : Single Pole Trip
PAP : TeleTrip Enable
31
31
WI :Mode Status
31
31
tReversal Guard
Weak Infeed
31
Tp
31
31
DistCR
Z1Ext On Chan.Fail
31
Sig. Send Zone
31
31
Trip Mode
31
31
Fault Type
SOFT Delay
31
Standard Mode
TOR-SOTF Mode
1
31
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
00
31
DISTANCE ELEMENTS GROUP 1 DISTANCE SCHEMES Program Mode
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Courier Number(Time)
Binary Flags (16bits)
Indexed String
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number(Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number
(Sub Heading)
Courier Number(Time)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number (Angle)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Data Type
G37
G37
G37
G37
G116
G37
G118
G113
G109
G108
G114
G115
G107
G106
41068
41067
41066
41065
41064
41063
41062
41061
41060
41059
41058
41057
41056
41055
41054
41053
41052
41051
41050
41048
41047
41045
41046
41044
41043
41042
41041
41068
41067
41066
41065
41064
41063
41062
41061
41060
41059
41058
41057
41056
41055
41054
41053
41052
41051
41050
41048
41047
41045
41046
41044
41043
41042
41041
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G37
G37
G37
G2
G2
G37
G116
G37
G2
G118
G113
G2
G2
G109
G108
G114
G115
G107
G106
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G37
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
0.06
45
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
110
48
None
0.02
0.02
None
None
Force 3 Poles Trip
Both Enabled
Basic + Z1X
Standard Scheme
0
0
0,03
0
0
0
Disableb
Disableb
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0
0
0
10
0
0
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-180
0
0
-45
-45
-45
0
0
Min
1
1
1
1
70
1
3
1
3600
8192
2
0.15
1
5
3
2
2
6
1
180
7
0,1
45
45
45
1
1
Max
1
1
1
0.002
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.002
0.002
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1
0,01
0,01
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Type of TAC Receive
(((3102 = 5) OR (3102 = 6)) AND (3101 = 0)) OR (((3106 = 4) OR (3106 = 5)) AND (3101 = 1)) OR (3901 = 1 AND 3906 = 1)Time Delay Reversal Guard
Type of Scheme on signal Recieve
Signal Send Zone
Trip mode for the distance protection
(3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) (3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0)) (((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) AND (301D = 0)) OR (3007 AND 001000b) > 0) AND (3007 AND 000010b)) OR (((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) AND (301D = 0)) AND (3007 AND 001000b) > 0) (3007 AND 001010b) > 0) or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
or ((3007 AND 000100b) > 0) and (301D = 0))
Comment
Page 26
P44x/EN GC /E44
31
31
31
31
31
PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay
PAP : P2
PAP : P3
PAP : 3P Trip Delay
PAP : Residual Current
35
35
35
35
I>1 Directional
I>1 VTS Block
I>1 Current Set
I>1 Time Delay
5
4
3
2
00
0D
1
32
Stable Swing
0C
35
32
Out of Step
0B
0A
35
32
Blocking Zones
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1E
1D
1C
POWER-SWING GROUP 1 BACK-UP I> I>1 Function
32
Unblocking Time-Delay
32
I2 > Status
32
32
IN > (% Imax)
Delta I Status
32
IN > Status
32
32
DX
Imax Line >
32
32
32
LoL: Window DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1 POWER-SWING DR
32
1
31
31
LoL: I<
Imax Line > Status
00
31
LoL. Chan. Fail
I2 > (% Imax)
1F
31
LoL: Mode Status
1A
Loss Of Load
1B
31
31
PAP : K
19
18
17
16
15
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Unisgned Integer (16 bits)
Binary Flag(8 bits) Indexed String Unisgned Integer (16 bits)
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Courier Number (%)
Indexed String
Courier Number (%)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Ohms)
Courier Number (Ohms)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Courier Number
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Data Type
G45
G44
G43
G119
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
G37
41254
41253
41252
41251
41250
41162
41161
41160
41159
41158
41157
41156
41155
41154
41153
41152
41151
41150
41078
41077
41076
41075
41074
41073
41072
41071
41070
41069
41254
41253
41252
41251
41250
41162
41161
41160
41159
41158
41157
41156
41155
41154
41153
41152
41151
41150
41078
41077
41076
41075
41074
41073
41072
41071
41070
41069
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G2
G2
G45
G44
G43
G119
G2
G37
G2
G37
G2
G37
G2
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G37
G37
G2
G2
G2
G37
G37
G2
1
1.5
Non-Directional
Directional Fwd
DT
1
1
0
30
Enabled
3
Enabled
30
Enabled
40
Enabled
0.5
0.5
0.04
0.5
Disabled
Disabled
0,5
0.5*I1
2
Disabled
Disabled
0,5
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1*I1
0
10
0
10
0
0
0
0.01
0.05*I1
0
0
0,5
0.1*I1
1
0
0
0,1
Min
100
4.0*I1
1
2
10
255
255
15
30
1
20*I1
1
100
1
100
1
400*V1/I1
400*V1/I1
0.1
1*I1
1
1
1
1*I1
12
1
1
1,5
Max
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1
1
0.01*I1
1
1
1
1
1
0.01*V1/I1
0.01*V1/I1
0.01
0.05*I1
1
1
0,05
0.01*I1
0,1
1
1
0,1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
(3112=1) OR (3113=1)
(3112=1) OR (3113=1)
Comment
Page 27
P44x/EN GC /E44
35
35
35
35
35
35
I>3 Status
I>3 Current Set
I>3 Time Delay
I>4 Status
I>4 Current Set
I>4 Time Delay
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
00
1
6
37
I2> Char Angle
4
5
37
36
I2> Time Delay
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Broken Conductor
36
36
I2> Current Set
3
2
36
35
I>2 tRESET
I2> VTS
35
I>2 Reset Char
12
36
35
I>2 Time Dial
11
I2> Directional
35
I>2 TMS
10
0F
1
35
I>2 Time Delay VTS
00
35
I>2 Time Delay
0E
36
35
I>2 Current Set
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
36
35
I>2 VTS Block
7
8
BACK-UP I> GROUP 1 NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2> Status
35
I>1 tRESET
35
35
I>1 Reset Char
I>2 Directional
35
I>1 Time Dial
I>2 Function
35
35
I>1 TMS
35
I>1 Time Delay VTS
6
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Indexed String
Courier Number (Angle)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Data Type
G37
G45
G44
G37
G37
G37
G60
G45
G44
G43
G60
41350
41305
41304
41303
41302
41301
41300
41275
41274
41273
41272
41271
41270
41269
41268
41267
41266
41265
41264
41263
41262
41261
41260
41259
41258
41257
41256
41255
41350
41305
41304
41303
41302
41301
41300
41275
41274
41273
41272
41271
41270
41269
41268
41267
41266
41265
41264
41263
41262
41261
41260
41259
41258
41257
41256
41255
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G37
G2
G2
G2
G45
G44
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G2
G37
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G45
G44
G43
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
Enabled
-45
10
0.2
Non-Directional
Non-Directional
Enabled
4
4
Disabled
3
3
Enabled
0
DT
7
1
2
2
2
Non-Directional
Non-Directional
DT
0
DT
7
1
0.2
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
-95
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0.5
0.025
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0
0.5
0.025
0
Min
1
95
100
4*I1
1
2
1
100
32*I1
1
100
32*I1
1
100
1
15
1.2
100
100
4.0*I1
1
2
10
100
1
15
1.2
100
Max
1
1
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
0.01
0.01*I1
1
0.01
0.01*I1
1
0.01
1
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
0.01
1
0.1
0.025
0.01
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
5>=350B>=1 OR (3513=0 AND 350B >=6)
5>=350B>=2
350B 0 AND 350C0 AND 350D = 1
5>=3501>=1 OR (3509=0 AND 3501 >=6)
5>=3501>=2
3501 0 AND 35020 AND 3503 = 1
Comment
Page 28
P44x/EN GC /E44
37
37
37
I2/I1 Setting
I2/I1 Time Delay
I2/I1 Trip
38
IN>1 Reset Char
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
IN>2 Current Set
IN>2 Time Delay
IN>2 Time Delay VTS
IN>3 Status
IN>3 Directional
IN>3 VTS Block
IN>3 Current Set
IN>3 Time Delay
IN>3 Time Delay VTS
IN>4 Status
IN>4 Directional
IN>4 VTS Block
IN>4 Current Set
IN>4 Time Delay
38
38
IN>1 Time Dial
IN>2 VTS Block
38
IN>1 TMS
38
38
IN>1 Time Delay VTS
IN>2 Directional
38
IN>1 Time Delay
38
38
IN>1 Current Set
38
38
IN>1 VTS Block
IN>2 Status
38
IN>1 Directional
IN>1 tRESET
1
38
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
00
38
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP 1 EARTH FAULT O/C IN>1 Function
4
3
2
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Decimal)
Courier Data Type
G45
G44
G37
G45
G44
G37
G45
G44
G37
G60
G45
G44
G43
41426
41425
41424
41423
41422
41421
41420
41419
41418
41417
41416
41415
41414
41413
41412
41411
41410
41409
41408
41407
41406
41405
41404
41403
41402
41401
41400
41353
41352
41426
41425
41424
41423
41422
41421
41420
41419
41418
41417
41416
41415
41414
41413
41412
41411
41410
41409
41408
41407
41406
41405
41404
41403
41402
41401
41400
41352
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41351 41351
G2
G2
G45
G44
G37
G2
G2
G2
G45
G44
G37
G2
G2
G2
G45
G44
G37
G2
G60
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
G45
G44
G43
G37
G2
2
0.3
Non-Directional
Non-Directional
Enabled
2
2
0.3
Non-Directional
Non-Directional
Enabled
2
2
0.3
Non-Directional
Non-Directional
Enabled
0
DT
7
1
0.2
1
0.2
Non-Directional
Directional Fwd
DT
Disabled
60
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G2 0.2
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0
0.5
0.025
0
0
0.08*I1
0
0
0
0
0
0.2
Min
200
32*I1
1
2
1
200
200
32*I1
1
2
1
200
200
32*I1
1
2
1
100
1
15
1.2
200
200
4.0*I1
1
2
10
1
100
1
Max
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
0.01
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
0.01
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
0.01
1
0.1
0.025
0.01
0.01
0.01*I1
1
1
1
1
0.1
0.01
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
38110 AND 3813=1
380B0 AND 380D=1
5>=3801>=1 OR (3809=0 AND 3801>=6)
5>=3801>=2
38010 AND 38020 AND 3803=1
Change scaling factor
I>2 Overcurrent Status
Comment
Page 29
P44x/EN GC /E44
38
38
38
38
IN>4 Time Delay VTS
IN> Directional
IN> Char Angle
Polarisation
3A
3A
3A
Thermal Alarm
Time Constant 1
Time Constant 2
1
42
42
42
UNDER VOLTAGE
V< Measur't Mode
3
2
00
42
ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1 VOLT PROTECTION V< & V> MODE
Indexed String
(Sub Heading)
Binary Flags (8bits)
Courier Number (Power)
Courier Number (Current)
G47
G121
41950
41949
41604
41603
41950
41949
41604
41603
G47
G121
G2
G2
Phase-Neutral
0
0,5
0,1
1
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
0
0
0.3*I1*V1
0.05*I1
0
0
1
15
6*I1*V1
1*I1
10
2
1
1
0.01*I1*V1
0,01
0,01
0,2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5
G2
Setting
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
4
41602
0
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Residual Power
41602
G2
0
1
1
1
0.01*I1
2
0,1
0.002
1
1
0,002
0.01*I1
0.01
1
1
1
1
Residual Current
Courier Number (Time)
41601
Setting
200
200
100
3.2*I1
1
1
1
1
2
10
4*I1
20
1
1
1
95
3
41601
Enabled
1
1
50
0.08*I1
0
0,1
0
0
0
0
0.05*I1
0.5
0
0
0
-95
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d 2 * * * *
Basis Time Delay
Courier Number (Time)
G37
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
0.01
Step
2
41600
5
10
70
1
Single
0,6
0.02
Three Phase
Shared
0
0.1
1
Zero Sequence
Enabled
Zero Sequence
-45
200
Max
K Time Delay Factor
41600
G2
G2
G2
G2
G67
G2
G2
G48
G112
G2
G2
G2
G46
G37
G46
G2
0
Min
*
G37
41504
41503
41502
41501
41458
41457
41456
41455
41454
41453
41452
41451
41450
41429
41428
Setting
Cell Type
*
Indexed String
41504
41503
41502
41501
41500
41458
41457
41456
41455
41454
41453
41452
41451
41450
41429
41428
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus G2 2
1
Courier Number (time-minutes)
Courier Number (time-minutes)
Courier Number (percentage)
G67
G46
G37
G46
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End 41427 41427
00
5
4
3
Courier Number (current)
Indexed String
Courier Number()
Courier Number(Time)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Current)
Courier Number (Voltage)
Indexed String
Indexed String
Indexed String
Courier Number(Angle)
(Sub Heading)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Data Type
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1 ZERO SEQ. POWER Zero Seq. Power Status
3C
3A
Thermal Trip
2
1
9
3A
39
IN Rev Factor
8
0
39
Tp
7
3A
39
Tripping
6
5
4
3
AIDED DEF GROUP 1 THERMAL OVERLOAD Characteristic
39
39
IN Forward
39
39
V> Voltage Set
Scheme Logic
39
Polarisation
Time Delay
1
39
2
00
39
EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1 AIDED DEF Channel Aided DEF Status
1F
1E
1D
1C
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
4204 0 OR 4208 0 OR 420D 0 OR 4211 0
3802 > 0 0R 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818 > 0
3802 >0 0R 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818 > 0
3802 >0 OR 380C > 0 OR 3812 > 0 OR 3818
38170 AND 3819=1
Comment
Page 30
P44x/EN GC /E44
42
V>1 TMS
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
CB Fail 1 Timer
CB Fail 2 Status
CB Fail 2 Timer
CBF Non I Reset
CBF Ext Reset
UNDER CURRENT
I < Current Set
1
46
46
46
VTS Time Delay
VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit
3
2
00
46
CB FAIL & I< GROUP 1 SUPERVISION VT SUPERVISION
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
45
45
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
00
CB Fail 1 Status
5
6
45
VOLT PROTECTION GROUP 1 CB FAIL & I< BREAKER FAIL
42
42
V>1 Time Delay
V>2 Time Delay
42
V>1 Voltage Set
42
42
V>1 Function
42
42
V> Measur't Mode
V>2 Voltage Set
42
OVERVOLTAGE
V>2 Status
42
V=2) AND 0707=1) OR ( (3>= 4903>=2) AND 0708=1 )
( (3>= 4902>=1) AND 0707=1) OR ( (3>= 4903>=1) AND 0708=1 )
Three Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1
Single Phase Reclosing - Dead Time 1
Mode on Three Phase Tripping
Mode on Single Phase Tripping
(4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0
(4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0
(4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0
(4801 OR 4802) AND 100b) > 0
(((4801 OR 4802) AND 101b) > 0 AND (0A10=0)) OR 0A10=1
(((4801 OR 4802) AND 010b) > 0 AND (0A10=0)) OR 0A10=1
(((4801 OR 4802) AND 110b) > 0 AND (0A10=1)) OR 0A10=0
(((4801 OR 4802) AND 001b) > 0 AND (0A10=1)) OR 0A10=0
Comment
Page 32
P44x/EN GC /E44
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
Opto Input 12
Opto Input 13
Opto Input 14
Opto Input 15
Opto Input 16
Opto Input 17
Opto Input 18
Opto Input 19
Opto Input 20
Opto Input 21
Opto Input 22
4A
Opto Input 8
Opto Input 11
4A
Opto Input 7
4A
4A
Opto Input 6
4A
4A
Opto Input 5
Opto Input 10
4A
Opto Input 4
Opto Input 9
4A
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Opto Input 3
0F
1
Block A/R
0E
0D
4A
49
AUTORECLOSE LOCKOUT
4A
49
C/S on 3P Rcl DT1
0C
Opto Input 2
49
A/R Inhbit Wind
0B
00
49
Discrimination Time
9
0A
4A
49
Reclose Time Delay
AUTORECLOSE GROUP 1 INPUT LABELS Opto Input 1
49
49
Reclaim Time
49
Dead Time 4
8
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Binary Flag (32 bits)
(Sub Heading)
Indexed String
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Number (Time)
Courier Data Type
G117
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
42568
42560
42552
42544
42536
42528
42520
42512
42504
42496
42488
42480
42472
42464
42456
42448
42440
42432
42424
42416
42408
42400
42312
42311
42310
42309
42308
42307
42306
42575
42567
42559
42551
42543
42535
42527
42519
42511
42503
42495
42487
42479
42471
42463
42455
42447
42439
42431
42423
42415
42407
41313
42311
42310
42309
42308
42307
42306
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G117
G37
G2
G2
G2
G2
G2
Opto Label 22
Opto Label 21
Opto Label 20
Opto Label 19
Opto Label 18
Opto Label 17
Opto Label 16
Opto Label 15
Opto Label 14
Opto Label 13
Opto Label 12
Opto Label 11
Opto Label 10
Opto Label 09
Opto Label 08
Opto Label 07
Opto Label 06
Opto Label 05
Opto Label 04
Opto Label 03
Opto Label 02
Opto Label 01
524287
Enabled
5
5
0.1
180
180
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
0
1
0,1
0.1
1
1
Min
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
524287
1
3600
5
10
600
3600
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
1
1
1
0,01
0.1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Select Synchro Check
(4902=3 AND 0707=1) OR (4903=3 AND 0708=1)
Comment
Page 33
P44x/EN GC /E44
4A
4A
Opto Input 23
Opto Input 24
1
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
Relay 8
Relay 9
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
Relay 21
Relay 22
Relay 23
Relay 24
Relay 25
Relay 26
Relay 27
Relay 28
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
00
4B
INPUT LABELS GROUP 1 OUTPUT LABELS Relay 1
18
17
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Courier Data Type
42816
42808
42800
42792
42784
42776
42768
42760
42752
42744
42736
42728
42720
42712
42704
42696
42688
42680
42672
42664
42656
42648
42640
42632
42624
42616
42608
42600
42584
42576
42823
42815
42807
42799
42791
42783
42775
42767
42759
42751
42743
42735
42727
42719
42711
42703
42695
42687
42679
42671
42663
42655
42647
42639
42631
42623
42615
42607
42591
42583
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
Relay Label 28
Relay Label 27
Relay Label 26
Relay Label 25
Relay Label 24
Relay Label 23
Relay Label 22
Relay Label 21
Relay Label 20
Relay Label 19
Relay Label 18
Relay Label 17
Relay Label 16
Relay Label 15
Relay Label 14
Relay Label 13
Relay Label 12
Relay Label 11
Relay Label 10
Relay Label 09
Relay Label 08
Relay Label 07
Relay Label 06
Relay Label 05
Relay Label 04
Relay Label 03
Relay Label 02
Relay Label 01
Opto Label 24
Opto Label 23
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Min
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Comment
Page 34
P44x/EN GC /E44
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
50
70
90
B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
Relay 29
Relay 30
Relay 31
Relay 32
Relay 33
Relay 34
Relay 35
Relay 36
Relay 37
Relay 38
Relay 39
Relay 40
Relay 41
Relay 42
Relay 43
Relay 44
Relay 45
Relay 46
OUTPUT LABEL GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows
GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows
GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows
(No Header) Select Event Time & Date Record Type Faulted Phases Active Setting Group Time Stamp UNUSED Started Elements (1) Tripped Elements (1) UNUSED System Frequency
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
ASCII Text (16 chars)
Courier Data Type
47000
45000
43000
42960
42952
42944
42936
42928
42920
42912
42904
42896
42888
42880
42872
42864
42856
42848
42840
42832
42824
48999
46999
44999
42967
42959
42951
42943
42935
42927
42919
42911
42903
42895
42887
42879
42871
42863
42855
42847
42839
42831
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
G3
Relay Label 46
Relay Label 45
Relay Label 44
Relay Label 43
Relay Label 42
Relay Label 41
Relay Label 40
Relay Label 39
Relay Label 38
Relay Label 37
Relay Label 36
Relay Label 35
Relay Label 34
Relay Label 33
Relay Label 32
Relay Label 31
Relay Label 30
Relay Label 29
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Cell Type
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
Min
This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01] 00 Auto extraction Event Record ColumN/A 1 Unsigned Integer(2) Setting 0 2 IEC870 Time & Date (From Record) Data 3 Ascii String(32) Data 4 Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String Data 5 Unsigned Integer Data 6 7 8 Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 0..31 1 bit per elementLSBData 9 Binary Flags (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 0..31 1 bit per elementLSBData 0A 0B Courier Number (frequency) Data
00
00
00
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
1E
1D
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
65535
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
163
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Step
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
Password Model Level 1 2
*
* *
* * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
* *
* * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
Comment
Page 35
P44x/EN GC /E44
B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0 B0
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2
Fault Duration CB Operate Time Relay Trip Time Fault Location Fault Location Fault Location Fault Location IA IB IC UNUSED UNUSED UNUSED VAN VBN VCN Fault Resistor Fault in Zone
No Header Select Record Time and Date Record Text Error No1 Error No2
DATA TRANSFER (No Header) Domain Sub-Domain Version Reference Transfer Mode Data Transfer
Data Data Data Data Data
Cell Type
Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (Voltage) Courier Number (ohms) Indexed String
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number (time) Courier Number(metres) Courier Number(miles) Courier Number(ohms) Courier Number(%) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current) Courier Number (current)
Courier Data Type
Min
00 1 2 03-1F
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
RECORDER CONTROL (No Header)B3 UNUSED B3 Recorder Source B3 Reserved for future use B3
RECORDER EXTRACTION COLUMNB4 Select Record Number - n B4 Trigger Time B4 Active Channels B4 Channel Types B4 Channel Offsets B4 Channel Scaling B4 Channel SkewVal B4 Channel MinVal B4 Channel MaxVal B4 No. Of Samples B4 Trig Position B4 Time Base B4 Sample Times B4 Dist. Channel 1 B4 Dist. Channel 2 B4 Dist. Channel 3 B4 Dist. Channel 4 B4 Dist. Channel 5 B4 Dist. Channel 6 B4 Dist. Channel 7 B4 Dist. Channel 8 B4
00 4 8 0C 18 1C 20
N/A Unsigned Integer IEC870 Time & Date Binary Flag(32 Bits) N/A Binary Flag(32 Bits) N/A Repeated Group of Courier Number N/A Repeated Group of Courier Number N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Repeated Group of Integer(16-bit) N/A Unsigned integer (16-bit) N/A Integer (16-bit) N/A Courier Number(Seconds) N/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A
Indexed String
N/A 0
N/A Indexed String Indexed String Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) Not Used Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings G76 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers
0
Samples
6
G76
0
PSL Settings Group 1 256
G57 G90
Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Data
Setting Setting
Setting Setting Setting
-199
0
0 0 0
This is an invisible column for auto extraction of event records, do not redefine any of its rows but keep it consistent with column [01] 00 N/A 1 UINT16 Setting 0 2 IEC Date and Time Data 3 ASCII Text Data 4 UINT32 Data 5 UINT32 Data
0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
199
7
1 3 65535
65535
Max
1
1
1 1 1
1
Step
0
2
2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
* *
* * * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Text Description of Error Error Code Error Code
Comment
Page 36
P44x/EN GC /E44
28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F
00 1 2 3 4
00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A
B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4
Calibration Coefficients (Hidden) (NotB5 Cal Software Version B5 Cal Date and Time B5 Channel Types B5 Cal Coeffs B5
B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6 B6
B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7
BF BF BF BF BF
Dist. Channel 9 Dist. Channel 10 Dist. Channel 11 Dist. Channel 12 Dist. Channel 13 Dist. Channel 14 Dist. Channel 15 Dist. Channel 16 Dist. Channel 17 Dist. Channel 18 Dist. Channel 19 Dist. Channel 20 Dist. Channel 21 Dist. Channel 22 Dist. Channel 23 Dist. Channel 24 Dist. Channel 25 Dist. Channel 26 Dist. Channel 27 Dist. Channel 28 Dist. Channel 29 Dist. Channel 30 Dist. Channel 31 Dist. Channel 32
Comms Diagnostics (Hidden) Bus Comms Err Count Front Bus Message Count Front Protocol Err Count Front Busy Count Front Reset front count Bus Comms Err Count Rear Bus Message Count Rear Protocol Err Count Rear Busy Count Rear Reset rear count
PSL Data Grp1 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp2 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID
COMMS SYS DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfer UNUSED
00 1 2 3 5
00 01 02 03 11 12 13 21 22 23 31 32 33
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Menu Cell(2) Menu Cell(2) Unsigned Integer
ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits) ASCII Text (32 chars) IEC870 Date & Time Unsigned Integer (32 bits)
Note: No text in column text UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only)
N/A
N/A
31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086
31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087
G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Cell Type
B300 B400
0
Data Data Setting
0 Default PSL "model number"
0 Default PSL "model number"
0 Default PSL "model number"
Default PSL "model number"
N/A ASCII text 16 chars IEC Date and time Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel)
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A Repeated Group of Unsigned IntegeN/A
Courier Data Type
Min
Max
Step
* * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
* * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * *
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Comment
Page 37
P44x/EN GC /E44
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
Control Input 2 Config
Control Input 3 Config
Control Input 4 Config
Control Input 5 Config
Control Input 6 Config
Control Input 7 Config
Control Input 8 Config
Control Input 9 Config
Control Input 10 Config
Control Input 11 Config
Control Input 12 Config
Control Input 13 Config
Control Input 14 Config
Control Input 15 Config
Control Input 16 Config
Control Input 17 Config
Control Input 18 Config
Control Input 19 Config
Control Input 20 Config
Control Input 21 Config
Control Input 22 Config
Control Input 23 Config
Control Input 24 Config
Control Input 25 Config
FE
GN> Set
Control Input 1 Config
FE
YN> Set
BN> Set
FE
FE
CheckSync Line Volts
FE
UCA 2 Only Data Cells
CheckSync Bus Volts
BF
Block Transfer Ref
1E
1D
1C
1B
1A
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
0F
0E
0D
0C
0B
0A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
UCA 2 Only
UCA 2 Only
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus B200
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
Special cell that points to the correct PU setting cell - E/F Pu or SEF Pu.
Special cell that points to the correct PU setting cell - E/F Pu or SEF Pu.
Special cell that points to the correct PU setting cell - E/F Pu or SEF Pu.
(Note: No Text)
(Note: No Text)
Menu Cell(2)
Courier Data Type Data
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2 4c 4d * * * * * * * *
Comment
Page 38
P44x/EN GC /E44
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
Control Input 27 Config
Control Input 28 Config
Control Input 29 Config
Control Input 30 Config
Control Input 31 Config
Control Input 32 Config
Num Unextracted DR
Fault Locator Line Length
Modbus Status Register FF Modbus Status Register FF Number of Event records stored FF Number of Fault records stored FF Number of Maint records stored FF Additionnal data present FF Number of disturbance records. FF Oldest stored disturbance record. FF Number registers in current page. FF Disturbance record data [1-127] FF Disturbance record time stamp. FF SelectDisturbance record. FF Record Selection Command Register FF Record Control Command Register FF Event Type FF Modbus Adress FF Event Index FF Disturbance recorder status FF FileFormat FF IEC Time Format FF A Phase Watts FF B Phase Watts FF C Phase Watts FF A Phase VArs FF B Phase VArs FF C Phase VArs FF A Phase VA FF B Phase VA FF C Phase VA FF 3 Phase Watts FF 3 Phase VArs FF 3 Phase VA FF Zero Seq Power FF 3Ph W Fix Demand FF 3Ph VArs Fix Dem FF 3Ph W Peak Demand FF 3Ph VArs Peak Demand FF
FE
Control Input 26 Config
01 01 02 03 04 05 6 7 8 09-87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
1F
CourierRef Col Row
Courier Text
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Courrier Data Base
LCD Data Gro Modbus Address Courier Start End
Data GrouDefault Setting Modbus
Cell Reference Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer
N/A
Unsigned Integer
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A N/A
Binary Flags (16bits) Binary Flags(16 bits)
30001 30701 30100 30101 30102 30112 30800 30801 30802 30803 30930 40250 40400 40401 30107 30110 30111 30934 40250 40306 30360 30362 30364 30366 30368 30370 30372 30374 30376 30378 30380 30382 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392 40400 40401 30107 30110 30111 30934 40251 40306 30361 30363 30365 30367 30369 30371 30373 30375 30377 30379 30381 30383 30385 30387 30389 30391 30393
30929 30933
30112
30001 30701
G26 G26 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G18 G6 G13 G1 G1 G1 G1 G37 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 0 0 (From Record)
Special cell that references [47 01] / [47 02] depending upon the selected distance unit (miles or metres)
(Note: No Text) - Returns the number of unextracted Disturbance Records
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
(Note: No Text) - Returns "0" for latched configuration, Returns "10" for pulsed configuration
Courier Data Type
Data Data Data Data Data Data Setting Command Command Data Data Data Data Setting Setting
Data
Cell Type
0
1 0 0
Min
1
65535 24 4
Max
1
1 1 1
Step
2
2 2 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Password Model Level 1 2
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* *
* * * * * * * * * * * *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
4c 4d
Number of Disturbance Records (0 to 200) Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to 65535) Number of Registers in Current Page Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535) Timestamp of selected record Select Disturbance Record Record Selection Command register Record Control Command register Indicates type of event
No of event records stored Number of Fault records stored
Comment
Page 39
P44x/EN GC /E44
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 40
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
G1
UNSIGNED INTEGER eg. 5678 stored as 5678
G2
NUMERIC SETTING See 50300.3110.004
G3 0x00FF 0xFF00 G4
ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS Second character First character PLANT STATUS (1 REGISTER)
Reg 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000 G5
Plant Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Plant Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On) CONTROL STATUS (1 REGISTER)
0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000
Control Status 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 2 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 3 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 4 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 5 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 6 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 7 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 8 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 9 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 10 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 11 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 12 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 13 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 14 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 15 (0 = Off, 1 = On) Control Status 16 (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0 1 2 3 4
Record Control Command Register No Operation Clear event Records Clear Fault Record Clear Maitenance Records Reset Indications
0 1
VTS Indicate/Block Blocking Indication
G6
G7
G8
LOGIC INPUT STATUS (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400
Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised)
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 41
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000
G9
DESCRIPTION Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 17 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 18 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 19 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 20 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 21 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 22 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 23 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) Opto 24 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) RELAY OUTPUT STATUS
(Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 2 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 3 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 4 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 5 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 6 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 7 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 15 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 16 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 17 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 18 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 19 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 20 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 21 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 22 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 23 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 24 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 25 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 26 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 27 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 28 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 29 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 30 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 31 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 32 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated)
0 1 2
PASSWORD LEVEL (May not be needed see modbus) Level 0 Level 1 Level 2
0 1
YES/NO No Yes
0x007F 0x0FFF 0x9FBF 0xFFFF
TIME AND DATE (4 REGISTERS) This will take the IEC 870 format as shown in ref [J] section 5.1.16 First register - Years Second register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week Third Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes Fourth Register - Milli-seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
EVENT RECORD TYPE Latched alarm active Latched alarm inactive Self reset alarm active Self reset alarm inactive Relay event Opto event Protection event
G10
G11
G12
G13
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 42
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 7 8 9
DESCRIPTION Platform event Fault logged event Maintenance Record logged event
G14
PAS UTILISE Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
I> Function Link I>1 VTS Block I>1 VTS Block Non-Directionnal I>2 VTS Block I>2 VTS Block Non-Directionnal I>3 VTS Block I>4 VTS Block Not Used Not Used
0 1 2
DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS No Record Un-extracted Extracted
0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080
FAULTED PHASE Start A Start B Start C Start N Trip A Trip B Trip C Trip N
0 1 2 3
ACTIVE/INACTIVE Card not fitted Card failed Signal healthy No Signal
0x0000 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010
Record Selection Command Register No Operation Select next event Accept Event Select next Disturbance Record Accept disturbance record Select Next Disturbance record page
0 1 2 3
LANGUAGE English Francais Deutsch Espanol
G15
G16
G17
G18
G19
G20
(Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000, 0x00FF 0x0000, 0xFF00 0x00FF, 0x0000 0xFF00, 0x0000
G21 0 1
IEC870 Interface RS485 Fibre Optic
0 1 2
PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2. Level 1 - Password required for level 2. Level 2 - No passwords required.
0 1 2
Voltage Curve selection Disabled DT IDMT
2 REGISTERS
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
G22
G23
G24
PASSWORD (2 REGISTERS) First password character Second password character Third password character Fourth password character NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD SECURITY.
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 43
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456.789 stored as 123456789
G25
1 REGISTER
UNSIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES Example 50.050 stored as 50050
G26 VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004
Modbus Status Register RELAY STATUS In Service Status (1 = In Service / 0= Out Of Service) Minor Self Test Failure (1 = Failure / 0 = No failure) New autoextraction event available (1 = Available / 0 = Not Available)
0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080 0x0100 0x0200 0x0400 0x0800 0x1000 0x2000 0x4000 0x8000
Time Synchronisation (=1 after Modbus time synch. Resets to 0 after 5 minutes unless it is time synched again. Other time sources do not affect this bit). New auto extraction disturbance record available (1 = Available / 0 = Not available) Fault (Not used - always 0). Trip LED status (1 = LED on, 0 = LED off). Alarm status summary (logical OR of all alarm status bits). Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
G27
2 REGISTERS
UNSIGNED LONG VALUE High order word of long stored in 1st register Low order word of long stored in 2nd register Example 123456 stored as 123456
G28
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE POWER & WATT-HOURS Power = (Secondary power/CT secondary) * (100/VT secondary)
G29
3 REGISTER
POWER MULTIPLER All power measurments use a signed value of type G28 and a 2 register unsigned long multiplier of type G27 Value = Real Value*110/(CTsecondary*VTsecondary) For Primary Power Multipler = CTprimary * VTprimary/110 For Secondary Power Multipler = CTsecondary * VTsecondary/110
G30
1 REGISTER
SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (Product Dependent) VA VB VC VN IA IB IC IN IM V Checksync unasigned
G31
G32
Digital channel assignment 0 to 1024
G33
this mapping depend of the model (P441 P442 P444) 8/16/24 Optos These are example values. Need one to be unassigned 14/21/32 Relays 8 Feedback 72 - 1024 Internal Signals RECORDER TRIGGERING (2 REGISTERS, 32 BINARY FLAGS)
(Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010
Digital Channel 1 Bit 0 Digital Channel 1 Bit 1 Digital Channel 1 Bit 2 Digital Channel 1 Bit 3 Digital Channel 1 Bit 4
(0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 44
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
DESCRIPTION Digital Channel 1 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 1 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 0 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 1 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 2 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 3 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 4 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 5 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 6 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 7 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 8 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 9 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 10 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 11 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 12 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 13 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 14 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger) Digital Channel 2 Bit 15 (0 = No Trigger, 1= Trigger)
0 1
TRIGGER MODE Single Extended
G34
G35
Numeric Setting (as G2 but 2 registers) Number of steps from minimum value expressed as 2 register 32 bit unsigned int
G36 0 1 2 3 4
Test Mode No Operation 3 Pole Test Pole A Test Pole B Test Pole C Test
0 1
ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Enabled
0 1 2
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (Courier - EIA485) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
0 1 2
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
0 2
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870) 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s
0 1 2 3 4 5
COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC 60870) 1200 bits/s 2400 bits/s 4800 bits/s 9600 bits/s 19200 bits/s 38400 bits/s
0
COMMUNICATIONS PARITY Odd
G37
G38c
G38m
G38v
G38d
G39
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 45
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 1 2
DESCRIPTION Even None
0 1 2 3 4 5
CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A
0 1 2 3
CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING None Undervoltage Differential Both
0 1 2 3
CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL None Timer Frequency Both
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IDMT CURVE TYPE Disabled DT IEC S Invervse IEC V Inverse IEC E Inverse UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse IEEE V Inverse IEEE E Inverse US Inverse US ST Inverse
0 1 2
DIRECTION Non-Directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev
0 1
VTS BLOCK Block Non-Directional
0 1
POLARISATION Zero Sequence Neg Sequence
0 1
MEASURING MODE Phase-Phase Phase-Neutral
0 1
OPERATION MODE Any Phase Three Phase
0 1
V0 INPUT Measured Derived
0 1 2
FAULT LOCATION Distance Ohms % of Line
0 1 2 3 4
DEFAULT DISPLAY Date & Time Description Plant Reference U, I, Freq Freq, P, Q
G40
G41
G42
G43
G44
G45
G46
G47
G48
G49
G51
G52
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 46
Part B: Data Types TYPE G53
VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3 4 5
DESCRIPTION SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS No Operation All Settings Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4
0 1
SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS Primary Secondary
0 1 2
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL No Operation Trip Close
0 1 2 3 4 5
PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE VA VB VC IA IB IC
0 1
Data Transfer Domain PSL Settings PSL Configuration
0 1 2
SEF SELECTION SEF Enabled Wattmetric SEF REF Enabled
0 1
BATTERY STATUS Dead Healthy
0 1
IDMT CURVE TYPE DT Inverse
0 1
ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL Select via Menu Select via Optos
0 1 2
SAVE AS No Operation Save Abort
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
ISEF> Func Link ISEF>1 VTS Block ISEF>2 VTS Block ISEF>3 VTS Block ISEF>4 VTS Block ISEF>3 Block A/R ISEF>4 Block A/R Not Used Not Used
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
F< Function Link F4 Start I2> Start IN>1 Start IN>2 Start IN>3 Start IN>4 Start DEF Start V2 Start Broken Cond Start LOL Start Distance Start TOC Start Zero Seq. Pow. Start PAP Thermal Alarm
Any Trip Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip I2> Trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip DEF Trip V2 Trip Broken line Trip Z1 Trip Z2 Trip Z3 Trip Zp Trip Z4 Trip Z2 Aided Trip LOL Trip Soft Tor Trip WI Trip CB Fail1
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 49
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x0400, 0x0000 0x0800, 0x0000 0x1000, 0x0000 0x2000, 0x0000 0x4000, 0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
DESCRIPTION Trip CB Fail2 Trip Zero Seq. Pow. Trip PAP Trip Thermal Trip User
G86
Bit Description Tripped Elements(2) (Product Specific) (Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G87
Bit Description Fault Alarms (Product Specific) (Second reg, First Reg)(Courier and IEC870 Bit Position) 0x0000,0x0001 VT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0002 CT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0004 CB Status Alarm 0x0000,0x0008 AR Lockout Shot > 0x0000,0x0010 V2 Alarm 0x0000,0x0100 COS Alarm 0x0000,0x0200 CVT Fail Alarm 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 50
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
G88 0 1
Alarms Alarm Disabled Alarm Enabled
0 1
Main VT Location Line Bus
0 1 2 3
Group Selection Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
0 1
A/R Protection Blocking Allow Tripping Block Tripping
0 1
Lockout No Lockout Lockout
0 1 2
Commission Test No Operation Apply Test Remove Test
0 1
Commission Test No Operation Apply Test
G89
G90
G91
G92
G93
G94
G96
DESCRIPTION
Bit Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
G97 0 1
Alarm 1 Indexed Strings
General Alarm Prot'n Disabled f out of Range VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm Broken Cond. Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lockout F.F. Pre Lockout F.F. Lock Lockout Alarm CB Status Alarm Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthy Control No C/S AR Lockout Shot > SG-Opto Invalid A/R Fail V2 Alarm COS Alarm CVT Fail Alarm
Distance Unit Kilometres Miles
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 51
Part B: Data Types TYPE G98
VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1 2 3 4
DESCRIPTION Copy to No Operation Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CB Control Disabled Local Remote Local+Remote Opto Opto+local Opto+Remote Opto+Rem+local
G99
G100 to G500
ADD PRODUCT SPECIFIC DATA GROUPS HERE
G101 0 1 2 3
Reclosing Mode on Single Phase tripping 1 1/3 1/3/3 1/3/3/3
0 1 2 3
Reclosing Mode on Three Phase tripping 3 3/3 3/3/3 3/3/3/3
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Synchro Check Mode Live Bus / Dead Line Dead Bus / Live Line Live Bus / Live Line
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blocking type None Zone 1 unblocking Zones 1 and 2 unblocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 unblocking Blocking all zones Zone 1 blocking Zones 1 and 2 blocking Zones 1, 2 and 3 blocking
0 1
Program Mode Standard Scheme Open Scheme
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Standard Scheme Basic + Z1X P.O.P. Z1 P.O.P. Z2 P.U.P. Z2 P.U.P. Fwd B.O.P. Z1 B.O.P. Z2
0 1 2 3
Signal Send Zone None CsZ1 CsZ2 CsZ4
0 1 2 3
Type of Scheme None PermZ1 PermZ2 PermFwd
G102
G103
G105
G106
G107
G108
G109
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 52
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 4 5
DESCRIPTION BlkZ1 BlkZ2
0 1 2 3 4 5
Zone in Fault None Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone Programmable Zone 4
Bit Position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alarm 2 Indexed Strings Alarm No Presents Datas Acq Alarm Validity Failure Acq Alarm Mode Test Acq Alarm Not Synchro Datas Acq Alarm user 1 Alarm user 2 Alarm user 3 Alarm user 4 Alarm user 5
0 1 2
Type of Scheme Logic on Aided DEF Shared Blocking Permissive
0 1 2
Unblocking Mode None Loss of Guard Loss of Carrier
0 1 2
Trip Mode for the distance protection Force 3 Poles Trip 1 Pole Trip before T2 1 Pole Trip before T3
0 1 2
Fault Type Phase-to-ground Fault Enabled Phase-to-phase Fault Enabled Both Enabled
0 1 2 3
Weak-infeed Mode Disabled PAP Echo WI Trip & Echo
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18
Block A/R At T2 At T3 At Tzp LoL Trip I2> Trip I>1 Trip I>2 Trip V2 trip IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip Aided D.E.F Trip Zero. Seq. Power Trip IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip PAP Trip Thermal Trip
Bit 0 Bit 1
TOR SOTF Mode TOR Z1 Enabled TOR Z2 Enabled
G110
G111
G112
G113
G114
G115
G116
G117
G118
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 53
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15
DESCRIPTION TOR Z3 Enabled TOR All Zones Enabled TOR Dist. Scheme Enabled SOTF All Zones SOTF Level Detectors SOTF Z1 Enabled SOTF Z2 Enabled SOTF Z3 Enabled SOTF Z1 + Rev Enabled SOTF Z2 + Rev Enabled SOTF Dist. Scheme Enabled SOFT Disable Not Used Not Used
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
Power-Swing Zone Blocking Z1&Z1x blocking Z2 Blocking Z3 Blocking Zp Blocking Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
Zone Status Z1x Enabled Z2 Enabled Zp Enabled Z3 Enabled Z4 Enabled Not Used Not Used Not Used
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
V MODE V2 Trip Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit x
Plant Status All Poles Open Any Poles Closed Not used
0 1
DIRECTION Directional Fwd Directional Rev
G119
G120
G121
G122
G123
G124
TEST PORT STATUS (1 REGISTER) (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0001 0x0002 0x0004 0x0008 0x0010 0x0020 0x0040 0x0080
Test Port Status 1 Test Port Status 2 Test Port Status 3 Test Port Status 4 Test Port Status 5 Test Port Status 6 Test Port Status 7 Test Port Status 8
G125
2 REGISTER
Measurements in IEEE floating point format
G130
1REGISTER Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
Measurements Measurements and Location are not valid Measurements is valid Location is valid
(0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On) (0 = Off, 1 = On)
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 54
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK
DESCRIPTION
0 1 2
ENABLED / DISABLED Disabled Earth Fault O/C Zero Seq. Power
0 1 2 3 4 5
Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V Custom
0 1 2 3 4
Treshold Voltages 24-27V 30-34V 48-54V 110-125V 220-250V
G131
G200
G201
G202
Controll Input Status (2 REGISTERS) (2nd Reg, 1st Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set) Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0 1 2
Virtual Input No Operation Set Reset
0 1 2
TEST MODE Disabled Test Mode Blocked
0 1 2 3 4
CB Fail Reset Options I< Only CB Open & I< Prot Reset & I< Disable Prot Reset Or I<
G203
G204
G205
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 55
Part B: Data Types TYPE G206
VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1
DESCRIPTION COMMS MODE (RCUR1) IEC60870 FT1.2 10-bit
0 1
PORT CONFIG (RCUR1) K Bus EIA485 (RS485)
0 1 2
STATUS (RCUR1) K Bus OK EIA485 OK Fibre Optic
0 1 2
Blocking Command Blk_Disable Blk_Direct Blk_Blocking
0 1 2
Trip Command Trip_Disable Trip_Permissive Trip_Direct
0 1 2 3 4 5
Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
0 1
Trip Default Latched
0 1
Remote device type Remote_PX40 Remote PX30
0 1
DIRECT ACCESS KEYS Disabled Enabled
0 1 2 3
CONTROL INPUT COMMAND TEXT ON/OFF SET/RESET IN/OUT ENABLED/DISABLED
0x00000001 0x00000002 0x00000004 0x00000008 0x00000010 0x00000020 0x00000040 0x00000080 0x00000100 0x00000200 0x00000400 0x00000800 0x00001000 0x00002000 0x00004000 0x00008000 0x00010000 0x00020000 0x00040000 0x00080000 0x00100000 0x00200000 0x00400000
HOTKEY ENABLED CONTROL INPUTS Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23
G207
G208
G211
G212
G213
G215
G218
G231
G232
G233
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 56
Part B: Data Types TYPE
VALUE/BIT MASK 0x00800000 0x01000000 0x02000000 0x04000000 0x08000000 0x10000000 0x20000000 0x40000000 0x80000000
DESCRIPTION Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32
0 1
CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL TYPE Latched Pulsed
0 1
ETHERNET PROTOCOL UCA 2.0 UCA 2.0 GOOSE
0 1
Characteristic Standard 60%-80% 50% - 70 %
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Alarm Status 3 Battery fail Field Volt Fail Rear Comms fail GOOSE IED Absent NIC Not Fitted NIC No Response NIC Fatal Error NIC Soft. Reload Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Bad OSI Config. NIC Link Fail NIC SW Mis-Match IP Addr Conflict Reserved for InterMiCOM and other platform alarms
G234
G235
G237
G250
G251
RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (Second reg, First Reg) 0x0000,0x0001 0x0000,0x0002 0x0000,0x0004 0x0000,0x0008 0x0000,0x0010 0x0000,0x0020 0x0000,0x0040 0x0000,0x0080 0x0000,0x0100 0x0000,0x0200 0x0000,0x0400 0x0000,0x0800 0x0000,0x1000 0x0000,0x2000 0x0000,0x4000 0x0000,0x8000 0x0001,0x0000 0x0002,0x0000 0x0004,0x0000 0x0008,0x0000 0x0010,0x0000 0x0020,0x0000 0x0040,0x0000 0x0080,0x0000 0x0100,0x0000 0x0200,0x0000 0x0400,0x0000 0x0800,0x0000 0x1000,0x0000 0x2000,0x0000 0x4000,0x0000 0x8000,0x0000
Relay 33 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 34 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 35 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 36 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 37 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 38 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 39 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 40 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 41 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 42 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 43 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 44 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 45 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Relay 46 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
Courrier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 57
Part B: Data Types TYPE G239
VALUE/BIT MASK 0 1
DESCRIPTION IEC61850-9.2LE Electrical Fibre Optic
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Logical Node Arrangement LN 1 LN1(without I0)-LN2(I0) LN1-LN2(I0) LN1-LN2(6I) LN1-LN2(3 I) LN1-LN1B LN1-LN1B-LN2B LN1-LN2(6I)-LN1B LN1-LN2(I0)-LN1B 4 LN (I0) 4 LN (6i)
0 1 2 3 4 5
CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION A-N B-N C-N A-B B-C C-A
G240
G302
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 58
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_33 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_34 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_35 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_36 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_37 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_38 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_39 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_40 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_41 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_42 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_43 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_44 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_45 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_46 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_47 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_48 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_49 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_50 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_51 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_52 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_53 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_54 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_55 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_56 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_57 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_58 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_59 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_60 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_61 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_62 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_63 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_RELAY_64 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_17 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_18 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_19 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_20 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_21 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_22 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_23 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_24 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_25 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_26 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_27 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_28 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_29 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_30 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_31 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OPTO_ISOLATOR_32 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_OUTPUT_LED_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_B
Ordinal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
English Text Relay Label 01 Relay Label 02 Relay Label 03 Relay Label 04 Relay Label 05 Relay Label 06 Relay Label 07 Relay Label 08 Relay Label 09 Relay Label 10 Relay Label 11 Relay Label 12 Relay Label 13 Relay Label 14 Relay Label 15 Relay Label 16 Relay Label 17 Relay Label 18 Relay Label 19 Relay Label 20 Relay Label 21 Relay Label 22 Relay Label 23 Relay Label 24 Relay Label 25 Relay Label 26 Relay Label 27 Relay Label 28 Relay Label 29 Relay Label 30 Relay Label 31 Relay Label 32 Relay Label 33 Relay Label 34 Relay Label 35 Relay Label 36 Relay Label 37 Relay Label 38 Relay Label 39 Relay Label 40 Relay Label 41 Relay Label 42 Relay Label 43 Relay Label 44 Relay Label 45 Relay Label 46 Relay Label 47 Relay Label 48 Relay Label 49 Relay Label 50 Relay Label 51 Relay Label 52 Relay Label 53 Relay Label 54 Relay Label 55 Relay Label 56 Relay Label 57 Relay Label 58 Relay Label 59 Relay Label 60 Relay Label 61 Relay Label 62 Relay Label 63 Relay Label 64 Opto Label 01 Opto Label 02 Opto Label 03 Opto Label 04 Opto Label 05 Opto Label 06 Opto Label 07 Opto Label 08 Opto Label 09 Opto Label 10 Opto Label 11 Opto Label 12 Opto Label 13 Opto Label 14 Opto Label 15 Opto Label 16 Opto Label 17 Opto Label 18 Opto Label 19 Opto Label 20 Opto Label 21 Opto Label 22 Opto Label 23 Opto Label 24 Opto Label 25 Opto Label 26 Opto Label 27 Opto Label 28 Opto Label 29 Opto Label 30 Opto Label 31 Opto Label 32 LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 CB Aux A (52-A) CB Aux A (52-B) CB Aux B (52-A) CB Aux B (52-B)
Description OUTPUT RELAY 1 OUTPUT RELAY 2 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 OUTPUT RELAY 7 OUTPUT RELAY 8 OUTPUT RELAY 9 OUTPUT RELAY 10 OUTPUT RELAY 11 OUTPUT RELAY 12 OUTPUT RELAY 13 OUTPUT RELAY 14 OUTPUT RELAY 15 OUTPUT RELAY 16 OUTPUT RELAY 17 OUTPUT RELAY 18 OUTPUT RELAY 19 OUTPUT RELAY 20 OUTPUT RELAY 21 OUTPUT RELAY 22 OUTPUT RELAY 23 OUTPUT RELAY 24 OUTPUT RELAY 25 OUTPUT RELAY 26 OUTPUT RELAY 27 OUTPUT RELAY 28 OUTPUT RELAY 29 OUTPUT RELAY 30 OUTPUT RELAY 31 OUTPUT RELAY 32 OUTPUT RELAY 33 OUTPUT RELAY 34 OUTPUT RELAY 35 OUTPUT RELAY 36 OUTPUT RELAY 37 OUTPUT RELAY 38 OUTPUT RELAY 39 OUTPUT RELAY 40 OUTPUT RELAY 41 OUTPUT RELAY 42 OUTPUT RELAY 43 OUTPUT RELAY 44 OUTPUT RELAY 45 OUTPUT RELAY 46 OUTPUT RELAY 47 OUTPUT RELAY 48 OUTPUT RELAY 49 OUTPUT RELAY 50 OUTPUT RELAY 51 OUTPUT RELAY 52 OUTPUT RELAY 53 OUTPUT RELAY 54 OUTPUT RELAY 55 OUTPUT RELAY 56 OUTPUT RELAY 57 OUTPUT RELAY 58 OUTPUT RELAY 59 OUTPUT RELAY 60 OUTPUT RELAY 61 OUTPUT RELAY 62 OUTPUT RELAY 63 OUTPUT RELAY 64 OPTO ISOLATOR 1 OPTO ISOLATOR 2 OPTO ISOLATOR 3 OPTO ISOLATOR 4 OPTO ISOLATOR 5 OPTO ISOLATOR 6 OPTO ISOLATOR 7 OPTO ISOLATOR 8 OPTO ISOLATOR 9 OPTO ISOLATOR 10 OPTO ISOLATOR 11 OPTO ISOLATOR 12 OPTO ISOLATOR 13 OPTO ISOLATOR 14 OPTO ISOLATOR 15 OPTO ISOLATOR 16 OPTO ISOLATOR 17 OPTO ISOLATOR 18 OPTO ISOLATOR 19 OPTO ISOLATOR 20 OPTO ISOLATOR 21 OPTO ISOLATOR 22 OPTO ISOLATOR 23 OPTO ISOLATOR 24 OPTO ISOLATOR 25 OPTO ISOLATOR 26 OPTO ISOLATOR 27 OPTO ISOLATOR 28 OPTO ISOLATOR 29 OPTO ISOLATOR 30 OPTO ISOLATOR 31 OPTO ISOLATOR 32 Programmable LED 1 (By default TRIP A) Programmable LED 2 (By default TRIP B) Programmable LED 3 (By default TRIP C) Programmable LED 4 (By default GENERAL START) Programmable LED 5 (By default ZONE 1 + AIDED TRIP) Programmable LED 6 (By default FORWARD) Programmable LED 7 (By default REVERSE) Programmable LED 8 (By default AUTORECLOSE ENABLE) Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB
Source RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO OPTO LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 59
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52A_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_52B_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TPAR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_INTERNAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_1P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CYCLE_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_AR_CLOSING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BAR
Ordinal 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117
English Text
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CTL_CHECK_SYNCH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_HEALTHY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_BLK_PROTECTION DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRP_3P DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_TRIP_MAN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTA DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTB DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PROTC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CR_DEF
118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129
Ext Chk Synch OK
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_COS_DEF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_Z1X_EXT
130 131 132
DIST. COS
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_BUS
133
MCB/VTS Bus
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_MCB_VTS_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DEF_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PHOC_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_NPS_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_UNDU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_OVEU_TIMER_BLOCK_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_DISTANCE_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_CB_RESET_ALL_VALUES DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_RELAYS_LEDS
134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
MCB/VTS Line
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_STUB_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_A_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_B_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TRIP_C_USER DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_ZSP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_REC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TELETRIP_HEALT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_PAP_TIMER_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_SBEF_TIMER_BLOCK_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_RESET_THERMAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INP_TIMESYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_GENERAL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PROT_DISABLED DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_F_OUT_OF_RANGE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VTS_SLOW DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BREAKER_FAIL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_I_BROK_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OPS_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_MAINT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_OP_TIME_LOCKOUT
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185
Stub Bus Enable
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_PRE_LOCKOUT
186
F.F. Pre Lockout
DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_EFF_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LOCKOUT_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_STATUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_CONTROL_UNHEALTHLY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NO_CHECK_SYNC_CONTROL DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_AR_LOCKOUT_MAX_SHOTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_SG_OPTO_INVALID DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CB_FAIL_AR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_UNDER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_OVER_V_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_COS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_BROKEN_COND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_CVTS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOPRESENTS_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_VALIDITY_FAILURE_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_MODE_TEST_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_NOTSYNCHRO_DATAS_ACQ DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ALARM_USER5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_CLOSE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3POLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1ST_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_234TH_CYCLE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_TRIP_3PH DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_RECLAIM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_DISCRIM
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230
CB Aux C (52-A) CB Aux C (52-B) SPAR Enable TPAR Enable A/R Internal A/R 1p In Prog. A/R 3p In Prog. A/R Close A/R Reclaim BAR
CB Healthy BLK Protection Force 3P Trip Man. Close CB Man. Trip CB CB Discrepancy External Trip A External Trip B External Trip C DIST. Chan Recv DEF. Chan Recv
DEF. COS Z1X Extension
IN>1 Timer Block IN>2 Timer Block DEF Timer Block I>1 Timer Block I>2 Timer Block I>3 Timer Block I>4 Timer Block I2> Timer Block V2 Timer Block DIST. Tim. Block Reset Lockout Reset All values Reset Latches
User Trip A User Trip B User Trip C ZSP Timer Block PAP Tele Trip CR PAP Tele Trip Hea PAP Timer Block IN>3 Timer Block IN>4 Timer Block Reset Thermal Time Synchro General Alarm Prot'n Disabled F out of Range VT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm I^ Maint Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm CB Ops Maint CB Ops Lockout CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Lock
F.F. Lock Lockout Alarm CB Status Alam Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Unhealthty Control No C/S AR Lockout Shot> SG-opto Invalid A/R Fail V2 Alarm COS Alarm Brok. Cond. Alarm CVT Alarm Analog In Alarm Val/Fail Acq Al. Test Mode Acq Synchro Acq Al. alarm user 1 alarm user 2 alarm user 3 alarm user 4 alarm user 5 A/R Close A/R 1P In Prog A/R 3P In Prog A/R 1st In Prog A/R 234 In Prog A/R Trip 3P A/R Reclaim AR Discrim.
Description
Source
Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Circuit breaker pole A closed/Status input from CB Enable internal single pole autorecloser Enable internal three pole autorecloser Give internal autorecloser present (visible) One-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress Three-pole external autoreclose cycle in progress Circuit Breaker closing order from external autoreclose External autorecloser in reclaim Block internal autoreclose Autorisation signal from external check Synchroniser for reclosing with internal A/R Circuit breaker operational (gas pressure, mechanical state) Block all protection functions (21/67N/50/51/…) Three pole tripping only Circuit breaker manual close - order received Circuit breaker manual trip - order received CB Discrepancy (one pole open) Phase A trip by external protection relay Phase B trip by external protection relay Phase C trip by external protection relay Signal receive on main channel (Distance) Signal receive on DEF channel Distance scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard (Carrier out of service) DEF scheme channel out of service / Loss of Guard Zone 1 Extension Input Fuse failure on busbar VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Fuse failure on line VT or MCB open (blocks voltage dependant functions) Block earth fault stage 1 time delay Block earth fault stage 2 time delay Block aided DEF time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 1 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 2 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 3 time delay Block phase overcurrent stage 4 time delay Block negative sequence overcurrent time delay Block phase undervoltage stage 1 time delay Block phase undervoltage stage 2 time delay Block phase overvoltage stage 1 time delay Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delay Block distance element time delay CB monitoring lockout reset Reset all values of CB monitoring Reset all permanent alarms + led and relay lached Enable I>4 Element for stub bus protection (isolator of HV line open status isolator must be connected to an opto input) Internal input for trip logic A Internal input for trip logic B Internal input for trip logic C Zero Sequence Power - Timer Block PAP Carrier Receive for teletransmission PAP Carrier Out of Service (DT trip decision) Timer Block for frosen every timer initiated with PAP function Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>3 function Timer Block for frosen timer initiated with IN>4 function Reset Thermal Overload Protection
PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) Autorecloser
External time synchronisation input Groupment of all alarms Test mode enabled every protection out of order Frequency tracking not working correctly Fuse failure indication (VT alarm) Current transformers supervision indication Circuit breaker failure on any trip Broken current maintenance alarm (1st level) Broken current lockout alarm (2nd level) Alarm on number of circuit breaker operations Lockout on number of circuit breaker operations Alarm on CB excessive operating time CB locked out due to excessive operating time Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Excessive Fault Frequency CB Trip pre lockout Alarm (number of fault maxi) Lockout alarm Alarm Circuit Breaker Alarm CB Fail for manual trip command Alarm CB fail for manual closing command Alarm CB performed by unhealthy condition Autoreclosed works without checksynchronism Autoreclose lockout following final programmed attempt Setting group selected via opto (1 & 2 only) input invalid No check sync / autorecloser failed 1st stage undervoltage alarm 2nd stage undervoltage alarm 1st stage overvoltage alarm 2nd stage overvoltage alarm HF carrier anomaly alarm broken Conductor Alarm Alarm for capacitive voltage transformer Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units missing Alarm NCIT - Frame from Merge Units failed Alarm NCIT - Merge Units in test mode Alarm NCIT - frames not syncho Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Alarm user for dedicated PSL Autorecloser Close command to CB One-pole autoreclose cycle in progress Three-pole autoreclose cycle in progress First high speed autoreclose cycle in progress Further autoreclose cycles in progress Autorecloser signal to force all trips to be 3 Ph Reclaim timer timeout in progress Discrim. Time window in progress
PSL (IN) Autorecloser PSL (IN) CB STATUS PSL (IN) All protection PSL (IN) PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) CB Status PSL (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) Un-blocking logic PSL (IN) PSL (IN) VTS PSL (IN) VTS PSL (IN) Earth Fault PSL (IN) Earth Fault PSL (IN) DEF PSL (IN) I>1 PSL (IN) I>2 PSL (IN) I>3 PSL (IN) I>4 PSL (IN) I>4 PSL (IN) V2 PSL (IN) Distance PSL (IN) CB Monitoring PSL (IN) CB Monitoring PSl (IN) PSL (IN) PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) Trip Logic PSL (IN) ZSP PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) VT Supervision PSL (OUT) CT Supervision PSL (OUT) Breaker Fail PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) CB monitoring PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) V2 PSL(OUT) Unblocking logic PSL(OUT) Broken conductor PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL(IN) PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 60
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_1PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_3PAR_ENABLE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_LOCKOUT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_AR_FORCE_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_SYNC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_LINE DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DEAD_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_LIVE_BUS DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CONTROL_CLOSE_IN_PROG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CARRIER_SEND DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_UNB_CR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_FWD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_REV DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_ACC DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_PERM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_CR_BLOCK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1X DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Zp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
Ordinal 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338
English Text A/R Enable A/R SPAR Enable A/R TPAR Enable A/R Lockout A/R Force Sync. Check Synch. OK V< Dead Line V> Live Line V< Dead Bus V> Live Bus Ctrl Cls In Prog DIST Sig. Send DIST UNB CR DIST Fwd DIST Rev DIST Trip A DIST Trip B DIST Trip C DIST Start A DIST Start B DIST Start C DIST Sch. Accel. DIST Sch. Perm. DIST Sch. Block. Z1 Z1X Z2 Z3 Z4 Zp T1 T2 T3 T4 Tzp WI Trip A WI Trip B WI Trip C Power Swing Reversal Guard DEF Sig. Send DEF UNB CR DEF Rev DEF Fwd DEF Start A DEF Start B DEF Start C DEF Trip A DEF Trip B DEF Trip C IN>1 Trip IN>2 Trip IN>1 Start IN>2 Start V< Start Any A V< Start Any B V< Start Any C V1 Start V>2 Start V>1 Trip V>2 Trip I2> Start I2> Trip I> Start Any A I> Start Any B I> Start Any C I>1 Start I>2 Start I>3 Start I>4 Start I>1 Trip I>2 Trip I>3 Trip I>4 Trip SOTF Enable TOR Enable TOC Start A TOC Start B TOC Start C Any start 1ph Fault 2ph Fault 3ph Fault Any Trip Any Int. Trip A Any Int. Trip B Any Int. Trip C Any Trip A Any Trip B Any Trip C 1P Trip 3P Trip Brk.Conduct.Trip Loss. Load Trip SOTF/TOR Trip tBF1 Trip tBF2 Trip Control Trip Control Close VTS Fast CB Aux A
Description Autorecloser enabled / in service Single pole autorecloser activated Three pole autorecloser activated Autorecloser locked-out (no autoreclosure possible until reset) Force synchronism check to be made Check Synchronism conditions satisfied Check Synch. Dead Line Check Synch. Live Line Check Synch. Dead Bus Check Synch. Live Bus Manual (control) close in progress Distance protection schemes - Signal Send Unblock main channel received Distance protection: Forward fault detected Distance protection: Reverse fault detected Distance protection: Phase A trip Distance protection: Phase B trip Distance protection: Phase C trip Distance protection started on phase A Distance protection started on phase B Distance protection started on phase C Distance scheme Accelerating Distance scheme Permissive Distance scheme Blocking Fault in zone 1 Fault in zone 1 extended Fault in zone 2 Fault in zone 3 Fault in zone 4 Fault in zone P Timer in zone 1 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 2 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 3 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone 4 elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Timer in zone p elapsed (at 1 = end of timer) Phase A trip on weak infeed Phase B trip on weak infeed Phase C trip on weak infeed Power swing detected Current reversal guard logic in action DEF protection schemes - Signal Send Unblock DEF channel Channel Aided DEF: reverse fault Channel Aided DEF: forward fault Channel Aided DEF: start phase A Channel Aided DEF: start phase B Channel Aided DEF: start phase C Channel Aided DEF: trip phase A Channel Aided DEF: trip phase B Channel Aided DEF: trip phase C Earth fault stage 1 trip Earth fault stage 2 trip Earth fault stage 1 start Earth fault stage 2 start Any undervoltage start detected on phase A Any undervoltage start detected on phase B Any undervoltage start detected on phase C Undervoltage stage 1 start Undervoltage stage 2 start Undervoltage stage 1 trip Undervoltage stage 2 trip Any overvoltage start detected on phase A Any overvoltage start detected on phase B Any overvoltage start detected on phase C Overvoltage stage 1 start Overvoltage stage 2 start Overvoltage stage 1 trip Overvoltage stage 2 trip Negative Sequence Current Start Negative Sequence Current Trip Any overcurrent start for phase A Any overcurrent start for phase B Any overcurrent start for phase C Overcurrent stage 1 start Overcurrent stage 2 start Overcurrent stage 3 start Overcurrent stage 4 start Overcurrent stage 1 trip Overcurrent stage 2 trip Overcurrent stage 3 trip Overcurrent stage 4 trip Switch On To Fault enable Trip On Reclose enable Trip on Close start on phase A Trip on Close start on phase B Trip on Close start on phase C Any protection start Single phase fault Two phase fault Three phase fault Single or three pole trip or external protection trip Any internal protection A phase trip Any internal protection B phase trip Any internal protection C phase trip Any trip A (internal or external protection) Any trip B (internal or external protection) Any trip C (internal or external protection) Single pole trip (internal or external) Three pole trip (internal or external) Broken conductor trip Loss of load trip Switch on to fault trip or trip on reclose Breaker fail trip from tBF1 Breaker fail trip from tBF2 Control trip command from user Control close command from user Unstantaneous unconfirmed fuse failure internal detection CB Phase A status
Source PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Autorecloser PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) Synchro Check PSL (OUT) CB Control PSL (OUT) Distance PSL(OUT) Unblocking Logic PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Unblocking logic PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Aided DEF PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 1 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 2 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 1 PSL (OUT) Earth Fault 2 PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSL (OUT) Undervoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSl (OUT) Overvoltage PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C PSL (OUT) Neg Seq. O/C PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) Phase Overc. PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) TOR PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) All protection PSL (OUT) Broken Cond. PSL (OUT) Loss of load PSL (OUT) SOTF PSL (OUT) Breaker failure PSL (OUT) Breaker failure PSL (OUT) CB control PSL (OUT) CB control PSL (OUT) VTS PSL (OUT) CB status
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 61
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CB_AUX_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ANY_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ALL_POLE_DEAD DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AV_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIR_AM_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CVMR DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_CROSS_COUNTRY DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_ZSP_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_Z1_WIT_FILT DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_OUT_OF_STEP_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_STABLE_SWING_CONF DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_DIST_START_N DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_3_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_IN_SUP_4_PICK_UP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_TRIP_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_A DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_B DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_START_C DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRES_IN DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_PAP_PRE_START DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_TRACE_TRIG_OK DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PRT_THERMAL_OVERL_TRIP DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED371 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED372 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED373 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED374 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED375 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED376 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED377 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED378 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED379 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED380 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED381 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED382 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED383 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED384 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED385 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED386 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED387 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED388 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED389 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED390 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED391 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED392 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED393 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED394 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED395 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED396 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED397 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED398 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED399 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED400 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED401 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED402 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED403 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED404 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED405 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED406 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED407 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED408 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED409 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED410 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED411 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED412 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED413 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED414 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED415 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED416 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED417 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED418 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED419 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED420 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED421 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED422 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED423 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED424 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED425 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED426 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_UNUSED427 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_LED_CON_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_11
Ordinal 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446
English Text CB Aux B CB Aux C Any Pole Dead All Pole Dead DIST Fwd No Filt DIST Rev No Filt DIST Convergency Cross Count. Flt ZSP Start ZSP Trip Z1 Not Filtrated Out Of Step S. Swing Out Of Step Conf S. Swing Conf Dist Start N IN>3 Trip IN>4 Trip IN>3 Start IN>4 Start PAP Trip A PAP Trip B PAP Trip C PAP Trip IN PAP Start A PAP Start B PAP Start C
PAP Pres IN PAP Pre Start Trace Trig OK Thermal Alarm Trip Thermal Relay 8 Relay 9 Relay 10 Relay 11 Relay 12 Relay 13 Relay 14 Relay 15 Relay 16 Relay 17 Relay 18 Relay 19 Relay 20 Relay 21 Relay 22 Relay 23 Relay 24 Relay 25 Relay 26 Relay 27 Relay 28 Relay 29 Relay 30 Relay 31 Relay 32 Relay 33 Relay 34 Relay 35 Relay 36 Relay 37 Relay 38 Relay 39 Relay 40 Relay 41 Relay 42 Relay 43 Relay 44 Relay 45 Relay 46 Relay 47 Relay 48 Relay 49 Relay 50 Relay 51 Relay 52 Relay 53 Relay 54 Relay 55 Relay 56 Relay 57 Relay 58 Relay 59 Relay 60 Relay 61 Relay 62 Relay 63 Relay 64 LED Con IN 1 LED Con IN 2 LED Con IN 3 LED Con IN 4 LED Con IN 5 LED Con IN 6 LED Con IN 7 LED Con IN 8 Timer in 1 Timer in 2 Timer in 3 Timer in 4 Timer in 5 Timer in 6 Timer in 7 Timer in 8 Timer in 9 Timer in 10 Timer in 11
Description CB Phase B status CB Phase C status Any circuit breaker pole dead (one or more poles open) All circuit breaker poles dead (breaker open 3 phase) Distance protection: Forward fault detected not filted Distance protection: Reverse fault detected not filted Distance protection: Internal characteristic Cross Country Fault Zero Sequence Power - Start Zero Sequence Power - Trip Z1 decision not filtered by phase selection Start of an Out of Step Detection (1st cycle) Start of Stable Swing (1st cycle) Out of Step Confirmed (number of cycles reached) Stable Swing confirmed (number of cycles reached) Start of distance protection for phase to ground fault Trip decision from IN>3 function (timer issued) Trip decision from IN>4 function (timer issued) Start of IN>3 fucntion (timer initiated) Start of IN>4 fucntion (timer initiated) Trip A Phase decision from PAP function Trip B Phase decision from PAP function Trip C Phase decision from PAP function Trip decision from PAP function (Ground Fault detected) Phase A Start with PAP function Phase B Start with PAP function Phase C Start with PAP function Residual current detected by PAP function PAP Picks up by voltage detectors (timer initiated) Triggering trace has operated correctly Alarm from Thermal Overload function picks up Trip with Thermal Overload fucntion (timer issued) PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to Relay Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input Equivalent to LED Output Condition PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 1 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 2 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 3 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 4 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 5 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 6 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 7 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 8 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 9 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 10 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 11
Source PSL (OUT) CB status PSL (OUT) CB status PSL (OUT) Poledead PSL (OUT) Poledead PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) Distance PSL (OUT) ZSP PSL (OUT) ZSP PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL (OUT) PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL PSL Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer
Courier Data Base
P44x/EN GC/E44
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444
Page 62
Part C: Internal Digital Signals - DDB Element DDB Element Name DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMERIN_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_1 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_2 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_3 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_4 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_5 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_6 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_7 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_8 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_9 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_10 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_11 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_12 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_13 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_14 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_15 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_TIMEROUT_16 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_FAULT_RECORD_TRIG DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_BATTERY_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_PLAT_FIELD_VOLT_FAIL_ALARM DDB_ENTRY (DDB_REAR_COMMS_FAIL_ALARM_66 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_GOOSE_IED_MISSING_ALARM_67 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_ECARD_NOT_FITTED_ALARM_68 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_NOT_RESPONDING_69 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_FATAL_ERROR_70 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_SOFTWARE_RELOAD_71 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_TCP_IP_CONFIG_72 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INVALID_NIC_OSI_CONFIG_73 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_LINK_FAIL_74 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_SOFTWARE_MISMATCH_ALARM_75 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_NIC_IP_ADDRESS_CONFLICT_76 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_LOOPBACK_ALARM_77 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_MESSAGE_ALARM_78 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_DCD_ALARM_79 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_INTERMICOM_CHANNEL_ALARM_80 DDB_ENTRY (DDB_BACKUP_SETTING_ALARM_81
Ordinal 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486
English Text Timer in 12 Timer in 13 Timer in 14 Timer in 15 Timer in 16 Timer out 1 Timer out 2 Timer out 3 Timer out 4 Timer out 5 Timer out 6 Timer out 7 Timer out 8 Timer out 9 Timer out 10 Timer out 11 Timer out 12 Timer out 13 Timer out 14 Timer out 15 Timer out 16 Fault_REC_TRIG Battery Fail Field Volt Fail Comm2 H/W FAIL GOOSE IED Absent NIC Not Fitted NIC No Response NIC Fatal Error NIC Soft. Reload Bad TCP/IP Cfg. Bad OSI Config. NIC Link Fail NIC SW Mis-Match IP Addr Conflict IM Loopback IM Message Fail IM Data CD Fail IM Chanel Fail Back Up Setting
Description PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 12 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 13 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 14 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 15 PSL Input from Auxiliary Timer 16 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 1 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 2 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 3 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 4 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 5 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 6 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 7 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 8 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 9 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 10 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 11 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 12 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 13 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 14 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 15 PSL Ouput from Auxiliary Timer 16 Trigger for Fault Recorder Alarm battery fail Alarm field voltage Alarm second rear port Absence of GOOSE message from dedicated IED Alarm Ethernet (board not fitted) Alarm no response from Ethernet Board Alarm Fatal Error from Ethernet Board Alarm Ethernet Board (Configuraiton in progress) Alarm bad configuration TCP/IP Address Alarm Ethernet Alarm Ethernet Link Fail Alarm Ethernet version not compatible Alam Ethernet IP Adress Conflict InterMiCOM indication that loopback testing is in progress InterMiCOM message failure alarm InterMiCOM data channel detect fail InterMiCOM message channel fail Back up setting alarm
Source Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer Auxiliary Timer FRT PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT) PSL(OUT)
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 63
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End
Read and write access of Output Relays 1 Contact -1. 2 Contact -2. 3 Contact -3. 4 Contact - 4. 5 Contact - 5. 6 Contact - 6. 7 Contact - 7. 8 Contact -8. 9 Contact - 9. 10 Contact -10. 11 Contact -11. 12 Contact -12. 13 Contact -13. 14 Contact -14. 15 Contact -15. 16 Contact -16. 17 Contact -17. 18 Contact -18. 19 Contact -19. 20 Contact -20. 21 Contact -21. 22 Contact -22. 23 Contact -23. 24 Contact -24. 25 Contact - 25. 26 Contact - 26. 27 Contact - 27. 28 Contact - 28. 29 Contact - 29. 30 Contact -30. 31 Contact -31. 32 Contact -32. 33 Contact -33. 34 Contact -34. 35 Contact -35. 36 Contact -36. 37 Contact -37. 38 Contact -38. 39 Contact -39. 40 Contact -40. 41 Contact -41. 42 Contact -42. 43 Contact -43. 44 Contact -44. 45 Contact -45. 46 Contact -46. Read only access of the Opto-Isolators 10001 Input -1 10002 Input -2 10003 Input -3 10004 Input -4 10005 Input -5 10006 Input -6 10007 Input -7 10008 Input -8 10009 Input -9 10010 Input -10 10011 Input -11 10012 Input -12 10013 Input -13 10014 Input -14 10015 Input -15 10016 Input -16 10017 Input -17 10018 Input -18 10019 Input -19 10020 Input -20 10021 Input -21 10022 Input -22 10023 Input -23 10024 Input -24 Read only access of Data 30001 30001 Modbus Status Register 30002 30002 Plant Status 30004 30004 Control Status 30006 30006 Active Group 30007 30008 Relay O/P Status 1 30009 30010 Relay O/P Status 2 30011 30012 Alarm Status 1 30013 30014 Alarm Status 2 30015 30016 Alarm Status 3 30017 30017 Access Level 30020 30035 Model Number 30036 30037 Maint Type 30038 30039 Maint Data 30044 30051 Serial Number 30052 30059 Software Ref. 1 30090 30090 IRIG-B Status 30091 30091 Battery Status 30100 30100 Number of Event records stored 30101 30101 Number of Fault records stored 30102 30102 Number of Maint records stored 30103 30106 Time & Date 30107 30107 Event Type 30108 30109 Event Value 30110 30110 Modbus Adress 30111 30111 Event Index 30112 30112 Additionnal data present 30113 30113 Active Group 30114 30114 Faulted Phase 30115 30116 Start Elements 30117 30118 Trip Elements 30119 30119 Validities 30120 30123 Time Stamp 30124 30125 Fault Alarms 30126 30126 System Frequency 30127 30128 Fault Duration 30129 30130 Relay Trip Time 30131 30132 Fault Location 30133 30134 Fault Location 30135 30136 Fault Location
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH
Col
Row
Group Modbus
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD
GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7
GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 8 8 FF FF FF 1 FF 1 FF FF FF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
01 0C 0D 0E 40 41 50 51 52 D0 6 F2 F3 8 11 5 6 02 03 04 3 8C 5 8D 8E 05 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13
G26 G4 G5 G1 G9 G9 G96 G96 G96 G1 G3 G27 G27 G3 G3 G17 G59 G1 G1 G1 G12 G13 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G16 G84 G85 G130 G12 G87 G25 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24
1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 2
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8
1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 16 2 2 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
Cell Type
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 64
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 30137 30139 30141 30143 30145 30147 30149 30151 30153 30200 30202 30203 30205 30206 30208 30212 30214 30218 30220 30222 30230 30232 30233 30235 30236 30238 30239 30241 30242 30244 30245 30247 30248 30250 30251 30253 30255 30263 30264 30266 30267 30269 30270 30300 30303 30306 30309 30312 30315 30318 30321 30324 30327 30330 30333 30336 30339 30340 30341 30342 30343 30346 30349 30352 30360 30362 30364 30366 30368 30370 30372 30374 30376 30378 30380 30382 30384 30386 30388 30390 30392 30434 30600 30601 30602 30603 30605 30607 30609 30611 30612 30701 30702 30704 30706 30708 30710 30712 30714 30717 30720 30721 30722 30723 30725 30727 30729 30731 30733 30735 30737 30739
30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30153 30201 30202 30204 30205 30207 30208 30213 30214 30219 30221 30223 30231 30232 30234 30235 30237 30238 30240 30241 30243 30244 30246 30247 30249 30250 30252 30254 30256 30263 30265 30266 30268 30269 30270 30302 30305 30308 30311 30314 30317 30320 30323 30326 30329 30332 30335 30338 30339 30340 30341 30342 30345 30348 30351 30354 30361 30363 30365 30367 30369 30371 30373 30375 30377 30379 30381 30383 30385 30387 30389 30391 30393 30434 30600 30601 30602 30604 30606 30608 30609 30611 30612 30701 30703 30705 30707 30709 30711 30713 30716 30719 30720 30721 30722 30724 30726 30728 30730 30732 30734 30736 30738 30740
Fault Location IA IB IC VAN VBN VCN Fault Resistance Fault in Zone IA Magnitude IA Phase Angle IB Magnitude IB Phase Angle IC Magnitude IC Phase Angle IN Derived Mag IN Derived Angle I1 Magnitude I2 Magnitude I0 Magnitude VAB Magnitude VAB Phase Angle VBC Magnitude VBC Phase Angle VCA Magnitude VCA Phase Angle VAN Magnitude VAN Phase Angle VBN Magnitude VBN Phase Angle VCN Magnitude VCN Phase Angle VN Derived Mag VN Derived Ang V1 Magnitude V2 Magnitude V0 Magnitude Frequency C/S Voltage Mag C/S Voltage Ang IM Magnitude IM Angle Slip Frequency A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph Power Factor APh Power Factor BPh Power Factor CPh Power Factor 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand A Phase Watts B Phase Watts C Phase Watts A Phase VArs B Phase VArs C Phase VArs A Phase VA B Phase VA C Phase VA 3 Phase Watts 3 Phase VArs 3 Phase VA Zero Seq Power 3Ph W Fix Demand 3Ph VArs Fix Dem 3Ph W Peak Demand 3Ph VArs Peak Demand Thermal State CB A Operations CB B Operations CB C Operations Total IA Broken Total IB Broken Total IC Broken CB Operate Time Total 1P Reclosures Total 3P Reclosures Modbus Status Register Measurements1 - IA Magnitude Measurements1 - IB Magnitude Measurements1 - IC Magnitude Measurements1 - VAB Magnitude Measurements1 - VBC Magnitude Measurements1 - VCA Magnitude Measurements2 -3 phase Watts Measurements2 -3 phase Vars Measurements2 -3 phase powerFactor Measurements1 -Frequency Test Port Status DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128 DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256
Col
Row
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 FF 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F
14 15 16 17 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 0A 0D 0E 0F 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 22 23 24 25 26 2A 2B 2C 2F 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 16 17 20 21 EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0A 01
4 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Group Modbus G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G110 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G24 G24 G30 G24 G30 G24 G30 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G30 G30 G30 G30 G29 G29 G29 G29 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G125 G30 G1 G1 G1 G125 G125 G125 G25 G1 G1 G26 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G24 G29 G29 G30 G30 G124 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cell Type Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
Min
Max
Step
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 65
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 30741 30743 30745 30747 30749 30751 30753 30755 30757 30759 30761 30763 30765 30767 30769 30771 30773 30775 30777 30779 30781 30783 30785 30800 30801 30802 30803 30930 30934 31000 31016 31020 31022 31038 31042 31044 31060 31064 31066 31082 31086 310000 310001 310002 310004 310006 310008 310010 310012 310014 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021
30742 30744 30746 30748 30750 30752 30754 30756 30758 30760 30762 30764 30766 30768 30770 30772 30774 30776 30778 30780 30782 30784 30786 30800 30801 30802 30929 30933 30934 31015 31019 31021 31037 31041 31043 31059 31063 31065 31079 31085 31087 310000 310001 310003 310005 310007 310009 310011 310013 310015 310016 310017 310018 310019 310020 310021
DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1022 - 992 Number of disturbance records. Oldest stored disturbance record. Number registers in current page. Disturbance record data [1-127] Disturbance record time stamp. Disturbance recorder status Grp1 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp2 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID Grp3 PSL Ref Date/Time PSL unique ID IM Input Status IM Output Status Rx Direct Count Rx Perm Count Rx Block Count Rx NewDataCount Rx ErroredCount Lost Messages Elapsed Time Data CD Status FrameSync Status Message Status Channel Status IM H/W Status Loopback Status
Read and write access of Settings 40001 40002 Password 40004 40011 Description 40012 40019 Plant Reference 40020 40020 Frequency 40021 40021 CB Trip/Close 40022 40022 Password Control 40023 40024 Password Level 1 40025 40026 Password Level 2 40100 40100 Select Event 40101 40101 Select Fault 40102 40102 Select Report 40103 40103 Reset Demand 40104 40104 Reset Thermal 40140 40140 Reset CB Data 40141 40141 Reset Total A/R 40151 40151 Broken I^ 40152 40152 I^ Maintenance 40153 40154 I^ Maintenance 40155 40155 I^ Lockout 40156 40157 I^ Lockout 40158 40158 N° CB Ops Maint 40159 40159 N° CB Ops Maint 40160 40160 N° CB Ops Lock 40161 40161 N° CB Ops Lock 40162 40162 CB Time Maint 40163 40164 CB Time Maint 40165 40165 CB Time Lockout 40166 40167 CB Time Lockout 40168 40168 Fault Freq Lock 40169 40169 Fault Freq Count 40170 40171 Fault Freq Time 40172 40172 Lockout Reset 40173 40173 Reset Lockout by 40174 40174 Man Close RstDly 40200 40200 CB Control by 40201 40201 Manual Close Pulse Time 40202 40202 Trip Pulse Time 40203 40203 Man Close Delay 40204 40204 A/R Single Pole 40205 40205 A/R Three Pole 40206 40207 Healthy Window 40208 40209 C/S Window 40250 40250 SelectDisturbance record. 40251 40251 Select dist data format 40300 40303 Date/Time 40304 40304 IRIG-B Sync 40305 40305 Battery Alarm 40306 40306 IEC Time Format 40400 40400 Record Selection Command Register 40401 40401 Record Control Command Register 40402 40402 Restore Defaults 40403 40403 Setting Group 40404 40404 Active Settings
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH
Col
Row
Group Modbus
0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F FF FF FF FF FF FF B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 6 7 8 09-87 88 8F 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 1 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 30 41 42 43 44 45 52
G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G3 G12 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G10 G27 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 127 4 1 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 16 4 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 FF FF 8 8 8 FF FF FF 9 9 9
2 4 5 9 10 D1 D2 D3 1 6 F0 25 3 8 0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 7 8 5 6 89 90 1 4 7 91 8A 8B 1 2 3
G20 G3 G3 G1 G55 G22 G20 G20 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G11 G11 G2 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G88 G1 G88 G35 G88 G35 G88 G1 G35 G11 G81 G2 G99 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G35 G35 G1 G1 G12 G37 G37 G37 G18 G6 G53 G61 G90
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 2 1 1 4
1 2 2 1 1 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 8 8 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Setting Setting
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
65 32 32 50 0 0 65 65 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1*NM1 0 1*NM1 0 1 0 1 0 0,005 0 0,005 0 0 0 0 0 0.01 0 0.1 0.1 0.01 0 0 0.01 0.01 1
90 163 163 60 2 2 90 90 249 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 1 25000*NM1 1 25000*NM1 1 10000 1 10000 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 9999 9999 1 1 600 7 10 5 600 1 1 9999 9999 65535
1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0,1 1 1*NM1 1 1*NM1 1 1 1 1 1 0,001 1 0,001 1 1 1 1 1 0.01 1 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 0.01 0.01 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 24 4 5 1 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 66
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40440 40500 40502 40503 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 40520 40521 40522 40523 40524 40525 40526 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 40545 40547 40549 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638 40639 40640 40641
40405 40406 40407 40408 40409 40410 40411 40412 40413 40414 40415 40416 40417 40418 40419 40420 40421 40422 40423 40424 40440 40501 40502 40504 40505 40506 40507 40508 40509 40510 40511 40520 40521 40522 40523 40524 40525 40526 40527 40529 40531 40533 40535 40537 40539 40541 40543 40545 40547 40549 40551 40553 40555 40557 40559 40561 40563 40565 40567 40569 40571 40573 40575 40577 40579 40581 40583 40585 40587 40589 40600 40601 40602 40603 40604 40605 40606 40607 40608 40609 40610 40611 40612 40613 40614 40615 40616 40617 40618 40619 40620 40621 40622 40623 40624 40625 40626 40627 40628 40629 40630 40631 40632 40633 40634 40635 40636 40637 40638 40639 40640 40641
Save Changes Copy From Copy to Setting Group 1 Setting Group 2 Setting Group 3 Setting Group 4 Dist. Protection Power-Swing Back-Up I> Neg Sequence O/C Broken Conductor Earth Fault Prot Aided D.E.F Volt Protection CB Fail & I< Supervision System Checks Thermal Overload Internal A/R InterMiCOM Main VT Primary Main VT Sec'y C/S VT Primary C/S VT Secondary Phase CT Primary Phase CT Sec'y Mcomp CT Primary Mcomp CT Sec'y C/S Input Main VT Location Alarm Event Relay O/P Event Opto Input Event System Event Fault Rec Event Maint Rec Event Protection Event DDB element 31 - 0 DDB element 63 - 32 DDB element 95 - 64 DDB element 127 - 96 DDB element 159 - 128 DDB element 191 - 160 DDB element 223 - 192 DDB element 255 - 224 DDB element 287 - 256 DDB element 319 - 288 DDB element 351 - 320 DDB element 383 - 352 DDB element 415 - 384 DDB element 447 - 415 DDB element 479 - 448 DDB element 511 - 480 DDB element 543 - 512 DDB element 575 - 544 DDB element 607 - 575 DDB element 639 - 608 DDB element 671 - 640 DDB element 703 - 672 DDB element 735 - 704 DDB element 767 - 736 DDB element 799 - 768 DDB element 831 - 800 DDB element 863 - 832 DDB element 895 - 864 DDB element 927 - 896 DDB element 959 - 928 DDB element 991 - 960 DDB element 1022 - 992 Duration Trigger Position Trigger Mode Analog Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3 Analog Channel 4 Analog Channel 5 Analog Channel 6 Analog Channel 7 Analog Channel 8 Digital Input 1 Input 1 Trigger Digital Input 2 Input 2 Trigger Digital Input 3 Input 3 Trigger Digital Input 4 Input 4 Trigger Digital Input 5 Input 5 Trigger Digital Input 6 Input 6 Trigger Digital Input 7 Input 7 Trigger Digital Input 8 Input 8 Trigger Digital Input 9 Input 9 Trigger Digital Input 10 Input 10 Trigger Digital Input 11 Input 11 Trigger Digital Input 12 Input 12 Trigger Digital Input 13 Input 13 Trigger Digital Input 14 Input 14 Trigger Digital Input 15 Input 15 Trigger Digital Input 16
Col
Row
Group Modbus
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C
4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0D 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 24 40 1 2 3 4 7 8 0D 0E 0F 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A
G62 G90 G98 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G131 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G35 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G40 G89 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G37 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 G52 G53 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G2 G2 G34 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Command Setting Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 80*V1 100 80*V2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000000 140*V1 1000000 140*V2 30000 5 30000 5 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10.5 100 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1*V1 1 1*V2 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 31 0.01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 67
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40859 40861 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40933 40935 40950 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964 40965 40966
40642 40643 40644 40645 40646 40647 40648 40649 40650 40651 40652 40653 40654 40655 40656 40657 40658 40659 40660 40661 40662 40663 40664 40665 40666 40667 40668 40669 40670 40671 40672 40673 40674 40700 40701 40702 40703 40704 40705 40706 40707 40800 40801 40802 40802 40803 40803 40850 40851 40852 40853 40854 40855 40856 40857 40858 40860 40862 40863 40864 40865 40900 40901 40902 40903 40904 40905 40906 40907 40908 40909 40910 40911 40912 40913 40914 40915 40916 40917 40918 40919 40920 40921 40922 40923 40924 40925 40926 40927 40928 40929 40930 40931 40932 40934 40935 40951 40952 40953 40954 40955 40956 40957 40958 40959 40960 40961 40962 40963 40964 40965 40966
Input 16 Trigger Digital Input 17 Input 17 Trigger Digital Input 18 Input 18 Trigger Digital Input 19 Input 19 Trigger Digital Input 20 Input 20 Trigger Digital Input 21 Input 21 Trigger Digital Input 22 Input 22 Trigger Digital Input 23 Input 23 Trigger Digital Input 24 Input 24 Trigger Digital Input 25 Input 25 Trigger Digital Input 26 Input 26 Trigger Digital Input 27 Input 27 Trigger Digital Input 28 Input 28 Trigger Digital Input 29 Input 29 Trigger Digital Input 30 Input 30 Trigger Digital Input 31 Input 31 Trigger Digital Input 32 Input 32 Trigger Default Display Local Values Remote Values Measurement Ref Measurement Mode Demand Interval Distance Unit Fault Location Remote Address Inactivity Timer Baud Rate Baud Rate Parity Parity Monitor Bit 1 Monitor Bit 2 Monitor Bit 3 Monitor Bit 4 Monitor Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Monitor Bit 7 Monitor Bit 8 Test Mode Test Pattern 1 Test Pattern 2 Contact Test Test LEDs Autoreclose Test Global threshold Opto Input 1 Opto Input 2 Opto Input 3 Opto Input 4 Opto Input 5 Opto Input 6 Opto Input 7 Opto Input 8 Opto Input 9 Opto Input 10 Opto Input 11 Opto Input 12 Opto Input 13 Opto Input 14 Opto Input 15 Opto Input 16 Opto Input 17 Opto Input 18 Opto Input 19 Opto Input 20 Opto Input 21 Opto Input 22 Opto Input 23 Opto Input 24 Opto Input 25 Opto Input 26 Opto Input 27 Opto Input 28 Opto Input 29 Opto Input 30 Opto Input 31 Opto Input 32 Opto Filter Cntl Characteristic Ctrl I/P Status Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15
Col
Row
Group Modbus
0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0C 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0D 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0E 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 0F 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 50 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10
G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G32 G66 G52 G54 G54 G56 G1 G2 G97 G51 G1 G2 G38 G38 G39 G39 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G204 G9 G9 G93 G94 G36 G200 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G201 G8 G1 G202 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cell Type
Min
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 DDB Size 2 6 1 1 5 3 99 1 2 247 30 1 1 2 2 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 1 4294967295 16383 2 1 4 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4294967295 1 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 68
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410100 410108 410116 410124 410132 410140 410148 410156 410164 410172 410180 410188 410196 410204 410212 410220 410228 410236 410244 410252 410260 410268 410276 410284 410292 410300 410308 410316 410324 410332 410340
40967 40968 40969 40970 40971 40972 40973 40974 40975 40976 40977 40978 40979 40980 40981 40982 40983 410002 410003 410004 410005 410006 410007 410008 410009 410010 410011 410012 410013 410014 410015 410016 410017 410018 410019 410020 410021 410022 410023 410024 410025 410026 410027 410028 410029 410030 410031 410032 410033 410034 410035 410036 410037 410038 410039 410040 410041 410042 410043 410044 410045 410046 410047 410048 410049 410050 410051 410052 410053 410054 410055 410056 410057 410058 410059 410060 410061 410062 410063 410064 410065 410107 410115 410123 410131 410139 410147 410155 410163 410171 410179 410187 410195 410203 410211 410219 410227 410235 410243 410251 410259 410267 410275 410283 410291 410299 410307 410315 410323 410331 410339 410347
Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31 Control Input 32 Control Input 1 Ctrl Command 1 Control Input 2 Ctrl Command 2 Control Input 3 Ctrl Command 3 Control Input 4 Ctrl Command 4 Control Input 5 Ctrl Command 5 Control Input 6 Ctrl Command 6 Control Input 7 Ctrl Command 7 Control Input 8 Ctrl Command 8 Control Input 9 Ctrl Command 9 Control Input 10 Ctrl Command 10 Control Input 11 Ctrl Command 11 Control Input 12 Ctrl Command 12 Control Input 13 Ctrl Command 13 Control Input 14 Ctrl Command 14 Control Input 15 Ctrl Command 15 Control Input 16 Ctrl Command 16 Control Input 17 Ctrl Command 17 Control Input 18 Ctrl Command 18 Control Input 19 Ctrl Command 19 Control Input 20 Ctrl Command 20 Control Input 21 Ctrl Command 21 Control Input 22 Ctrl Command 22 Control Input 23 Ctrl Command 23 Control Input 24 Ctrl Command 24 Control Input 25 Ctrl Command 25 Control Input 26 Ctrl Command 26 Control Input 27 Ctrl Command 27 Control Input 28 Ctrl Command 28 Control Input 29 Ctrl Command 29 Control Input 30 Ctrl Command 30 Control Input 31 Ctrl Command 31 Control Input 32 Ctrl Command 32 Control Input 1 Control Input 2 Control Input 3 Control Input 4 Control Input 5 Control Input 6 Control Input 7 Control Input 8 Control Input 9 Control Input 10 Control Input 11 Control Input 12 Control Input 13 Control Input 14 Control Input 15 Control Input 16 Control Input 17 Control Input 18 Control Input 19 Control Input 20 Control Input 21 Control Input 22 Control Input 23 Control Input 24 Control Input 25 Control Input 26 Control Input 27 Control Input 28 Control Input 29 Control Input 30 Control Input 31
Col
Row
Group Modbus
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 10 11 14 15 18 19 1C 1D 20 21 24 25 28 29 2C 2D 30 31 34 35 38 39 3C 3D 40 41 44 45 48 49 4C 4D 50 51 54 55 58 59 5C 5D 60 61 64 65 68 69 6C 6D 70 71 74 75 78 79 7C 7D 80 81 84 85 88 89 8C 8D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F
G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G203 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G234 G232 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3 G3
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Command Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 69
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
Col
Row
Group Modbus
Control Input 32 Source Address Received Address Baud Rate Remote Device Ch Statistics Reset Statistics Ch Diagnostics Loopback Mode Test Pattern IM Msg Alarm Lvl IM1 Cmd Type IM1 FallBackMode IM1 DefaultValue IM1 FrameSyncTim IM2 Cmd Type IM2 FallBackMode IM2 DefaultValue IM2 FrameSyncTim IM3 Cmd Type IM3 FallBackMode IM3 DefaultValue IM3 FrameSyncTim IM4 Cmd Type IM4 FallBackMode IM4 DefaultValue IM4 FrameSyncTim IM5 Cmd Type IM5 FallBackMode IM5 DefaultValue IM5 FrameSyncTim IM6 Cmd Type IM6 FallBackMode IM6 DefaultValue IM6 FrameSyncTim IM7 Cmd Type IM7 FallBackMode IM7 DefaultValue IM7 FrameSyncTim IM8 Cmd Type IM8 FallBackMode IM8 DefaultVa+C358ue IM8 FrameSyncTim
29 15 15 15
20 10 11 12
G3 G1 G1 G1
15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
20 31 40 50 51 1 10 11 12 13 18 19 1A 1B 20 21 22 23 28 29 2A 2B 30 31 32 33 38 39 3A 2B 40 41 42 43 48 49 4A 4B
G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2 G1 G1 G1 G2
Line Length Line Length Line Impedance Line Angle kZ1 Res Comp kZ1 Angle Z1 Z1X R1G R1Ph tZ1 kZ2 Res Comp kZ2 Angle Z2 R2G R2Ph tZ2 kZ3/4 Res Comp kZ3/4 Angle Z3 R3G - R4G R3Ph - R4Ph tZ3 Z4 tZ4 Zone P - Direct. kZp Res Comp kZp Angle Zp RpG RpPh tZp Serial Comp line Zone Overlap mode Z1m Tilt Angle Z1p Tilt Angle Z2/Zp Tilt Angle Fwd Zone Chg Del kZm Mutual Comp kZm Angle Program Mode Standard Mode Fault Type Trip Mode Sig. Send Zone DistCR Tp tReversal Guard Unblocking Logic TOR-SOTF Mode SOFT Delay Z1Ext On Chan.Fail WI :Mode Status WI : Single Pole Trip WI : V< Thres. WI : Trip Time Delay PAP : TeleTrip Enable PAP : Trip Delayed Enable PAP : P1 PAP : 1P Trip Time Delay PAP : P2 PAP : P3 PAP : 3P Trip Delay PAP : Residual Current PAP : K LoL: Mode Status
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
2 3 4 5 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2B 2C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0A 0B 0C 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C
G35 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G35 G2 G123 G2 G2 G35 G2 G2 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G2 G106 G107 G115 G114 G108 G109 G2 G2 G113 G118 G2 G37 G116 G37 G2 G2 G37 G37 G37 G2 G37 G37 G2 G2 G2 G37
End 410348 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410520 410522 410523 410524 410525 410527 410528 410529 410530 410532 410533 410534 410535 410537 410538 410539 410540 410542 410543 410544 410545 410547 410548 410549 410550 410552 410553 410554 410555 410557 410558 410559 410560
410355 410500 410501 410502 410503 410504 410505 410506 410507 410508 410521 410522 410523 410524 410526 410527 410528 410529 410531 410532 410533 410534 410536 410537 410538 410539 410541 410542 410543 410544 410546 410547 410548 410549 410551 410552 410553 410554 410556 410557 410558 410559 410561
Group 1 41000 41002 41004 41006 41007 41008 41009 41011 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41018 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41025 41027 41028 41029 41030 41032 41033 41034 41035 41036 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41044 41045 41046 41047 41048 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41059 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075
41001 41003 41005 41006 41007 41008 41010 41012 41013 41014 41015 41016 41017 41019 41020 41021 41022 41023 41024 41026 41027 41028 41029 41031 41032 41033 41034 41035 41037 41038 41039 41040 41041 41042 41043 41044 41045 41046 41047 41048 41050 41051 41052 41053 41054 41055 41056 41057 41058 41059 41060 41061 41062 41063 41064 41065 41066 41067 41068 41069 41070 41071 41072 41073 41074 41075
P441A P441B G G P442AG P442BG P444AG P444BG P444AH P444BH
Cell Type
Min
Max
Step
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01 0 0 0 0,01
163 10 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 8 100 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5 2 1 1 1,5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 0,1 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01 1 1 1 0,01
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting
300 0.2 0.001*V1/I1 -90 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 -180 0.001*V1/I1 0 0 0 0 0 -45 -45 -45 0 0 -180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0,1 0 0 1 0.2*I1 0.5*V1 0
1000000 625 500*V1/I1 90 7 180 500*V1/I1 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 500*V1/I1 10 1 7 180 500*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 400*V1/I1 10 1 1 45 45 45 0,1 7 180 1 6 2 2 3 5 1 0.15 2 127 3600 1 3 1 70 1 1 1 1 1,5 1 1 12 1*I1 1*V1 1
10 0.005 0.001*V1/I1 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.002 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 0.001*V1/I1 0.01 1 0.001 0.1 0.001*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01*V1/I1 0.01 1 1 1 1 1 0,1 0,01 0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.002 0.002 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 0.002 1 1 1 0,1 1 1 0,1 0.01*I1 0.05*V1 1
P44x/EN GC/E44
Courier Data Base
Page 70
MiCOM P441, P442 & P444 Part D: Menu Data Base for MODBUS Modbus Address Start
End 41076 41077 41078 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41427 41426 41427 41428 41429 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957
41076 41077 41078 41150 41151 41152 41153 41154 41155 41156 41157 41158 41159 41160 41161 41162 41250 41251 41252 41253 41254 41255 41256 41257 41258 41259 41260 41261 41262 41263 41264 41265 41266 41267 41268 41269 41270 41271 41272 41273 41274 41275 41300 41301 41302 41303 41304 41305 41350 41351 41352 41353 41400 41401 41402 41403 41404 41405 41406 41407 41408 41409 41410 41411 41412 41413 41414 41415 41416 41417 41418 41419 41420 41420 41421 41422 41423 41424 41425 41427 41426 41427 41428 41429 41450 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41501 41502 41503 41504 41505 41600 41601 41602 41603 41604 41949 41950 41951 41952 41953 41954 41955 41956 41957
LoL. Chan. Fail LoL: I< LoL: Window DR DX IN > Status IN > (% Imax) I2 > Status I2 > (% Imax) Imax Line > Status Imax Line > Delta I Status Unblocking Time-Delay Blocking Zones Out Of Step Stable Swing I>1 Function I>1 Directional I>1 VTS Block I>1 Current Set I>1 Time Delay I>1 Time Delay VTS I>1 TMS I>1 Time Dial I>1 Reset Char I>1 tRESET I>2 Function I>2 Directional I>2 VTS Block I>2 Current Set I>2 Time Delay I>2 Time Delay VTS I>2 TMS I>2 Time Dial I>2 Reset Char I>2 tRESET I>3 Status I>3 Current Set I>3 Time Delay I>4 Status I>4 Current Set I>4 Time Delay I2> Status I2> Directional I2> VTS I2> Current Set I2> Time Delay I2> Char Angle Broken Conductor I2/I1 Setting I2/I1 Time Delay I2/I1 Trip IN>1 Function IN>1 Directional IN>1 VTS Block IN>1 Current Set IN>1 Time Delay IN>1 Time Delay VTS IN>1 TMS IN>1 Time Dial IN>1 Reset Char IN>1 tRESET IN>2 Status IN>2 Directional IN>2 VTS Block IN>2 Current Set IN>2 Time Delay IN>2 Time Delay VTS IN>3 Status IN>3 Directional IN>3 VTS Block IN>3 Current Set IN>3 Calcul Mode IN>3 Time Delay IN>3 Time Delay VTS IN>4 Status IN>4 Directional IN>4 VTS Block IN>4 Current Set IN>4 Calcul Mode IN>4 Time Delay IN>4 Time Delay VTS IN> Char Angle Polarisation Channel Aided DEF Status Polarisation V> Voltage Set IN Forward Time Delay Scheme Logic Tripping Tp IN Rev Factor Characteristic Thermal Trip Thermal Alarm Time Constant 1 Time Constant 2 Zero Seq. Power Status K Time Delay Factor Basis Time Delay Residual Current Residual Power V< & V> MODE V< Measur't Mode V Status Enabled
IN > (% Imax) 40 %
I2 > Status Enabled
I2 > (% Imax) 30 %
Imax Line > Status Enabled
PAP: Tele Trip En Disabled
PAP: Del. Trip En Disabled
PAP: P1 Disabled
PAP: 1P Time Del 500 ms
PAP: P2 Disabled
PAP: P3 Disabled
PAP 3P Time Del 2.000 s
PAP: IN Thres 500.0 mA
PAP; K (%Un) 0.500
Loss Of Load Group 1
LoL: Mode Status Disabled
Fault Type Both Enabled
Trip Mode Force 3 Poles (5) Sig. Send Zone None (5) DistCR None (6) Tp 20.0 ms
tReversal Guard 20.0 ms
Unblocking Logic None
TOR-SOTF Mode
SOFT Delay 110 s
Z1Ext Fail Disabled
Weak Infeed Group 1
Disabled/PAP/Trip Echo
WI: Single Pole Disabled (4) WI : V< Thres. 45 V (4) WI : Trip Time Delay 60 ms
WI :Mode Status
00000000110000
500 mΩ
Delta X
Standard Mode Basic + Z1X
LoL: Window
40ms
I>2 Reset Char DT (4) Cells activated with WI Trip & Echo (5) Enable with Open Scheme (6) Enable with Blocking Scheme
I>2 Time Dial
LoL: I<
500 mA
2A
0s
7
1
7
1
I>4 Time Delay
I>4 Current Set
I>4 Status Disabled
I>3 Time Delay
I>3 Current Set
I>3 Status Enabled
I>2 tRESET
I2> Char Angle
I2> Time Delay
4s
4A
3s
3A
0s
-45 °
10 s
I2> Current Set 200 mA
I2> VTS Non-Directional
I2> Directional Non-Directional
I2> Status Enabled
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1
(7)
(7) Activated if enable in Configuration
I>2 Time Delay VTS 2s
I>2 Current Set
I>2 VTS Block Non-Directional
I>2 Directional Non-Directional
I>2 Function DT
I>1 tRESET
I>1 Reset Char DT
I>1 Time Dial
I>1 TMS
I>1 Time Delay VTS 1.000 s
I>1 Current Set 1.500 A
I>1 VTS Block Non-Directional
I>1 Directional Directional Fwd
I>2 TMS
1
1
BACK-UP I> GROUP 1 I>1 Function DT
(7)
LoL. Chan. Fail Disabled
Stable Swing
Out Of Step
Blocking Zones 00000
Unblocking Delay 30.0 s
Delta I Status Enabled
Imax Line> 3.000 A
500 mΩ
Delta R
1 POWER-SWING GROUP 1
Program Mode Standard Scheme
DISTANCE SCHEMES GROUP 1
MiCOM P441/P442 & P444
Menu Content Tables
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP1
I2/I1 Trip Disabled
I2/I1 Time Delay
I2/I1 Setting 0.2
60 s
Broken Conductor Enabled
(7)
DT
1s
Enabled
0s
DT
7
1
IN> Char Angle
Idem for IN>3 & IN>4
-45
IN>2 Time Delay VTS 2.0 s
IN>2 Current Set 300.0 mA
IN>2 VTS Block Non-Directional
IN>2 Directional Non-Directional
IN>2 Status
IN>1 tRESET
IN>1 Reset Char
IN>1 Time Dial
IN>1 TMS
IN>1 Time Delay VTS 0.2 s
IN>1 Time Delay
IN>1 Current Set 200.0 mA
IN>1 VTS Block Non-Directional
IN>1 Directional Directional Fwd
IN>1 Function
EARTH FAULT O/C GROUP 1
(7)
Enabled
Shared
0s
Polarisation Zero Sequence
0.600
20.00 ms
Three Phase
IN Rev Factor
Tp
Tripping
1.0 V
100.0 mA
Scheme Logic
Time Delay
IN Forward
V> Voltage Set
Polarisation Zero Sequence
Channel Aided DEF Status
AIDED D.E.F. GROUP 1
Time Constant 2
Time Constant 1
5.00
10.00
70.0%
1.000 A Thermal Alarm
Thermal Trip
Characteristic Simple/Dual
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1
Enabled
1.00 s
Po Threshold 0.5 mVA
IN Current Set 100.0 mA
Fix Time Delay
Time Delay Factor 0.00 s
Po status
ZERO SEQ. POWER GROUP1
Page 5/6
P44x/EN HI/E44
CB Fail 1 Timer 200.0 ms
CB Fail 2 Status Disabled
V< Measur't Mode Phase-Neutral
V2 Status
Enabled
1
V>2 Time Delay 500.0 ms
CVTS Time Delay 100.0 s
V>1 Time Delay
V>1 TMS
1.0 V
CVTS VN>
V>1 Voltage Set 75.0 V
10.0 s
Disabled
CVTS Status
V>1 Function
DT
CVT SUPERVISION GROUP 1
100.0 mA
V> Measur't Mode Phase-Neutral
CTS IN> Set
1.0 V
Disabled CTS VN< Inhibit
CTS Status
5.0 s
V>2 Voltage Set 90.0 V
100.0 mA
30.0 V
Disabled
CT SUPERVISION GROUP 1
Delta I>
Threshold 3P
Detect 3P
CTS Time Delay
5.0 s
5.0 s VTS I2> & I0> Inhibit 50.0 mA
VTS Time Delay
VT SUPERVISION GROUP 1
SUPERVISION GROUP 1
OVERVOLTAGE GROUP 1
V
View more...
Comments
